JP6643865B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a game area into which game media is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of obstacle nails implanted in the game area, and a game medium in the game area. (General winning opening, starting opening, variable winning opening (variable starting opening, large winning opening, character winning opening), V winning opening, etc.), and game media can be received in the receiving opening. With this, a bonus (such as payout of a game medium, an occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage in opening and closing a variable winning opening, etc.) is given to the player, and the player can be entertained. In addition, the gaming machine is provided with effect display means such as a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying an effect image in the center of the game area when viewed from the front, and by displaying an effect image according to the progress of the game, The images also delight the player and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

This type of gaming machine has an upper plate in which a game medium for driving into the game area is stored below the game area in a front view, and a lower plate which is arranged below the upper plate and stores the game medium. And (For example, Patent Document 1).

However, in a gaming machine provided with a dish for storing such a game medium, something more suitable for realizing the function as a dish is required.

JP 2014-108258 A

  The present invention proposes a more preferable configuration of a lower plate in a gaming machine.

The present invention
A game board on which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed ,
A body frame on which the gaming board is mounted,
A door frame provided to be openable and closable on the main body frame,
A swelling portion that swells forward below the game area in a front view and has a predetermined space formed therein,
An upper plate main body in which a game medium for performing a game in the game area is stored,
A lower plate main body which is disposed below the upper plate main body and through which a game medium can flow from a predetermined supply port to a storage area formed by a bottom wall having a predetermined shape and a vertical wall having a predetermined height,
With
The door frame is configured to include the bulging portion, the upper plate main body, and the lower plate main body,
The lower plate main body has a first lower plate portion formed with a region facing the front of the gaming machine, and a second lower plate portion provided integrally with the first lower plate portion and formed with a region not facing the front of the gaming machine. And 2 lower plates,
The predetermined space is formed on the side of the second lower plate so that the game medium in the storage area does not enter regardless of the open / closed state of the door frame,
The second lower plate portion functions as a part of a member that forms the predetermined space,
The width in the left-right direction of the second lower plate portion is larger on the back side than the near side of the second lower plate portion,
A lower plate cover that covers the second lower plate portion is provided integrally with the lower plate main body regardless of the open / closed state of the door frame .

  According to the present invention, a more suitable lower plate can be provided.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which opened the door frame from the main frame and opened the main frame from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state which removed the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. FIG. 5 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the upper hinge member is attached to the main body side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by CC line in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit from the back. FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit taken apart from the front, and FIG. 2B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from behind with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 4A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with a cover member removed, and FIG. 4B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the back with the cover member removed. It is a front view of the foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame from the right front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the left front. (A) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the lower left rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and looked from behind. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of a portion of the lower plate in a state where the lower plate cover is removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a different ball guiding portion than (a). FIG. 4C is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a different ball guiding portion is further provided. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate that can be divided, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing a state where the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is an explanatory view in which (c) is a schematic perspective view of the lower plate of (b). (A) is a front view of the rendering operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the rendering operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extended. FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 48 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in FIG.48 (b). 48A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 48B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the effect operation unit disassembled for every main member from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit and looked from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the rear. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the base unit of the effect operation unit and looked from behind. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the production operation unit in FIG. (A) is a view in which the effect operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away to hide a part where the operation button is to be hidden by a first button decoration portion, a button frame, or the like. It is an explanatory view showing, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a part which is going to be hidden by a first button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in a sectional view of a production operation unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing a perspective view of the appearance of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit viewed from a direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. . (A) is a front view of the second effect operation unit different from the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63 in the embodiment, and (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the back. It is the explanation drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 64 (a). FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 64 (b) taken along line HH. (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the II line in FIG.64 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 2nd effect operation unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extended, with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and (b) shows the sub-screen of the screen unit. It is the explanatory view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button extended in the state turned to the front. 74A is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 74B is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 74B. (A) is to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, and the like in a view when the main screen is directed forward and the second operation operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which exists, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is. (A) is to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, or the like in a view of the operation button with the sub-screen facing forward, viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which exists, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is. (A) is a front view of the third production operation unit different from the production operation unit and the second production operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 77 in the embodiment, and (b) is a right side view of the third production operation unit. is there. It is a rear view of the third effect operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 3rd production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 3rd production operation unit from the back. It is the explanation drawing which looked at the 3rd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 78 (a). FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 78 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 3rd effect operation unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 3rd effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the 3rd base unit of the 3rd production operation unit from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operating unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a front view of the third effect operation unit showing the second decoration surface portion of the decoration rotator unit facing forward, and (b) is a direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends in (a). FIG. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows rotation of a 1st decoration surface part in the state which turned the 1st decoration surface part forward in the 3rd production operation unit, and (b) is a 2nd decoration surface part in a 3rd production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rotation of the 2nd decorative surface part in the state turned toward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the movable effect which rotates a decoration rotating body unit in a 3rd effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the movable effect which rotates a decoration rotating body unit in the state which rotated the 1st decoration surface part and the 2nd decoration surface part in a 3rd effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the air by rotation of a 2nd decoration surface part in a 3rd effect operation unit. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a door frame left side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked from behind. FIG. 93 is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 93 (a). (A) is a front view of a door frame right side unit in a door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a door frame right side unit viewed from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked from behind. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the OO line in FIG. 97 (a). 97A is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 97A, and FIG. 97B is a cross-sectional view taken along line QQ in FIG. 97A. (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the back. It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked from behind. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the RR line in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the dispensing apparatus from the disassembly before. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the dispensing apparatus from back and disassembled. (A) is a front view of a payout apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by SS line in (a). (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is closed by the ball removal movable piece in the payout device, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is opened by the ball removal movable piece. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball path unit in the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball path unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full ball path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit in the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower full tank path unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower full tank path unit from behind and disassembled. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full tank path unit. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of the game panel opaque. FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the gaming board in the state of FIG. 129 as viewed from the front. 129 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 129 as viewed from behind. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is the front view which cut | disconnected the front unit in the game board at the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game area. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of the game panel transparent. (A) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and the side unit in the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the attacker unit in the front unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the game ball in an attacker unit by a cross section. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the center role in the front unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structure and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structure and looked at from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the back box of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back box of the back unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back upper movable production unit in the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back upper movable production unit in the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back raising / lowering unit of a back upper movable production unit, and was seen from the front with the back upper movable main unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the back ascending / descending unit of the back upper movable effecting unit as viewed from the rear together with the back upper movable main unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper movable main body unit of the back upper movable production unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper movable main body unit of the back upper movable production unit, and was seen from behind. (A) is a front view of the back upper movable effect unit showing the back upper movable body unit in a normal ascending position, and (b) is a back upper view showing the lower upper movable body unit in a lowered position in which it is rotated. It is a front view of a movable production unit. It is a front view of a back upper movable main unit which shows rotation of a back upper first rotary ornament, and revolution of a back upper second rotary ornament in outline. It is a front view of a back upper movable main body unit which shows movement of a plurality of back upper appearance decoration objects and LED of a back upper decoration board in outline. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back upper second rotating decorative body and the back upper appearing / decorating decorative body in the back upper movable main body unit according to the rotation angle of the back upper first rotating decorative body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back upper second rotating decorative body and back upper appearing / decorating decorative body following FIG. 156 according to the rotation angle of the back upper first rotating decorative body. (A) is a front view of the back upper movable main body unit shown together with the LED of the back upper decorative board in a state where the back upper first rotating decorative body is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state, () Is a cross-sectional view taken along line TT in (a). FIG. 158 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between the back upper and lower decorative body at the appearance position and the second LED of the upper back decoration board by enlarging the part of arrow A in FIG. 158. It is a front view of the back rear movable effect unit in the back unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back rear movable production unit in the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back rear movable production unit in the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear movable effect unit into the fixed side unit side and the turning table side, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear movable effect unit into the fixed side unit side and the turning table side, and was seen from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the turning table side of the back rear movable effect unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the turning table side of the back rear movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the turning table side of the back rear movable effect unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the turning table side of the back rear movable effect unit for every main structure, and was seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the turning structure of the turning table in a back rear center movable effect unit in the front view of a back rear movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the turning in the counterclockwise direction of the turning table in a back center movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the turning to the clockwise direction of the turning table in a back center movable effect unit. FIG. 177 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing turning of the turning table in a clockwise direction following FIG. 171. It is the perspective view which looked at the back left movable production unit and the back right movable production unit from the front in the back unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right movable production unit from the back in the back unit. The rear left and right rearrangement units are disassembled into a rear left and right back decoration unit and a rear left and right back slide unit and a rear right slide unit and viewed from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view. The rear left and right movable production units are disassembled into a rear left and right decoration unit and a rear left and right slide unit and a rear right slide unit and viewed from behind. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view. It is a front view of the back rear left movable decorative body unit and the back rear right movable decorative body unit in the back rear left movable rendering unit and the back rear right movable rendering unit in the back unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back rear left movable decorative body unit and the back back right movable decorative body unit in the back rear left movable rendering unit and the back rear right movable rendering unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back back left movable decorative body unit and the back back right movable decorative body unit in a back back left movable production unit and a back back right movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear left movable decorative body unit and the back rear right movable decorative body unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back left movable decorative body unit and the back back right movable decorative body unit, and was seen from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back left rotation decoration body, the back right rotation decoration body, and the rotation connection mechanism of the back back left movable decorative body unit and the back back right movable decorative body unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the rear left rotating decorative body, the rear right rotating decorative body, and the rotation connecting mechanism of the rear left movable decorative body unit and the rear right movable decorative body unit when viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the rotation connection mechanism in an assembled state, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the rotation connection mechanism. (A) is an explanatory view showing the movable member of the back left movable decorative body unit in the back rear left movable rendering unit from the left side, and (b) is a back rear left movable decorative body unit in the back rear left movable rendering unit. FIG. 4 is an explanatory view showing a movable member of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back left rotation decorative body in the back back left movable decorative body unit of the back back left movable effect unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the movable member of the back right movable decorative body unit in the back right movable production unit from the front, (b) is the back back right movable decorative body unit of the back right movable decorative unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a movable member from the right side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back right rotating decorative body in the back right movable decorative body unit of the back right movable production unit. (A) shows the rear left rotating decorative body and the rear right rotating decorative body in the rear left movable decorative body unit and the rear right movable decorative body unit of the rear left movable producing unit and the rear right movable producing unit. It is a front view shown in the state of the 1st production position, (b) is a front view showing the back left rotation decoration and the back right decoration decoration rotated to the 2nd production position, (c) FIG. 8 is a front view showing the back left rotating decorative body and the back right rotating decorative body rotated to the third effect position. (A) is a perspective view of the rear left slide unit and the rear right slide unit in the rear left movable production unit and the rear right movable production unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a rear left movable production unit and It is the perspective view which looked at the back left slide unit and the back right slide unit from the back in the back right movable effect unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back left slide unit and the back back right slide unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back back left slide unit and the back back right slide unit, and was seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of a back left movable decorative body unit and a back rear right movable decorative body unit by a back left slide unit and a back right slide unit in a back left movable effect unit and a back rear right movable effect unit. (A) is a front view showing the rear left movable decorative body unit and the rear right movable decorative body unit in the rear left movable effect unit and the rear right movable effect unit in a normal separated position, and (b) is a front view. Is a state in which the rear left movable decorative body unit and the rear right movable decorative body unit are moved to the approaching position by the rear left slide unit and the rear right slide unit of the rear left movable production unit and the rear right movable production unit. FIG. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back-to-back upper movable production unit in the back-to-back movable production unit of the main unit and viewed from the front together with the swivel table. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back rear upper movable effecting unit for every main structure, and looked at from the back together with the turning table. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing a state in which a sub-effect display device is set to a retreat position furthest away from the center of rotation in the back rear upper movable effect unit, and (b) is a diagram showing a state where the sub-effect display device can be turned. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which performed by the schematic structure, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which made the sub-effect display apparatus the protruding position most approached to the turning center by a schematic structure. (A) is a front view on the turning table side of the back rear movable production unit in a state where the sub production display unit of the rear upper movable production unit is in a normal retreat position, and (b) is a projecting sub production display device. It is a front view by the side of a turning table in a back rear movable production unit shown in the state where it was set as a position. It is a front view of the back rear movable production unit which shows the state where the sub production display device was turned at the first rotation position in a schematic configuration. It is a front view of the back rear movable production unit which shows the movable range of the sub production display device in the first turning position in a schematic configuration. It is a front view of the back rear movable production unit which shows the movable range of the sub production display device in the second turning position in a schematic configuration. It is a front view of the back rear movable production unit which shows the movable range of the sub production display device in the third turning position in a schematic configuration. (A) is a perspective view of the lower back lower movable rendering unit in the back rear movable rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a back lower lower movable rendering unit of the back rear movable rendering unit in the rear unit. It is the perspective view seen from. It is a front view of the game board in the state where the back upper first rotary decorative body and the back upper second rotary decorative body of the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit have been moved to the lowered position. With the turning table of the back movable unit behind the back unit in the first turning position, the back left movable decorative unit and the back right movable decorative unit of the back rear right movable unit and the back right movable decorative unit are separated from each other. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state moved from the position to the approach position. With the turning table in the movable unit behind the back unit in the third turning position, the back left movable decorative unit and the back right movable decorative unit of the back movable unit and the rear right movable unit are separated from each other. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state moved from the position to the approach position. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the sub-effect display device in the movable effect unit behind the back unit is moved to the projecting position in the normal first turning position. It is a front view of the game board in which the sub-effect display device in the movable effect unit behind the back unit is turned from the first turning position to the second turning position in the projecting position. FIG. 207 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the sub effect display device has been moved to the retreat position from the state of FIG. 207. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state where the sub effect display device in the movable effect unit behind the back unit is moved from the second turning position to the third turning position in the protruding position. FIG. 209 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the sub effect display device has been moved to the retreat position from the state of FIG. 209. From the state of FIG. 205, the back left rotating decorative body and the back right rotating decorative body in the back left movable decorative body unit and the back right movable decorative body unit of the back rear left movable rendering unit and the back rear right movable rendering unit will be described. In the state of the three rendering positions, the first rotating decorative body on the back and the second rotating decorative body on the back of the movable rendering unit on the back are moved to the lowering position, and the first rotating decorative body on the back and the second rotating on the back are moved. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which rotated the decoration. It is a block diagram showing roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled device viewed from behind.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable and is mounted on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is connected to lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30. The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are openably and closably mounted by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular shape having a vertically extending outer shape extending vertically and having a through hole 111 penetrating front and rear, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to drive a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. And a dish unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface below the front face, and a player attached to the center of the dish unit 320 according to a game state that changes when a game ball is driven into the game area 5a. An effect operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 540, a door frame right side unit 550 mounted on the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 540. And a door frame top unit 570 mounted above the front side of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111.

  The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main frame base 600, which is partially insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. The upper hinge member 60 and the lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 are rotatably attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, respectively, and the upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are rotatable. The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably mounted, the reinforcing frame 660 mounted on the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the main body frame base 600 And a ball launching device 680 for driving game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the outer frame 2 and the body frame mounted on the right side of the body frame base 600 in a front view. 4, And a locking unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and an inverted L-shape which is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view and pays out game balls to the player side. Payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and a game ball in the ball tank 802 which is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left in a front view. A left and right tank rail 803 for guiding, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 in front view for guiding game balls from the tank rail 803 in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820 Game balls that are detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 at the lower side and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 The payout device 830 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950, and the game balls that are attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and that are paid out by the payout device 830. An upper full tank path unit 850 that guides and discharges game balls from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e in accordance with the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320; A normal guide path 861 and a full guide path that guide the game balls discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the base 801 and guide the game balls from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the full guide path 861 The game ball released from the tongue discharge port 850 e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full tank receiving port 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a speaker for bass sound mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in a front view. Speaker unit 920 having a power supply board 921, a power supply board box 930 that is mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and houses a power supply board therein, An interface control board box 940 accommodating an interface control board therein, and a payout control board 951 mounted on the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of game balls are accommodated therein. And a dispensing control board box 950. .

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is driven, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, and places the game ball fired from the ball firing device 680 on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guides the player, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a. I have.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 321, the game balls are rotated by the ball firing device 680 with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. Since the interest of the player can be increased by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the players can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is a front view of an outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembly. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member in the outer frame viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated from each other and extends left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. , And a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that extend to the right. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Also, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left and right direction are the same. Have been.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion side of the upper frame member 10 in a front view, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be openably and closably mounted.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 having both ends attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position closer to the left from the left and right center, A right sliding member 82 in the form of a flat plate attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, or the like), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. The connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 includes an upper hooking member 90 and a lower hooking member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. , Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, or the like). The upper frame member 10 has an engagement notch 11 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch 11, an upper left and right fixing portion 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached. In addition, the upper frame member 10 includes, on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in the front view, a mounting step portion 12 that is recessed from the general surface. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, or the like) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths are different. Is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes engagement notches 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch 21, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of a lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and a lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D of the connecting member 85 described below are attached.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 has a front end notch portion 22 that is recessed rearward from the front surface at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same size as the front-rear width of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal member such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetric shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are depressed inward on the lateral side outside in the left-right direction from the position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction and near the rear end. It has recesses 31 and 41 and projections 32 and 42 which bulge out from the side surface opposite to the recesses 31 and 41 and have an internal cavity. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42. In the protruding portions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on the surface. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility such as a game hall or transported by the plurality of grooves, the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by fingers and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is opened. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape large enough to allow a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51, A standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and a front wall bulging forward from near the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go rearward as it goes toward.

  The curtain plate member 50 is provided with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 74 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, which will be described later, when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state where it is assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  The upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined such that the front end side is lower. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 at a position on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting a right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. A part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via a left sliding member 81 and a right sliding member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-shaped decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a lattice shape, thereby increasing strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be housed inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown, the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 has an upper fixing portion 61 having a rectangular shape and a quadrangular outer shape, and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A front extending portion 62, a bearing groove 63 extending to the right and left center of the front extending portion 62 from the right end of the front extending portion 62 to the front, and vertically penetrating, and an upper fixing portion 61 in plan view. A horizontal fixing portion 64 having a flat plate shape extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from an end portion extending from the left end to the front end of the front extension portion 62 to a portion where the bearing groove 63 is open. And a flat portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by screws (not shown). I have. The front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. The horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by screws in a state where the horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted into the concave portion 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 allows the main frame 4 to cooperate with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-shaped lock body 66 a extending right and left with a predetermined width on the left and right, and an operation unit protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a and then extending diagonally left forward, and a mounting hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d. The lock member 66 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The rear end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is mounted at a position behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. In a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion of the hanging portion 65 of the 60 extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

  The distal end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a, in which a main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 described later can be accommodated.

  By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 Can be in a state of being all over. Thus, the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper main frame can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown, the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands up horizontally from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 located rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. An upright flat rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a vertically penetrating horizontal portion 71 allowing only one game ball to pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated conical shape in which the upper end is narrower at the upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position near the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and to extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 in an inverted U-shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71 is provided. Are fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. In a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 in front of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main frame lower hinge hole (not shown) of the main frame 4 at the main frame 4. In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  In a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge holes 74 coincide with the left discharge holes 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the rolling is performed to the rear side with a large interval, and it is possible to discharge from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game balls dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge holes 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game balls from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the position of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connection member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connection member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connection member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C connecting the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. 86, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided to be separated from each other in the front and rear directions. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of contacting the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. The upper and lower fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and are fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. The lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front sides of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is screwed into the projecting portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. By this, it is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is lower than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion projecting rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. The upper and lower fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to inner side surfaces on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower left and right fixing members 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end surfaces of the lower frame member 20, respectively. You.

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. It will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main frame is detached from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member was attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the operation of the lock member on the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the distal end of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a U-shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame side of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 according to the present embodiment includes the front end of the lock body 66a in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. Of the lock body 66a (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65). In the normal shaft support state (not shown), the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 66a are opposed to each other in a diagonal direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal pivoting state, since the hinge pin 622 on the body frame that supports the heavy body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin on the body frame is There is almost no load on the front end face of the lock body 66a from 622. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end face of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operation part 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly. I have. In the figure, the center of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame is pulled out along the inclination of the U-shaped bearing groove 63 and comes into contact with the arc-shaped front end surface of the lock body 66a, the acting force is applied. F, a component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame and the front end face of the arc shape; And the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the one side inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (the mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment for rotating the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging part 65 does not work, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame moves the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and one of the bearing grooves 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  Therefore, even when the lock member 66 is subjected to the normal pin support state or the action force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. This prevents the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and prevents the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from dropping out of the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move rightward, the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts the hanging portion 65 and Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  In addition, even if the shape of the front end face of the lock body 66a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the above-described component force F1 or the front end of the lock member 66 is directed outward of the front extension portion 62. By positioning the rotation center (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) of the lock member 66 at a position where a rotational moment for rotating the lock member 66 is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a is opposed to the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock body 66a, which has closed the bearing groove 63, retreats and the bearing groove 63 is opened, so that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  Then, when the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is urged by the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves rightward, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. Thus, the upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame is accommodated in a space on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked).

  When removing the upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. Thus, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball bite prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a ball security for preventing a game ball from being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame 2 lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1. The mechanism will be described.

  In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to a left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in a front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (the pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear. In addition, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when an invalid tool that has contacted the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the return portion 55 causes the tip of the invalid tool to be bent. Can be further folded forward, so that an unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

  By the way, in the case where the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game sphere is placed on the outer frame side while the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When the ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 are not ejected rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 May be trapped between On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 through which game balls can pass and a left discharge hole 52. , And the right discharge hole 53, the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is caught between them.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and the outer frame 2 is not closed. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and fraudulent acts using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like, the door frame 3 is attached to a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having an outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a lower right front corner of the door frame base unit 100. Handle unit 300, a plate unit 320 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100, a rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320 A door frame left side unit 540 attached to the front left part of the door frame 100; a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320; The door frame top mounted on the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 It is provided with a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later. And a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and mounted on upper and lower ends on the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 when viewed from the front, and mounted rotatably on the body frame 4 with hinges. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, a security cover 200 covering a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and the body frame 4, and the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed. An opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the gap, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to a lower rear portion of the door frame base 110 to send game balls to the ball launching device 680, and a ball attached to a lower rear portion of the door frame base 110 And a foul cover unit 270 that receives game balls that have been fired by the firing device 680 and have not reached the game area 5a and discharges them to the lower plate 322.

  As will be described later in detail, the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 allows the player to rotate the rotatable handle 302 to rotate the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 in accordance with the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with different strength.

  The dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later in detail, but is attached to a portion below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface swells forward, The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front end at the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball provided below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 or the foul cover unit 270. The lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball pull-out button 327 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and within the range of the cash or the prepaid card remaining in the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to the player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card deducted from the game balls lent from the ball lending machine, and a cash input to the ball lending machine Ball return display section 330 for displaying the remaining number of prepaid cards and the like, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 capable of accepting a player's operation at the time of effect presentation, and a lower plate. Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and allows the player to perform a pressing operation and presents an effect image to the player. Is what you can do. As will be described in detail later, the effect operation unit 400 includes a large operation button 410 that can be operated by a player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so as to be visible from the player side and can display an effect image. And a display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper left side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320, as will be described in detail later. It decorates the left outside of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 540 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of emitting and decorating.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320, as will be described in detail later. The right outside of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 projects farther forward than the door frame left side unit 540, and includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides, and a front end. And a right unit decorative lens member 561. The door frame right side unit 550 can make the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emit light.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550, above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570 has a pair of upper speakers 573 separated to the left and right, a top decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front, and left and right sides of the top decoration member 576, which will be described in detail later. A decorative top left decorative lens member 579 and a decorative top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can make the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 emit light.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable (hinge rotatable) such that the left side of the front view closes the front surface of the body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower front corner, a plate unit 320 to which the rendering operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 540 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outside front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the top outside front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating forward and backward as shown in FIGS. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and upper and lower ends on the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130, which project forward from the door frame base 110 to form the body frame 4 A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640; A door frame left side decorative board 160 mounted on the left side and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 19 mounted rotatably on the rear side of the door frame base 110. The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front lower right corner in front view of the door frame base 110 and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear part of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear part of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear part of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a one-shot button operation sensor 312, Ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , An upper speaker 573, and the like, and a door body relay board for relaying connection between the body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 has a through-hole 111 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. In the through hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Accordingly, the entire door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape by the through-holes 111 penetrating front and rear. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 whose left end is inclined slightly forward from the right end, a handle mounting seat surface 112 and a through hole 111. Between the front and rear sides of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210, the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting plate 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached. The cylinder lock 211 is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the ball.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth from the center in the left-right direction of the door frame base 110 and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The lower plate passage opening 116 and the through-hole passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 face forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through-hole 111 near the left end of the door frame base 110 in a front view. A dish passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the through hole 111, and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and both right and left sides of the door frame base 110. And a speaker insertion port 119 through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left-right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along an upper side of a rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left-right extending middle reinforcing member attached to a lower side of the through-hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side of the door frame base 110 in front view, and a vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side in front view of the rear surface of the door frame base 110. The locking device includes a sheet metal 134 and a locking portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and that locks the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

  In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. Fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to a right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a cutout portion 132a that penetrates back and forth at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, The parts enhance the strength and rigidity, and also prevent unauthorized tools such as piano wires and flathead screwdrivers from entering from outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is provided on the door frame base 110 and has a pair of projecting pieces 141a vertically separated from each other. The door frame hinge hinge bracket 141 has a pair of protrusions, and the door frame hinge hinge bracket 141 has a pair of protrusions. And a pair of projecting pieces 141a on the door frame upper hinge pin 142 which penetrate the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. And a disc-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between the two and a door frame hinge pin 142 interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. And a lock spring 144 that urges the upper hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

  Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and has a shape that is open forward when viewed from the side. It is formed in a character shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece for connecting the pair of projecting pieces 141a to each other is mounted on a rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

  A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protruding above the upper protruding piece 141 a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 has a portion projecting below the lower projecting piece 141a bent horizontally. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower projecting piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

  The flange member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted. The lock spring 144 has an upper end in contact with the flange member 143 and a lower end in contact with the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141 a in a compressed state, and urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward through the flange member 143. .

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and a horizontally bent portion at a lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is a lower projecting portion. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame projects a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a.

  When the operator holds a horizontally bent portion at the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls that portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 can insert or pull out the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620. Can be. By inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the door frame 3 as viewed from the front is obtained. The hinge can be rotatably supported on the body frame 4.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is configured such that a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 which is supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame side lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-like extending piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. And a column-shaped door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extension piece 151a.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) that extends upward from the rear end of the flat extending piece 151a that extends horizontally, and has an overall shape in a side view. Are formed in a substantially L-shape. In the hinge bracket 151 below the door frame, a mounting piece (not shown) is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

  The hinge pin 152 below the door frame has a lower end formed in a truncated cone shape that tapers downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is disposed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is capable of hinge-rotating the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the front left side of the through-hole 111. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 in front view to a height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. Decorative board 161 on the left side of the frame, and lower decoration on the left side of the door frame extending up and down from the lower position of the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame to almost the same height as the lower end of the passage 117 for the upper plate. And a substrate 162.

  The upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 162 on the left side of the door frame of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a on the front surface, respectively, which can emit light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind a door frame left side unit 540 described later in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 540 can be illuminated and decorated.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for removably mounting the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disc-shaped base 171 rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and protrudes from the base 171 in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 172.

  The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below the pair of speaker insertion ports 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118, respectively.

  The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, so that the protruding portion 172 is located outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. In this state, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit 190 is rotated so that the projection 172 projects downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the projection 172 becomes glass. The glass unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 to restrict the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110.

  Since the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 protrudes from the disk-shaped base 171 rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located within the protruding portion 172. . Thus, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the state is stabilized in a state where the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171. In the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in the rotational position where it protrudes downward from the base portion 171, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is regulated by the protruding portion 172. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the restriction of the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated such that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171 so that the protrusion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 has a cylindrical portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and outward from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 181 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the cylindrical portion 181. An extended annular flange portion 182, and a plurality of annular flange portions 182 protruding into the tubular portion 181 and extending over the entire length of the tubular portion 181 in the axial direction and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181 ( In the present embodiment, three) are provided. .

  The handle mounting member 180 is mounted to the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

  The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the other two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. These three ridges 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only in a state where the three protrusions 183 and the three grooves 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be regulated.

  The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182. Thus, the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a state where the handle unit 300 is similarly tilted so that the axis of 181 extends rightward and forward.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-like glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attaching portion 118, and the inside of the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. 191 attached to two transparent glass plates 192. The two glass plates 192 are respectively attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191 and are separated from each other so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending flatly outward from a position below the upper left and right corners in front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  In the glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from behind the door frame base 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. Is attached to the door frame base 110 by making contact with the rear surface of the door frame.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, it can be removed in the reverse procedure. Thus, the glass unit 190 is detachable from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 has a flat main body 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward shortly along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201, and is spaced apart in the left and right directions. And a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. The upper end of the main body 201 is formed along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002, the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 described later. The pachinko machine 1 is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. As shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. A rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. ing.

  Note that the rear protruding piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the gaming board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state where it is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, game balls passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (game balls fired by the ball firing device 680) do not come into contact with the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200, and the game ball 5a There is no hindrance to the game ball being driven into the game.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  In a state where the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a portion where the front surface of the main body 201 contacts the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191) and projects rearward from the lower side of the main body 201. The removed rear projection 202 is inserted into a security recess (not shown) of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state where the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Thereby, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess of the front component 1000, so that the game board is provided. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is to be inserted into the game area 5a from below the front face of the security cover 200 and between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 202 and the security recess. It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening / closing cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder attachment portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 that has a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extends forward and backward, and a locking unit that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates the key inserted into the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting the key lock 710 to the key cylinder 710 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (the reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, it can be either clockwise or counterclockwise in front view. Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and moves forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches 212a that are notched. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the projection of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of cutouts 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and has a convex shape projecting forward in plan view. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate parts 213c extending in a plate shape in a direction away from the rear side of each of the pair of side plate parts 213b. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 from the rear at a position substantially at the center in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. As for a pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the left mounting plate portion 213c in the front view is mounted on the right end of the middle reinforcing plate 132 in the reinforcing unit 130, and the right mounting plate portion 213c of the reinforcing unit 130 in the front view. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Thus, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate part 213a and the pair of side plate parts 213b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are housed in a box-shaped cylinder mounting part 113 which is inserted through the front side of the door frame base 110 and protrudes rearward. ing.

[3-1k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the front with the ball feeding unit exploded, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 to the ball firing device 680 one by one, and also converts the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 into the upper plate balls. The lower tray can be pulled out by operating the pull button 327.

  In the ball feeding unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323 d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110, and penetrate in the front-back direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 having an entrance 251a and a ball outlet 251b opened below the entrance 251a, and a box-shaped front cover 251 having an open rear and a box having a front end opened and a rear end closed. A rear cover 252 having a hit ball supply port 252a for supplying game balls entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the ball launching device 680, and the rear cover 252 and the front cover. The partition 253a is rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and a partition 253a behind the front cover 251 and between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b. The ball removing member 253 and the game balls on the partition portion 253a of the ball removing member 253 are sent one by one to the ball supply port 252a of the rear cover 252, and extend vertically between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252. A ball feeding member 254 rotatably supported around the axis, and a ball feeding solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feeding member 254.

  In the ball feeding unit 250, as shown in the drawing, a ball feeding member 254 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 251a in a front view, and a ball punching member 253 is provided on the left side of the ball feeding member 254. The ball feeding solenoids 255 are respectively arranged on the right side.

  The front cover 251 of the ball feeding unit 250 has an arc-shaped slit 251c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball outlet 251b in a front view. The operation rod 253c of the ball-pulling member 253 described later extends forward. The front cover 251 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the front cover 251 is upstream of the ball feed guide path 323e and the ball empty guide path 323f of the plate unit base 323. It is formed so as to close a portion opened rearward on the end side from the rear side.

  The ball removing member 253 has a partition part 253a below the entrance 251a, between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, and an upper surface of which becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 254, and a ball of the partition part 253a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254 and bends in a V-shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b, and the lower end turns around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. A rotatable rod 253b movably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 253c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 253b, and a lower side than the operating rod 253c from the side of the rotating rod 253b. A weight portion 253d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 253a. The operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 253c is in contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a that is operated by pressing the upper bowl removing button 327 of the bowl unit 320 through the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

  The ball feeding member 254 includes a blocking portion 254a having a fan shape in a plan view centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction and facing the entrance 251a and the partition portion 253a of the ball removing member 253, and a rear end of the blocking portion 254a. And a ball holding portion 254b which is depressed in an arc shape toward the rotation axis and a rod-shaped rod portion 254c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feeding member 254 rotates around the rotation axis when the rod 254c disposed at a position eccentric to the rotation axis is moved left and right by driving the ball feeding solenoid 255.

  The ball feeding member 254 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 254a faces the direction of the partition portion 253a and a ball holding portion 254b in a direction in which the ball holding portion 254b communicates with the hit ball supply port 252a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position facing the side. When the ball feeding member 254 is at the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 252a to the ball launching device 680, and the game ball enters the partition 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the movement to the ball holding unit 254b (hit ball supply port 252a) side is blocked by the blocking unit 254a, and the ball stays on the partition unit 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 254 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the partition 253a, and the end of the ball holding portion 254b on the rod 254c side closes the hit ball supply port 252a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 253a is held in the ball holding portion 254b.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 250 is moved forward and backward by the ball feeding operation rod 256 whose tip swings up and down by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 255 and the movement of the tip of the ball feeding action rod 256 which swings up and down. And a ball feed crank 257 that turns the ball feed member 254 about the axis that extends in the vertical direction while rotating about the axis that extends in the direction. The ball-feeding crank 257 is configured to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball-feeding operation rod 256 and extend in the left-right direction. A shaft portion 257b disposed on the opposite side and rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252, and extending upward from the shaft portion 257b to feed the ball; And a transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the member 254.

  The ball feed unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feed operation rod 256 that swings by driving the ball feed solenoid 255 that moves up and down by the ball feed operation rod 256 and the ball feed crank 257, thereby causing the ball feed member 254 to move. Can be rotated. When the ball-feeding solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball-feeding operation rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball-feeding solenoid 255 and its tip is positioned downward. In this state, the ball-feeding member 254 is in the supply position. It is in the state located at. When the ball-feeding solenoid 255 is driven, the ball-feeding operation rod 256 is sucked by the lower end of the ball-feeding solenoid 255 so that the tip is positioned upward, and the ball-feeding member 254 rotates to the holding position. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 254 receives one game ball, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 is released (OFF state). Can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 680 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the ball feeding unit 250 is controlled by a firing control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951 in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 682.

  Further, the ball-pulling member 253 rotatably supported in the ball-feeding unit 250 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise in front view by the weight portion 253d, but projects forward. When the actuated rod 253c contacts the upper end of the actuating transmission portion 327a that is operated by the pressing operation of the upper dishing button 327 of the dishing unit 320, the rotation thereof is regulated. Is partitioned between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, and the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 251b side.

  Then, when the player pushes down the upper plate ball removing button 327 of the plate unit 320, the upper plate ball removing slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, and the operation transmitting portion 327a moves downward. As a result, the operating rod 253c also moves relatively downward. When the operation rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, the ball removing member 253 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b by the partitioning portion 253a is released. Is done. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. be able to.

  In addition, since the upper countersunk ball removing slider 327b formed with the operation transmitting portion 327a with which the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 abuts is urged upward by the upper countersunk ball removing spring 327c, the upper countersliding slider 327c is moved upward. Even if the game ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the upper plate ball removing spring 327c via the operating rod 253c, and the ball removing member 253 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition 253a.

  The ball feeding unit 250 has a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) which is recessed forward and to the upper right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 252a in the rear cover 252. A fraud prevention member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feeding unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

  The anti-fraud member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape when viewed from the front extends left and right, and is separated vertically from the right side by a predetermined distance from the right side to the upper side in the vertical direction at the center, and A lower piece 262 and an inclined portion 263 formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the opposing sides of the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 are provided. . The upper piece 261 of the anti-fraud member 260 is bent so that the right end in front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the anti-fraud member 260. The lower piece 262 extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. Thus, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove that spreads rightward.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the attachment concave portion 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 252a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 260, a fraudulent game ball with a string attached is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 680 from the upper plate 321 via the ball feeding unit 250, and is attached to the fraudulent game ball. When a fraudulent action is performed such as operating a string to move an unauthorized game ball into and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like, an unauthorized game ball fired (hit by the ball) by the ball launching device 680 generates an illegal action. After the string attached to the game ball is inserted between the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262, the V-shape formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 becomes narrower. It is possible to cut by a part, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball attached with a string.

[3-1l. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 37A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the cover member removed, and FIG. 37B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the back with the cover member removed. is there. FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

  As shown, the foul cover unit 270 is mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 and has a shallow box-shaped unit main body 271 with an open front side, and a flat lid member mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 271. 272. Fail cover unit 270 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner in front view, and penetrates the normal guide path 861 of lower full tank path unit 860 of main body frame 4 and upper plate ball supply port 323a of plate unit 320. A full tank receiving port 274 which is open rearward at the lower right side of the passage 273 and the through ball path 273 in a front view and which can communicate with the full guiding path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And

  Further, foul cover unit 270 is opened upward on the right side in front view of full tank receiving port 274 and does not reach game area 5a despite being fired by ball firing device 680 of main body frame 4. Ball receiving port 275 for receiving a game ball (a foul ball), and a game ball received in the full tank receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 which opens forward near the lower right corner in front view. And a ball discharge port 276 communicating with the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit 320.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed between the full ball reception port 274 and the foul ball reception port 275 and the ball discharge port 276 by the unit main body 271 and the cover member 272, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A large-sized storage passage 277, a plate-shaped movable piece 278 that forms a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277, and has a lower end rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, A full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting rotation of the 278 in a direction away from the storage passage 277 and a spring 280 for urging the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277 are provided.

  When the inside of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 becomes full of game balls and the game balls are not released from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower plate 322 side, a certain number of the foul cover units 270 are stored in the storage passage 277. Game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper end of the movable piece 278 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 277 against the urging force of the spring 280 due to the weight of the game ball. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. Accordingly, it can be determined that the lower plate 322 is full of game balls, and when the full tank is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, the further payout of the game balls is stopped, and That fact can be notified to a player, a staff member of a game hall, or the like, and can be prompted to cancel the full state of the lower plate 322.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 and below the through ball passage 273, and a guideway opening / closing door of a lower full tank path unit 860 in a payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 described later. 863 is provided with a door opening / closing contact portion 281 to which the operation projection 863e can contact (see FIG. 127). The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface goes downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is formed such that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operation protrusion 863 e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 comes into contact. When the operation protrusion 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 abuts on the door opening / closing contact portion 281, the guideway opening / closing door 863 rotates, and the downstream ends (front opening) of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862. ) Can be opened.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39A is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. FIG. 40 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by a player so that a game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is.

  The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. And a handle cover 303 attached to the handle base 301.

  The handle unit 300 has an inner base 304 attached to the front surface of the handle base 301 at the rear side of the handle 302, and a handle 302 attached to the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301 to the outer periphery. A shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, and a detection shaft 307a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 306, the handle base 301 and the inner A handle rotation detection sensor 307 sandwiched between the base and the base.

  Further, the handle unit 300 has one end attached to the handle base 301 and the other end attached to the handle 302 so as to return the handle 302 to an initial rotational position (a rotational end in a counterclockwise direction in front view). One end is attached to the inner base 304 and the other end is attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307 a of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 307 is rotated clockwise in front view through the transmission gear 306. The auxiliary spring 309 urged in the direction, the handle touch sensor 310 attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the tip side is outward from the left side in the front view of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 301. The handle is protruding and the base end is behind the inner base 304. A single button 311 attached to the base 301 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward, and a single button operation sensor 312 attached to the handle base 301 by detecting a pressing operation of the single button 311. I have.

  The handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 has a cylindrical base portion 301a extending forward and backward, a disk-shaped front end portion 301b projecting radially from the front end of the base portion 301a, and a concave portion from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 301a. And three grooves 301c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. The three grooves 301c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 183 of the cylindrical portion 181 in the handle mounting member 180. Therefore, the base portion 301a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 with the three groove portions 301c aligned with the three ridges 183, and the ridges 183 are respectively formed in the three groove portions 301c. By being inserted, the handle base 301 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 180.

  The handle 302 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d that protrude outward away from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in an arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e, and the other end of the handle return spring 308 is locked. And a locking projection 302f.

  The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusions 302b, the third protrusions 302c, and the fourth protrusions 302d are sequentially provided in a clockwise direction in a front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 302a is formed such that a side surface in a clockwise direction in a front view of a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 bulges outward, and the first protrusion 302a is located on the opposite side. Side is concave (gouge) so as to curve inward. The second protrusion 302b is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 302a in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and It protrudes slightly lower. The second protrusion 302b has a side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of the most protruding portion bulging outward, and the opposite side surface in the counterclockwise direction curves inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first projection 302a.

  The third protrusion 302c is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 302b by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees clockwise, and It protrudes at about half the height. The side surface of the third protrusion 302c is substantially linearly inclined on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is more gradually inclined than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction, which is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 302d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 302c by a clockwise rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and is separated from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 302d has a side surface on both sides inclined substantially linearly, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

  The handle cover 303 has three mounting bosses 303a that are rounded at the center of the front surface and bulged forward, and protrude rearward. The three mounting bosses 303a penetrate the slit 302e of the handle 302 from the front, and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 301. Since the mounting boss 303a of the handle cover 303 passes through the slit 302e of the handle 302, the mounting boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle unit 300 is attached to a handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via a handle attachment member 180. The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined such that the right end side is located behind the left end side in plan view and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 300 that is attached via the outside also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). To be fixed to the door frame 3. Thus, the player can easily grip the handle 302 of the handle unit 300, and can perform the rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor. When the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 682 in the ball firing device 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 307. The game ball is hit into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are plated with a conductive material. When the player comes into contact with the handle 302 or the like, the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact. When the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is received, and the firing solenoid is activated with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The drive of 682 is controlled so that a game ball can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 in any way without touching the handle 302, the firing solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball may be hit. I cannot do it. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 302 in a different manner from the original and playing the game, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  In addition, when the player presses the single-shot button 311 while the player rotates the handle 302, the single-button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the single-shot button 311 and the firing unit of the payout control board 951 (shown in FIG. ), The rotation drive of the firing solenoid 682 is stopped. Thereby, without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302, the firing of the game ball can be temporarily stopped, and the pressing operation of the single button 311 is released by releasing the pressing operation of the single button 311. The game ball can be driven into the game area 5a again with the strength.

  Further, the handle unit 300 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d on the handle 302, and rotates the handle 302 most clockwise in a front view. When the game ball is hit most strongly in the game area 5a (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 302d is positioned at the first protrusion 302a when the handle 302 is not rotated. By changing the handle 302 with the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 at the “right-handed” position in a comfortable state, It is possible to reduce a feeling of fatigue of the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-3. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41A is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 41B is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front left. FIG. 42A is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. The plate unit 320 is attached to a portion below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect operation unit 400, which will be described later, is attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320.

  The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball provided below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 or the foul cover unit 270. And a lower plate 322 that can be stored.

  The plate unit 320 has a plate-shaped plate unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and a plate unit base 323 mounted on the upper front of the plate unit base 323. An upper plate main body 324 forming the upper plate 321 and a lower plate main body 325 attached to the lower left portion of the front of the plate unit base 323 from the left and right centers and swelling greatly to form the lower plate 322. And a plate unit cover 326 attached to the front of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper plate body 324 and the lower plate body 325.

  The dish unit 320 has an upper dish ball removing button 327 attached to the upper dish 321 on the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 so as to be able to be pressed from the upper right side and a front view of the upper dish ball removing button 327. A ball lending button 328 mounted on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side, a return button 329 mounted on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side in front view of the ball lending button 328, and a ball lending button 328 A ball return display unit 330 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 behind the return button 329, and a plate front upper decorative portion 326b in front of the plate 321 and in front of the plate unit cover 326. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, and protrude forward from the front of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the lower plate 322. And has and a, a lower tray ball vent button 333 which is mounted for pressing from the front.

[3-3a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate main body 324, and the left side bulges forward more than the left and right center in front view, and is formed in a container shape opened upward. Have been. In the upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324), a portion that is about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 bulges forward most. The upper plate 321 has a front end receding rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in a front view, and has a guide passage portion 321a having a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. I have. The upper plate 321 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 321a is lower on the right end side, and the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a in front view is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the upper plate ball removal button 327). ) (See FIG. 44).

  The upper plate 321 is assembled to the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface thereof is positioned at a position lower than the upper plate supply port 323 a of the plate unit base 323 to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 323 d. Are inclined so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of. Thereby, the game balls discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321 and the received game balls can be stored in the upper plate from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a. It can be supplied to the ball feed port 323d.

  As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed such that the bottom surface of the guide passage portion 321a whose depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower decreases downward. That is, a part of the upper plate 321 projects from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which the later-described effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is mounted. Therefore, in the upper plate 321, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to come into contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

  The guide passage portion 321a is provided with a metal grounding member 321b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and is contacted (rolled) by the game ball to form the game ball. The charged static electricity can be removed.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate 322 is disposed below the upper plate 321 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 (door frame 3) when viewed from the front. The lower plate 322 is formed in a container shape capable of storing game balls, and is attached to a lower plate ball hole 322a which penetrates vertically through the bottom wall portion 325a so that game balls can be discharged, and a plate unit cover 326. And a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the provided effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right front corner is concave in an arc shape toward the rear.

  The lower plate 322 includes a lower plate main body 325 that is open at the upper and rear sides, a lower plate cover portion 326 k that covers the lower plate main body 325 from the left end side, and a lower plate main body 325. And a lower plate cover 340 that covers a portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The cover 326 faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 has a trapezoidal shape in which the outer peripheral shape in plan view is a quadrangular shape extending left and right, and the front side of the quadrilateral is the base and the upper side shorter than the base is disposed on the front side. , And the left and right sides of the trapezoid that extend obliquely are curved so as to be recessed rearward. The lower plate 322 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear in a plan view.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate main body 325 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower plate main body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall portion 325a excluding a rear end side, and a game ball passing through the bottom wall portion 325a. And a lower saucer hole 322a penetrating up and down in a possible size. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is a rectangle that extends to the left and right, and the front side of the rectangle has a bottom side, and an upper side shorter than the bottom side is arranged on the front side, and the left and right sides that are obliquely extended are curved so as to be recessed rearward. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid and a trapezoid. (The upper surface of) the bottom wall portion 325a is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower countersunk hole 322a. The main body standing wall portion 325b rises upward from the bottom wall portion 325a at a height of 2 to 5 times the diameter of the game ball. The lower plate hole 322a is formed at a position closer to the right than the center in the left-right direction of the lower plate body 325 (bottom wall 325a). In the lower plate main body 325, the curved portions at the front right corner in the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b correspond to the escape portion 322b.

  The lower plate cover 340 is formed so as to cover approximately the right half above the lower plate main body 325. As shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 44, the lower plate cover 340 includes a cover standing wall portion 340a that rises upward from an upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, and a substantially lower end from the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a. And a ceiling part 340b extending horizontally. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 from a part on the front side to a rear end on the right side. When the lower plate cover 340 is assembled to the plate unit 320, the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the plate unit base 323. Further, the front end (left end side of the front side) of the cover standing wall portion 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. Further, the left end of the ceiling 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower plate cover 326k of the plate unit cover 326. In the lower dish cover 340, a curved surface portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and a portion that extends obliquely between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the relief portion 322b. I have.

  The lower plate 322 is covered with a plate unit cover 326 (production operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the left end in front view of a portion extending short to the left and right on the front end side, and more than half of the production operation unit 400 in front view. Is located behind. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right half goes around the effect operation unit 400. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower plate 322 includes a lower plate first area A1 (a cross hatched area in FIG. 45) located behind a lower plate opening 326d of a plate unit cover 326 described later, and a lower plate. The lower plate second region A2 (shaded in FIG. 45) located on the right side of the opening 326d (behind the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). Region). In other words, the lower plate 322 has at least half of a storage area (equivalent to a storage area in a plan view, a combined area of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2) in which game balls can be stored, It is located behind the rendering operation unit 400. In FIG. 45, the area indicated by the dotted line is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326j in the plate unit cover 326.

  In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall is opened to the right of the center of the rear wall in the left-right direction in front view. More specifically, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the lower plate 322 is connected to the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326 (to the right outside the lower plate opening 326d), and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. The lower plate is disposed in the lower second region A2 on the rear side. Thus, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower counter ball supply port 323c is not visible from the player side through the lower tray opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Therefore, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to go down from the lower plate opening 326d of the left side surface of the plate unit 320 (plate unit cover 326) bulging forward toward the rear of the rendering operation unit 400, The storage volume of the game balls is formed larger than the range seen from the front. In other words, the lower plate 322 is formed so that the lower plate second region A2 is larger than the lower plate first region A1. Thereby, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (the player side), more game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

  As shown in FIG. 41A, the lower plate 322 is such that the right half of the lower plate main body 325 in the left-right direction (lower plate second area A2) has the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (mounting space 326j) of the plate unit cover 326 as shown in FIG. ), A lower plate cover 340 covers an upper side of a portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The lower plate cover 340 prevents the fingertip from touching the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

  The lower plate 322 has a lower plate hole 322a penetrating vertically in front of the lower plate supply port 323c in the lower plate second area A2. The bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower plate ball hole 322a. The lower plate ball removing hole 322 a of the lower plate 322 is closed by a cover member 334 that is opened and closed by operating a pressing operation of the lower plate ball removing button 333. In the lower plate 322, in a normal state, the lower plate ball hole 322a is closed by the cover member 334, so that game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322. When the lid member 334 is opened by pressing the lower bowl button 333, the game balls in the lower bowl 322 can be discharged from the lower bowl hole 322a below the bowl unit 320.

  The lower plate hole 322 a of the lower plate 322 is disposed in front of (directly in front of) the lower plate supply port 323 c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall of the lower plate 322. Therefore, in a state where it is assembled to the door frame 3, the lower plate hole 322 a is located on the right side of the lower plate opening 326 d of the plate unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the rendering operation unit 400. It is invisible from the player (front) side.

  As described above, the lower plate 322 has an outer peripheral shape formed by combining a trapezoid whose front side is narrowed on the front side of a square extending left and right, and a bottom plate having a lower plate hole 322a. It is inclined to become lower toward. Therefore, in the state where the lid member 334 is opened and the lower bowl ejection hole 322a is open, the game ball supplied from the lower bowl supply port 323c into the lower bowl 322 is placed directly in front of the lower bowl supply port 323c. It is immediately discharged downward through the opened lower dish hole 322a. Since the left end of the lower bowl ejection hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower bowl supply port 323c, when the lower bowl extraction hole 322a is open, the lower bowl supply hole 322a is open. The game balls supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 do not directly flow to the region on the left side of the lower plate hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and are discharged from the lower plate hole 322a. Become.

  On the other hand, since the right end of the lower bowl input hole 322a is located to the left of the right end of the lower bowl supply port 323c, the game supplied to the lower bowl 322 from near the right end of the lower bowl supply port 323c. The ball comes into contact with a portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b that forms the right standing wall of the lower plate 322. Since the right standing wall of the lower plate 322 is curved obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate supply port 323c receives the game ball. When it comes into contact with the inclined portion, the light is reflected in the direction of the lower hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower hole 322a without going to the left side of the lower hole 322a. (See FIG. 45).

  As described above, since the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment is formed so as to guide the game balls supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate hole 322a, the lower plate hole 322a is formed. Is open, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c do not enter the area on the left side of the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a of the lower dish 322, but immediately from the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a. It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, when the lower bowl extracting hole 322a is kept open, the game balls flowing on the lower bowl 322 cannot be seen from the player side, and the ball is paid out from the upper bowl 321 or the payout device 830. An illusion that a game ball or the like is directly discharged to a dollar box can be made to be an illusion. And effect images, etc.) to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment includes the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game balls supplied to the inside of the lower plate 322 bounce and jump, the game balls can be prevented from entering the mounting space 326j from the lower plate 322, and the game balls in the lower plate 322 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) from contacting the rear side. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 are prevented from contacting or pressing the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). This can prevent the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) from being damaged by the game ball.

  Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the lower plate hole 322a in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate 322 is released from the lower plate supply hole 323c when the lower plate hole 322a is open. It is possible to cause the played game balls to directly enter the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and discharge the balls downward (dollar box), so that the game balls are less likely to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate body 325. Can be. Also, since the bottom wall 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball heading toward the front end side of the main body standing wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game balls released into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c come into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and break them. It can be difficult.

  In the present embodiment, the lid member 334 that closes the lower countersunk hole 322a may be linked to the upper countersunk button 327. As a result, when the upper plate ball removing button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower plate ball removing hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 are further removed. The paper is discharged from the hole 322a to the dollar box below. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong illusion to the player that the game balls of the upper plate 321 are directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-described operational effects can be further exhibited. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the balls may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 constituting the lower plate 322 are shown as being separate from each other, but the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Also, an example in which the cover standing wall 340a of the lower plate cover 340 rises from the upper end of the main plate standing wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is shown. The cover standing wall portion 340a may rise. Also, an example is shown in which the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 extends substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a. You may make it extend substantially horizontally from an upper end.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the example in which the relief portion 322b for avoiding the contact of the lower plate 322 with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is provided, but the relief portion 322b is not provided. The lower plate 322 may be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 (the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the like) has a uniform planar shape without a through hole. It may be one having a hole formed. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall 325a, the main body standing wall 325b, the cover standing wall 340a, the ceiling 340b, and the like of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which a game ball cannot pass. It may be formed into a net or a net. Note that a light-emitting body such as an LED may be disposed in the plate unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j), and the inside of the lower plate 322 may be illuminated (light-emitting decoration) through a fence-like or mesh-like gap of the lower plate 322. .

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k) formed separately. However, the four members may be integrated in an appropriate combination to form the lower plate 322. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate unit cover 326 are integrated. An integrated one, a lower plate cover 340 and a plate unit base 323 integrated, a lower plate main body 325 and a plate unit base 323 integrated, a plate unit base 323 and a plate unit cover 326; Are integrated, the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, and the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit That the Tokaba 326 are integrated, that a lower tray body 325 and Shitasara cover 340 and tray unit base 323 and dish unit cover 326 is integrated, it may be like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guiding section of lower plate]
An embodiment in which the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 is provided with a ball guiding portion 322c for guiding game balls from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball hole 322a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. . FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and FIG. 46 (b) is a description schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a different ball guiding portion than that of FIG. FIG. 8C is an explanatory view schematically showing an example provided with a further different ball guiding section. In FIG. 46, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  In the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46A, the diameter of the lower plate hole 322a is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 between the lower plate supply hole 323c and the lower hole 322a. It has a pair of ball guiding portions 322c that are arranged left and right at a distance. The pair of ball guiding portions 322c is formed in a rail shape (ridge) extending forward and backward while protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Further, the lower plate 322 is inclined such that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 322a. Therefore, the game ball supplied from the lower bowl supply port 323c into the lower bowl 322 is guided to the lower bowl extracting hole 322a by the pair of ball guiding parts 322c without going over the ball guiding part 322c, It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the hole 322a.

  The lower plate 322 and the lower plate ball supply port 323c are provided at the lower right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate second area A2) in the same manner as described above. The holes 322a are arranged linearly in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the front end side of the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the dish unit cover 326, and the lower dish cover 340. It is invisible from the front.

  As described above, since the lower dish 322 of the present example is provided with the pair of ball guiding portions 322c, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c in a state where the lower dish extraction hole 322a is open. Can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate hole 322a without entering the lower plate 322 into the region on the left side of the lower plate hole 322a. Since the player cannot see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, the illusion that the upper plate 321 and the game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 830 are directly discharged to the dollar box. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, so that the player can concentrate on the game (such as the operation of hitting the game ball and the effect image) to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be.

  In the example of FIG. 46 (a), the ball guiding portion 322c has a rail shape, but the ball guiding portion 322c is not limited to this. What is necessary is just to be able to be guided to the countersunk hole 322a.

  Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (b), the game ball discharged diagonally forward right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c passes through the right wall of the lower plate hole 322a in the lower plate 322. The ball is formed in such a shape as to reflect in the direction of the lower bowl extraction hole 322a, and is provided with a buffer 322d at a position where the game ball contacts. This buffer 322d is formed of rubber, foam, or the like.

  In the same manner as described above, the lower plate 322 of this example is also provided with a lower plate hole 322a in front of the lower plate supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lowered toward the lower plate hole 322a. It is inclined to become. Therefore. The game balls released straight forward from the lower bowl supply port 323c are directly discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower bowl extracting hole 322a. On the other hand, the game ball discharged to the right front from the lower bowl feeding port 323c is reflected by the buffer 322d in the direction of the lower bowl extracting hole 322a, and discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower bowl extracting hole 322a. Is done. At this time, since the game ball comes into contact with the buffer 322d and is reflected, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

  Further, in this example, the lower plate 322 is also in the same manner as described above. It is disposed behind the covering wall such as the unit mounting portion 326a and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340, and is not visible from the front.

  As described above, since the lower plate 322 of the present example includes the buffer portion 322d on the wall that reflects the game ball, even if the game ball is not discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c, The buffer portion 322d allows the sound to be reflected in the direction of the lower bowl drain hole 322a without sound and discharged downward (dollar box). Therefore, when the game balls and the like dispensed from the upper plate 321 and the dispensing device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the collision sound of the game balls from the lower plate 322 is not heard, so that the ball is directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (such as the operation of hitting the game ball and the effect image) to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be done.

  Next, an example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46C is a portion of the lower surface (bottom wall portion 325a) of the lower plate 322 opposite to the lower plate supply port 323c with the lower plate hole 322a interposed therebetween. And a return portion 322e that reflects the game ball, which protrudes upward from the lower ball drain hole 322a and jumps over the lower ball drain hole 322a, toward the lower ball drain hole 322a. The return portion 322e may be made of the same material as the material forming the lower plate 322, or may be made of a cushioning material such as rubber or foam, which alleviates a collision sound at the time of reflection. Further, the return portion 322e may not constitute the side wall of the lower plate 322 or may constitute a part of the side wall of the lower plate 322 (the main body standing wall portion 325b).

  In this lower plate 322, a lower plate ball supply port 323c, a lower plate ball hole 322a, and a return portion 322e are linearly arranged in order from the rear to the front, and the lower plate 326 is a lower plate. Behind the opening wall 326d on the right side (behind the cover wall such as the effect operation unit 400, which is the lower plate second area A2, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). It is arranged and cannot be seen from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if a game ball flowing from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball hole 322a jumps over the lower plate ball hole 322a, the return portion 322e forms the lower ball hole 322a side. And can be discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower countersunk hole 322a. Therefore, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described ball guiding section 322c and the buffer section 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. Thereby, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate which can be divided, and FIG. 47 (b) schematically shows a state where the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) by a schematic perspective view. The lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47 is configured such that the lower plate main body 325 can be divided at a dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second region A2. In FIG. 47, the area indicated by the dotted hatching indicates the remaining space of the mounting space 326j.

  First, the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) shown in FIG. 47A constitutes a part of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2, and has a lower plate ball hole 322a. It has a main body 325A and a first extension 325B attached to the right side of the main body 325A and constituting the remaining area of the lower second plate area A2. The first additional portion 325B is further provided with the remaining space of the mounting space 326j in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is accommodated (the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A). Back space). As shown, the first extension portion 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. In addition, the first extension portion 325B has a relief portion 322b at the right front corner for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A.

  Next, in the examples of FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c), the rear end of the rendering operation unit 400 does not protrude rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and is thus less than the example of FIG. 47 (a). The space behind the effect operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is large. The lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) includes a lower plate first region A1 and a part of the lower plate second region A2, and a main body 325A having a lower plate ball hole 322a. A second extension 325C, which is attached to the right side of the portion 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower plate second area A2, is larger than the first extension 325B. As shown in the drawing, the second extension 325C has a constant width in the left-right direction from the front end to the rear end, and has a larger storage area for game balls than the first extension 325B. The lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension 325C (see FIG. 47 (c)).

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C to the main body 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls become continuous (communicated), and the storage area of the game balls is provided. Expands. The boundary between the main body 325A and the first extension 325B or the second extension 325C is a dividing line PL. Further, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C of the lower plate main body 325 communicate with a predetermined gap (between the mounting space 326j) between the effect operation unit 400 and the rear surface of the second effect operation unit 400A. (Space).

  As described above, in the above example, the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is configured to be dividable, and at least one of the divided members is replaceable. The storage area can be made larger or smaller as needed. Further, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is configured to be dividable, it projects to the rear (in the mounting space 326j) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326. An extension portion (first extension portion 325B or second extension portion 325C) having a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

  In the above embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower plate second area A2 behind the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A). It may be arranged on the boundary between the first plate area A1 and the second lower dish area A2, or may be arranged in the first lower dish area A1.

  In the above-described embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is provided with the lower plate ball hole 322a in the main body 325A. However, the first additional portion 325B and the second additional portion 325C are not provided. A lower countersunk hole 322a may be provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are mounted on the right side of the main body portion 325A of the lower plate main body 325. You may make it attach a flat-plate-shaped closing member which does not have a storage area.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described. However, the lower plate cover 340 can be divided similarly to the lower plate main body 325, and the first additional portion 325B and the second additional portion The shape may be adjusted to the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 323 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41 to FIG. The plate unit base 323 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 below the through-hole 111, and extends to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 110 (the rear portion is open). (Shallow box shape).

  The dish unit base 323 penetrates forward and backward near the upper left corner in a front view and extends rearward in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates forward and backward below the upper dish ball supply port 323a. A speaker slit 323b formed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and a lower dish ball supply port 323c penetrating forward and backward at a lower portion closer to the left from the left and right center in front view and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; An upper dish ball feed port 323d penetrating back and forth at the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in front view and extending vertically and having an upper portion located at the right end of the upper dish body 324.

  Further, the dish unit base 323 includes a ball feed guide path 323 e for guiding game balls sent to the rear side of the dish unit base 323 through the upper dish ball feed port 323 d to the entrance 251 a of the ball feed unit 250, After hanging down from the lower side of the feed guide path 323e, it extends in a substantially L-shape so as to become lower toward the right side of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in a cylindrical front view, and extends from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. A ball-pulling guide path 323f for guiding the released game balls to the lower dish ball supply port 323c, a lower end of the ball-feeding guide path 323e and a lower end of the ball-feeding guide path 323e and a lower end of the ball-feeding guide path 323f. An opening that penetrates back and forth at a height of between and is in contact with the operating rod 253c of the ball feeding unit 250, and an operation transmitting portion 327a that is operated by the upper countersunk button 327 projects rearward. Includes a 323g, the. The downstream end of the ball guide path 323f is open in a cylindrical portion of the lower counter ball supply port 323c.

  Further, the plate unit base 323 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in front view, and has a handle insertion opening 323h through which the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted. And a cylinder insertion port 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 has a front end opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 321 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a cylindrical rear end has an upper plate passage port for the door frame base 110. 117 penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270. Thereby, the game balls paid out from the payout unit 800 are supplied (paid) into the upper plate 321 through the upper plate ball supply port 323a.

  When the lower tray ball supply port 323c is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 322, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the lower tray passage port 116 of the door frame base 110 from the front side. And is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, game balls flowing in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The lower dish ball supply port 323c is disposed behind the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside the lower dish opening 326d) in the dish unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower dish cover 340, and the like. When viewed from the front, the door frame 3 is invisible from the player through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3d. Dish unit cover]
The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit cover 326 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper plate body 324 and the lower plate body 325. The plate unit cover 326 has a center in the left-right direction that swells forward, and has a large opening forward in the center in the left-right direction. An upper plate front decorative portion 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper plate 321 and a lower plate front decorative portion 326c formed below each of the left and right upper plate front decorative portions 326b. I have.

  The effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed so that the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the total width of the plate unit 320 in the left-right direction, and the up-down direction is substantially the same as the height of the plate unit 320 in the up-down direction. It is formed at the height. The effect operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined such that the front end moves rearward as it goes upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

  The front plate upper decorative portion 326b has a front surface that moves rearward from the center in the left-right direction to both left and right sides of the plate unit cover 326, and ends at the center in the left-right direction and both left and right sides of the plate unit cover 326. An intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape slightly bulging forward with respect to a plane connecting the ends of the first and second portions. Further, the plate front upper decorative portion 326b is inclined such that the lower end moves upward from the left-right center to the left-right end of the plate unit cover 326, and the left-right center of the plate unit cover 326 ( It is formed so that the up-down direction is narrowed from the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a side) to both left and right sides. In the plate unit cover 326, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 are attached to the upper front plate decoration portion 326b on the left side in front view.

  The front lower portion 326c of the dish unit 326c moves rearward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and right ends of the dish unit cover 326, and the left and right ends of the center of the dish unit cover 326 in the left-right direction. The intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface so as to be depressed rearward with respect to a plane connecting the ends of the first and second portions.

  A lower plate opening 326d penetrating front and rear is formed in the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view, and the lower plate 322 faces forward from the lower plate opening 326d. In the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view, the lower plate ball removal button 333 protrudes forward from the lower front surface of the lower plate opening 326d. A lower speaker opening 326e made of punched metal is formed on the left side of the lower plate opening 326d in the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left side when viewed from the front. The lower speaker opening 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the plate unit base 323 when assembled to the plate unit 320.

  A handle insertion opening 326f, which penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in front view and through which the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, is provided in the lower right front dish counterpart 326c in front view. A cylinder insertion opening 326g, which penetrates back and forth above the handle insertion opening 326f near the right corner and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The plate unit cover 326 has a plate-shaped top plate portion 326h extending from the upper end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the right side in front view to the front end of the plate unit base 323. It covers the upper right side. The top plate portion 326h is provided with a top ball removal button 327, a ball lending button 328, a return button 329, and a ball lending return display portion 330.

  The plate unit cover 326 includes a flat bottom plate portion 326i extending from the lower end of the plate lower decorative portion 326c to the front surface of the plate unit base 323. The bottom of the dish unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a stepped shape such that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed upward from below, and a lower plate ball removing base 335 described later is attached to that portion. In the bottom plate portion 326i, a hole vertically penetrating is formed at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball hole 322a of the lower plate 322.

  The plate unit cover 326 has a mounting space 326j that opens forward at the portion of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a and into which the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). Further, the plate unit cover 326 extends rearward from the left and upper sides of the lower plate opening 326d in a flat plate shape, and includes a lower plate cover portion 326k that covers the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 44). . The lower plate cover portion 326k is configured such that the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 contacts the left end, and the left end of the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 contacts the right end. I have.

[3-3e. Button for removing the upper plate ball]
The upper plate ball removing button 327 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the upper plate 321 when viewed from the front. It can be pulled out. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate removing button 327 is not illustrated in detail. Is mounted so as to be rotatable about an axis extending therethrough. The upper ball removing button 327 has an upper end of a vertically extending ball removing lever in contact with the lower surface of the front end thereof. The ball-pull lever is mounted slidably in the up-down direction by a ball-pull base attached to the front of the plate unit base 323 below the plate-pull button 327.

  The ball-pulling lever, whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the ball-pulling button 327, comes into contact with the upper part of the ball-pulling slider 327b, which is slidable up and down by the plate unit base 323, from above. ing. The upper plate ball removing slider 327b includes an operation transmitting portion 327a projecting rearward from the rear surface. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmitting portion 327a is moved from the opening 323g in the plate unit base 323. It projects rearward so as to face and contacts the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250 from below. The slider 327b is urged upward by a spring 327c, and the biasing force of the spring 327c causes the slider 327b and the lever to remove the ball. The upper bowl removing button 327 is located at the rising end.

  Accordingly, when the upper counter-ball-pulling button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper counter-ball-pulling-out spring 327c, the operation transmitting portion 327a of the upper counter-ball-pulling slider 327b moves downward and the operation transmitting portion 327a Since the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 which is in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball removing member 253 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and enters by the partition portion 253a. The partition between the mouth 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released, so that they are in communication with each other. As a result, the game balls in the upper plate 321 are discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and discharged to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. (Supply).

  Note that, when the upper bowl removing button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower bowl removing hole 322a may be moved in conjunction with it. As a result, when the upper plate ball removing button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower plate ball removing hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 are further removed. The paper is discharged from the hole 322a to the dollar box below. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong illusion to the player that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and it is difficult for the player to feel the trouble of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by focusing the player on the game (such as a game ball hitting operation and effect image). Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the balls may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball lending button, return button, and ball lending return display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending display section 330 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. As illustrated, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending display unit 330 are inside a circular decoration on the right side of the top plate ball removal button 327 on the top plate 326h of the plate unit cover 326 when viewed from the front. Mounted on

  The ball lending button 328 is used to push a cash or prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and press the ball lending machine to play a predetermined number of game balls. It is lent (paid out) to the upper plate 321 of the unit 320. When the return button 329 is pressed while the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is inserted, the cash or the prepaid card is returned after deducting the lending game ball.

  Although illustration is omitted, a three-digit seven-segment LED is arranged below the transparent surface of the ball lending display unit 330, and the number of cash or prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine, or An error code when the ball rental machine breaks down is displayed.

[3-3 g. Direction selection left button and Direction selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41 and the like. As shown, the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached to the plate unit cover 326 near the right end near the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the upper front plate decoration portion 326b on the left side in front view. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed leftward. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed rightward to the effect selection left button 331.

  The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are provided to the player in the main effect display device 1600 or the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 arranged in the game area 5a in front view. When the effect image prompting the selection is displayed, a pressing operation can be accepted, and the desired effect can be selected by operating the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 within a predetermined time.

[3-3h. Lower plate ball removal button]
The lower plate removing button 333 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41 to FIG. The lower plate ball removal button 333 protrudes forward from the lower front surface of the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view below the lower plate opening 326d in the plate unit cover 326 in front of the lower plate 322. By pressing the lower bowl removing button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower bowl removing hole 322a of the lower bowl 322 can be rotated. The lower plate hole 322a is opened, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320.

  The lower plate removing button 333 is slidable in the front-rear direction by a lower plate removing base 335 (see FIG. 42 (b)) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 below the lower plate main body 325. Mounted on The lower bowl removing button 333 is disposed on the left side of the lower bowl removing hole 322a of the lower bowl 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

  The base plate 335 of the plate unit cover 326 is provided on the base plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 so as to be accommodated in a portion formed below the lower plate 322 in a stepped shape so as to be recessed upward from below. It is attached to the part 326i. An outlet 335a, which has the same size as the lower ball drain hole 322a and penetrates vertically, is formed at a position directly below the lower hole 322a. . Although not shown in detail, the cover member 334 is disposed between the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate ball removing base 335. As a result, when the lid member 334 closing the lower plate hole 322a is opened, the outlet 335a of the lower plate base 335 is also opened, and the lower hole 322a and the outlet 335a are opened. Are in communication with each other.

  Although not shown, the cover member 334 is attached to the lower bowl removing base 335 so as to be rotatable about a position to the left of the lower bowl removing button 333 in plan view. The lower ball removing button 333 is connected to a portion between a portion of the lid member 334 that closes the lower ball removing hole 322 a and a portion rotatably mounted by the lower ball removing base 335. Thereby, when the lower countersunk ball removal button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 rotates around an axis extending vertically, and the lower countersunk ball extraction hole 322a (discharge port 335a) can be opened and closed.

  Although not shown in the drawing, the holding device for holding the lower plate ball release button 333 when the lower plate ball release button 333 is pressed backward and moved, and a lower plate ball release button And a lower countersunk ball release spring that urges 333 forward. In a state in which the lower ball pull-out button 333 is protruded forward and the lower ball pull-out hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower ball pull-out button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 rotates. As a result, the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened, and the lower tray ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device, so that the lower tray ball removal button 333 remains moved rearward. In this state, even if the button 333 is released, the button 333 does not move forward, and the hole 322a for opening the ball 322 is kept open. The game balls in 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320 through the lower plate hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

  Then, in a state where the lower countersunk ball removing button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower countersunk ball extracting hole 322a is open, when the lower countersunk ball extracting button 333 is pressed backward, the holding by the holding device is released. In this state, when the button 333 is released, the button 333 is moved forward by the urging force of the spring, and returns to the protruding state, and the cover 334 is turned. Then, the lower countersunk hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. Thus, game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322.

  Note that, apart from the pressing operation of the lower plate ball removing button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower plate ball discharging hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is also movable by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removing button 327. The lower bowl removing hole 322a may be opened. Thus, when the player wants to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the dollar box arranged below the plate unit 320, only by operating the upper plate ball removal button 327, the dollar box can be moved through the lower plate 322. And the trouble associated with emptying the ball can be simplified. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the balls may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 48A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 49A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 51 is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 48 (a), and FIG. 52 is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 48 (b). FIG. 53A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 53B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape, a center side excluding an outer peripheral edge is formed transparent, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by a player, and an effect operation unit of a plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. A base unit 430 mounted on the rear side of the unit 415 and having the operation buttons 410 and the decorative board unit 420 mounted on the front surface, and mounted on the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation buttons 410 A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image; Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from behind. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller in diameter than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and is formed transparent at a center side excluding an outer peripheral edge. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) such that the outer periphery is circular and the center swells forward, and a front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that do not allow light to pass through.

  The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. In addition, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape with no irregularities on the surface side. The button lens 411 extends a predetermined length toward the center (inside) in a state of being recessed in a W-shaped cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a and a row extending within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction extending on the axis toward the center in a state of being recessed in a circular arc cross section from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side of the first button decoration part 411a. And a plurality of (six) second button decorations 411b provided.

  As illustrated, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center when assembled to the operation button 410, and a group of left and right sides is a group of upper and lower sides. It extends longer toward the center than it does.

  Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and is formed three on each of the left and right sides. These second button decorations 411b are formed so as to face from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward such that the front surface is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exerts a lens effect of refracting light at the portions of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b due to the W-shaped or arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly seen.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and has a plurality of (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in a circular shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decorations 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from a front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c projecting rearward along the outer circumference of the main body 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (three) detecting pieces 413d projecting rearward in a strip shape and arranged in the circumferential direction, and a predetermined length along the outer periphery, penetrating the flange portion 413b back and forth outside the main body portion 413a. A base opening 413e extending in the circumferential direction and having a plurality of (six) formed in the circumferential direction, and a cylindrical shape extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end side is the inner surface of the button lens 411. And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange 413b. The four guide bosses 413c are respectively disposed at positions corresponding to the four corners of the main body 413a in the upper, lower, left, and right directions. These four guide bosses 413c are slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be arranged two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

  Six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, three each, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the base opening 413e of the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and a part of the inner extension 413f are recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inside extension 413f has an inside diameter at the front end narrowed inward substantially matching the inside diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape), is formed transparent, and is a door frame side effect display device 460 arranged on the rear side. Can be visually recognized from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide bosses 413c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and an operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. Urged forward. The operation button 410 is further prevented from moving forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430 when the front side of the outer peripheral edge abuts on the frame unit 415. , The rear end moves backward until the rear end contacts the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413 d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. By the detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440, the operation button 410 is operated.

  Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 of the transparent button lens 411 to the center side in a state where the rendering operation unit 400 is assembled. The part 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

  Further, the operation button 410 has a front end opening of a cylindrical button base 413 closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion that can be seen rearward is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation buttons of the base unit 430.

  When the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (the main body 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative board unit 420 and is higher than the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. It becomes a state protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b mounted on the decoration button 422 outside the operation button left and the decoration board 423 outside the operation button right of the decoration board unit 420, respectively, emits light from the button. It is possible to prevent the base unit 413 from leaking from the outside to the inside, and to operate the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior of the base unit 430. Light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative board 436 can be prevented from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Accordingly, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430 It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being illuminated and decorated other than the part targeted for luminous decoration, and to perform luminous decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 from the front side so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed in a shape conforming to the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame main body 416 having a circular central opening 416a attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320, and frame main bodies 416 on the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a from the front side. I have.

  The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates forward and backward, and has a central opening 416a that penetrates forward and backward on both left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a, and a notch 416c cut at a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Is provided. The center opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter of the operation button 410 on the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. Thereby, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can be brought into contact with the rear side of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412a.

  The six outer peripheral openings 416b are respectively provided on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are each closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-back direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut out. In a state where the rendering operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylindrical portion 416d includes the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420, respectively. And partitions between the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 52).

  Further, the frame main body 416 includes a pair of mounting portions 416e extending outward at upper portions on both right and left sides of the outer periphery, and mounted to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the frame main body 416 (the production operation unit 400), the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416 e and the cutout portion 416 c are attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320.

  The frame main body 416 has a metal covering substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a therebetween. A glossy plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416, three from the rear side. The frame side lens 417 has a smooth surface with no irregularities on the front side, and a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The outer shape of the frame top lens 418 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape so as to be fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame main body 416 from the front side. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is formed smoothly. In the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a are provided in the rear surface side in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  In the frame unit 415, in a state where the rendering operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second LEDs 422 b and 423 b on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration board 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b and the like mounted on the frame top lens 418 can emit light. .

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the effect operation unit, as viewed from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. The vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 which are respectively attached to the left and right front surfaces of the substrate base 421. , A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower portion of the front surface of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 has an inner peripheral side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and an outer peripheral side larger than the outer diameter of the flange part 413b of the button base 413. Further, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in an arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted radially outside the inner circumference of the board base 421 than the plurality of first LEDs 422a. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The decoration board 423 outside the operation button right extends in an arc along the front surface of the board base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 has a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and an inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. The front and rear surfaces of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are white.

  The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to a rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  In the state where the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the rendering operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. In the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located behind the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422 b and 423 b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. In addition, in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

  Accordingly, the decoration board unit 420 causes only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 to emit light by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. At the same time, the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b allows only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 to emit light.

  In addition, the decoration substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the entire production operation unit 400.

[3-4d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the staging operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58A is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58B is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view showing the base unit of the effect operation unit in a disassembled state as viewed from the front. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the staging operation unit viewed from behind. The base unit 430 of the staging operation unit 400 has the operation buttons 410 attached so as to be able to move forward and backward, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415.

  The base unit 430 has four through holes 431a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and extending vertically in the center and penetrating in a substantially rectangular shape, and blind holes opened forward outside the through holes 431a. An annular unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, a light-transmissive operation button decoration member 432 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431 so as to cover the through hole 431a, and extending short and longitudinally in a tubular manner; The operation button left inner decoration board 433 and the operation button right inner decoration board 434 and the operation button inner decoration board 434 attached to the left and right sides of the through hole 431 a in the front of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decoration member 432, respectively. At the rear, the operation attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431. A button on the decorative substrate 435 and the operation buttons under the decorative substrate 436, and a frame top lens decorative board 437 attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 431, a.

  The base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 inserted into four holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder. The three pressing detection sensors 440 respectively attached to the 439 and detecting the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the effect operation unit relay board 441 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 431, and the effect operation unit relay board 441. And a relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side.

  The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape and is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth at the center, and has a substantially rectangular through hole 431a extending vertically. The through-hole 431a has a size that fits inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is formed in a size that allows the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. A door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

  The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 at the four corners of the operation button 410 outside the through hole 431a. The holding hole 431b has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss 413c, and the guide boss 413c can be slidably inserted.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b extends from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees counterclockwise. The upper right holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 431 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410). Is formed at a position rotated by about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b, respectively. .

  The unit base 431 has a light-shielding wall portion 431c which protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from a portion on the upper front surface between a portion where the inner decorative board 435 on the operation button is mounted and a portion where the frame top lens decorative board 437 is mounted. It has. With this light shielding wall portion 431c, the frame top lens 418 can be illuminated and decorated only by the frame top lens decorative substrate 437.

  The decoration member 432 inside the operation button is formed in a curved surface shape such that a substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a extending short in the front-rear direction and a front end side of the peripheral wall portion 432a are closed and the center protrudes forward. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c extending vertically through the front plate portion 432b, a flange portion 432d extending outward from a rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d. And a plurality of mounting bosses 432e that protrude rearward from the unit base 431 and are mounted on the unit base 431.

  The outer diameter of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the in-operation button decoration member 432 is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating the front plate 432b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  In the decoration member 432 for operation buttons, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed as smooth surfaces without irregularities.

  The in-operation button decoration member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is concave in an arc shape, extends in the front-rear direction, and has a plurality of first button in-button decoration portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction. , Formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulging in an arc shape, extending in an octagonal shape with the center of the front plate portion 432b as the center, and concentric with the center of the front plate portion 432b as the center. 432g (see FIG. 63). The second in-button decorative portion 432g is formed to have a portion extending in parallel with the four inner peripheries of the opening 432c.

  The operation button interior decoration member 432 is formed of a transparent member. The interior of the operation button decorating member 432 is made invisible behind clearly by the lens effect of the first button decorating portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button decorating portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. .

  The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 each have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. By emitting light, the decoration member 432 in the operation button can be made to emit light. By making the decoration member 432 inside the operation button emit light, the inside of the operation button 410 and the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be made light emission decoration.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration board 437, and the LEDs can emit light, so that the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can emit light.

  The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 are full color LEDs, respectively. It has been. The front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, and the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 are white. .

  The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring, and is inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 from the front. The operation button spring 438 has a rear end in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431 b and a front end protruding rearward from the main body 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 in a state where the operation button spring 438 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400. It is in contact with the rear end of the portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation buttons 410 forward.

  The three press detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. More specifically, on the front surface of the unit base 431, three pressing detection sensors 440 are provided, one at the lower left of the upper left holding hole 431b, the other at the lower right of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the other at the lower left. Are attached to the lower right side of the holding holes 431b through sensor holders 439, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 440 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 431. These three pressure detection sensors 440 can detect three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

  The production operation unit relay board 441 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431, to the left of the through hole 431a in rear view (right side in front view). The effect operation unit relay board 441 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, and an operation button upper inner decoration board. 435, decoration board 436 under the operation button, frame top lens decoration board 437, pressure detection sensor 440, and door frame side effect display device 460, and connection with door main body relay board (not shown) of door frame base unit 100 Is for relaying.

  The relay board cover 442 extends leftward in a front view from the lower end of a portion that covers the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441, and includes a leg 442a attached to a lower rear part of the unit base 431. When assembled to the door frame 3, the leg 442 a of the relay board cover 442 has a lower surface extending substantially horizontally, and a leg 442 a between the leg 442 a and the bottom plate 326 i that forms the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. To form a slight gap (see FIG. 26). Thus, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed down or hit, the frame unit 415 is not moved until the lower surface of the leg 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the plate unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the attachment portion 416e and the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted below, and the effect unit mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attaching portion of the plate unit cover 326 are restricted. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the 326a and the like, thereby preventing their breakage.

[3-4e. Door frame side effect display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432 c of the decoration member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430. The display screen can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the central portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front surface and the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. And a mounting bracket 462 in the shape of a bottomed rectangular tube. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The outer circumference of the mounting bracket 462 is formed in the same shape as the outer circumference of the liquid crystal display device 461, and is mounted such that the bottom of the bottomed cylindrical shape is in contact with the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

  In a state where the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 passes through the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the inside of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is provided. (See FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the in-operation button decoration member 432, and faces forward from the opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image on the liquid crystal display device 461 based on a control signal from the peripheral control board.

[3-4f. Effects of the production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the rendering operation unit in FIG. 51. FIG. 62 (a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, in which a part of the operation button is cut away and the first button decoration portion of the operation button, a button frame or the like attempts to hide the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows a part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part which it is going to hide with the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of an effect operation unit. FIG. 63A is an explanatory diagram showing a perspective view of the appearance of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 63B is an explanatory diagram of the appearance of the effect operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

  The rendering operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment can show a rendering image to a player according to a game state that is changed by a game ball being driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and operate the player. By operating the button 410, the player can participate in the effect presented to the player and entertain it.

  The effect operation unit 400 has an overall height substantially equal to the height of the portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110. The effect operation unit 400 is formed so that the entire width is slightly larger than 大 き く of the entire width of the door frame 3. The rendering operation unit 400 is disposed below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326 a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the state in which the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. Is formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. Installed as Thereby, the rendering operation unit 400 is configured such that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line, It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Accordingly, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is disposed above the plate unit 320 (production operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the center axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his or her line of sight from the gaming area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to its front view (projection viewed from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the user can visually recognize the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410 in a good state.

  The effect operation unit 400 has four guide bosses 413 c of the operation button 410 slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431 b of the base unit 430, respectively, and is urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In a normal state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to move by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The rear surface of the frame body 416 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a.

  In the effect operation unit 400, in a normal state, the center side (the center axis CL side) of the operation button 410 near the inner periphery of the button frame 412 projects forward from the center opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. I have. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) of the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412. , Protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 51 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) of the button lens 411 with respect to the direction of the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the staging operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the center axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted, and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface).

  Since the operation button 410 has an extremely large outer diameter as compared with the effect operation button provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. Likely to be. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in a conventional pachinko machine are mounted so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment are attached. Since the center axis CL is inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above similarly to the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by a white arrow in FIG. A part of the operation button 410 away from the center axis CL is pressed.

  By the way, the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the pressed portion is flat surface When pressing a part deviated from the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the part (the button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a position distant from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt and moving the operation button 410 straight backward. Can be. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly moved backward without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 can be pressed. It is possible to entertain the effect of the operation sufficiently.

  The effect operation unit 400 has a vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420. Since the vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424 since the vibration is generated by the vibration motor 424 because the vibration is generated at the portion farthest from the mounted portion, since the vibration is generated by the vibration operation motor 424 because the vibration is generated. In addition, the entire effect operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to a player who is touching the effect operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can relatively easily perform the pressing operation (the position indicated by the white arrow in FIG. 61), the player who is pressing the operation button 410 can be operated. Strong vibration can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit, the frame is not moved until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The impact can be absorbed by the downward bending of the attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the rendering portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting of the plate unit cover 326 are attached. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 and the like from being damaged. Accordingly, even when the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is presented to the player with the effect of pressing the operation button 410, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to increase the burden on the game hall side by making it hard to be damaged. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, the button lens 411 is formed in a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411 even when strongly hit, so that the button lens 411 is hardly damaged.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, in the effect operation unit 400, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the decoration member 432 inside the operation button are composed of transparent members. The decoration by the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the first button decoration part 432f, the second button decoration part 432g formed on the back side is the front side (the player side). ). In addition, since light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in plate thickness in the portion where the uneven decoration is formed, the rear side is difficult to visually recognize through the portion where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  Since the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the unevenness decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a is provided. Thereby, it is possible to make it hard to see the rear part at the outer peripheral part of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the part where the first button decoration part 411a is formed (rearward in the direction of the center axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall part of the decoration member 432 in the operation button Although the gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button decoration member 432 is located from the front side (player side) from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration part 411a located in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. This makes it possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the in-operation button decoration member 432 whose position is fixed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to arrange the in-operation button decoration member 432 within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, thereby improving the appearance of the operation button 410.

  More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is configured such that the first button decoration portion 411 a and the second button decoration portion 411 b of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 and the button frame 412 form the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430. The unit base 431, the decorative board unit 420, and the like, which are further outside and on the rear side (rear side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the cross-hatched area surrounded by a dashed line is not seen from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the inside operation button decoration member 432 are hidden and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation buttons 410 and, consequently, the overall effect operation unit 400.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411 a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the center axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the second in-button decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the in-operation button decoration member 432 disposed inside and behind the operation button 410 extends in an octagonal shape with the center axis CL as the center. As shown in FIG. 63, the uneven line of the first button decorative portion 411a and the uneven line of the second button internal decorative portion 432g intersect with each other, as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-back direction (the direction in which the center axis CL extends), the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated from each other. With the second button decoration portion 432g, the player can see a deep and three-dimensional geometric pattern to the player, and can enjoy the decoration including the operation button 410.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-back direction, when the position of the eyes of the player moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a is obtained. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g is changed, the player can see the moving decoration and entertain the player.

  As described above, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration part 432g of the operation button decoration member 432. Since the player can show the pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's interest strongly and have a high appeal.

  The effect operation unit 400 includes an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, an operation button right inner decoration board An upper inner decorative substrate 435 and an operation button lower inner decorative substrate 436 are arranged, and by illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof, the operation button interior decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. In other words, the operation buttons 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the operation buttons 410 are arranged inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413, so that light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a. Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 of the decoration substrate unit 420 is provided. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are arranged, and by illuminating the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated. Can be. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board. 423 second LEDs 423b are disposed, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated by emitting light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422 b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the second LED 423 b of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416 d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated. .

  In the effect operation unit 400, a frame top lens decorative board 437 in the base unit 430 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative board 437. By making the LED emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission. From the lower side of the unit base 431 of the unit base 431 of the unit unit 431 where the frame top lens decorative board 437 is attached, a flat light-shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward to near the lower rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED on the top lens decoration board 437 does not leak to the operation buttons 410 and the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

[3-4 g. Overall Configuration of Second Embodiment of Production Operation Unit]
Next, a second effect operation unit 400A as a second embodiment of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71 and the like. FIG. 64A is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63 in the embodiment, and FIG. 64B is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65A is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the center axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH in FIG. FIG. 69A is a cross-sectional view taken along a line II in FIG. 64B, and FIG. 69B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit 320 in place of the effect operation unit 400 described above. The second effect operation unit 400A, like the effect operation unit 400, allows the player to perform a pressing operation and can present an effect image to the player. In the following, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as in the effect operation unit 400 are denoted by the same reference numerals and described.

  The second production operation unit 400A has an operation button 410 whose outer shape is circular and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparent, and which can be pressed by the player, and an effect of a plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame unit 415 having a frame shape attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a, a decoration substrate unit 420 arranged rearward of the operation button 410 and capable of decorating the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 with light emission. A second base unit 450 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and having the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 attached to the front surface, and a second base unit 450 that can be visually recognized from the player through the operation button 410. The second effect table on the door frame side that is attached to and can display effect images And apparatus 460A, a buffer unit 510 which is attached to the lower surface of the second performance display device 460A door frame side, and a.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A is configured such that the second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in a front view are arranged. And a relay board cover 516 attached to the right side of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in front view so as to cover the same. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are mounted on the right side of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A when viewed from the front.

  The second effect operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, a press detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decoration board 482, a switching drive motor 492, a projector 500, And relaying the connection between the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 72 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A has an outer shape formed in a circular shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and is formed transparent at the center excluding the outer peripheral edge. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side swells forward, and an outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 attached to the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 are provided. The configuration is substantially the same as the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400.

  A specific difference is that the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 have a pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and a guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the portion 413c is different.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one vertex at the center of the button lens 411 at a position in contact with the inner periphery of the button frame 412. The button lens 411 in a truss-like pattern and a truss-like pattern in which a plurality of triangles directed toward one another and a triangle with one vertex directed to the opposite side of the center are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction in a plurality of rows. , A right-angled triangular pattern composed of a bottom extending toward the center of the button lens 411 from both ends of the bottom, and a hypotenuse extending from the tip of the side to the center of the bottom. From the hypotenuse of the right triangle pattern, the side extending longer than the right triangle pattern from the center of the bottom of the truss pattern triangle to the center of the button lens 411, and the tip of the side And varying isosceles triangle pattern constituted by the side extending to the tip of the hypotenuse of each triangle-shaped pattern, in which is formed.

  That is, the first button decoration unit 411a is configured by a combination of a plurality of triangles. Although not shown, each triangle forming the first button decoration portion 411a has a polyhedral shape with its respective surfaces facing different directions. Thereby, while the front side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, the back side is formed in a polyhedral shape in the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, so that the first button decoration portion 411a is formed. In the part, the thickness of the button lens 411 is complicatedly changed, and light passing through this part is irregularly refracted. Therefore, at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, a geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined can be shown to the player, and at the same time, the rear member can be made difficult to see due to irregular refraction.

  The guide boss portion 413c of the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and is held inside the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 inside the cylindrical shape. Are slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached to the guide boss portion 413c so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from behind.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 from the front side so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed in a shape conforming to the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, is given the same reference numeral, and a detailed description is omitted.

[3-4g-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 57, 69 to 71, and the like. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. And the second effect operation unit 400A.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 which are respectively attached to the left and right front surfaces of the substrate base 421. , A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower portion of the front surface of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, is given the same reference numeral, and a detailed description is omitted.

[3-4g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 73 and the like. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the operation button 410 mounted so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side is mounted, and is mounted on the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is something that can be done.

  The second base unit 450 has a unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and projects rearward from the front surface of the unit base 451 into four cylindrical guide bosses 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. And four button shafts 452 each having a cylindrical shape inserted slidably therefrom, and an operation button spring through which each of the four button shafts 452 is inserted to urge the rear end of the guide boss 413c of the operation button 410 forward. (Not shown), and three pressing detection sensors 454 attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 and detecting three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, respectively.

  The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 includes an annular main body 451a, a cover 451b projecting hemispherically rearward from the inner peripheral edge of the main body 451a, and a vertical direction with respect to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through hole 451c that extends vertically when viewed from the front and back through the cover portion 451b, four holding holes 451d that are recessed rearward from the front surface of the main body portion 451a, and a main body portion 451a. An upper bearing portion 451e recessed in a semicircle (U-shape) from the front to the rear at the upper portion of the upper portion, and a semicircular shape coaxial with the upper bearing portion 451e from the front to the rear at the lower portion of the main body 451a. A (U-shaped) lower bearing portion 451f and a left and right side of an upper bearing portion 451e on the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a, and the rotation of the screen unit 470. And a, a pair of rotation restricting portion 451g to regulate.

  The annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner periphery and an outer periphery having substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 formed in a C shape. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a. The cover portion 451b is formed in a size that can be accommodated without contact when the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A rotatably mounted by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f rotates. I have. The through-hole 451c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side to pass from behind.

  The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at four upper, lower, left, and right corners of the front surface of the main body 451a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. These holding holes 451d have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, so that the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted. A button shaft 452 is mounted in the four holding holes 451d coaxially with the central axis. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d protrudes forward from the front surface of the main body 451a. When the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d is inserted into the cylindrical guide boss 413c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 is attached via the guide boss 413c so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. Can be.

  The upper left holding hole 451d of the four holding holes 451d is counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. The upper right holding hole 451d of the four holding holes 451d is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). Is formed at a position rotated by about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, of the four holding holes 451d, two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the two upper holding holes 451d. .

  Further, operation button springs (not shown) are inserted into the four holding holes 451d, respectively. When the front ends of these operation button springs abut against the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c, the operation button springs are inserted through the guide boss portion 413c. 410 is urged forward.

  The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U-shape that is open at the front and extends rearward. In the upper bearing 451e and the lower bearing 451f, the centers of the portions extending in a semicircular arc are located coaxially. The upper bearing part 451e and the lower bearing part 451f are provided with the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A inserted from the front, and the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 from the front side. Is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a, so that the screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side can be rotatably supported.

  As for a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451, the front surfaces of the respective front portions pass through the central axes of the semicircular portions of the upper bearing portion 451e whose U-shaped recessed portions are recessed rearward. And are separated from each other in the circumferential direction at a predetermined angle about the central axis. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g restrict the rotation range of the screen unit 470 by being brought into contact with the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A. I have. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to a 90-degree angle range by the pair of rotation restriction parts 451g.

  Although not shown, a magnet is buried in each of the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g, and is magnetically attached to the iron plate attached to the stopper 475b, so as to contact the rotation restricting portions 451g. The stopper 475b is hard to separate from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Therefore, in the screen unit 470, the first position in which the main screen 471 is directed forward or the second position in which the sub-screen 472 is directed forward in the screen unit 470 by the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b. The screen unit 470 can be held in any of the positions, and the screen unit 470 is prevented from rotating by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 or the like, and the door frame side is controlled. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

  The three pressing detection sensors 454 are mounted on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. More specifically, on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, three pressing detection sensors 454 are provided, one at the lower left of the upper left holding hole 451d, and the other at the lower right of the upper right holding hole 451d. Are attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 454 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 451. These three pressure detection sensors 454 can detect three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second effect display device]
The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like. The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side is attached to the second base unit 450, and can display an effect image to a player through a transparent portion of the operation button 410. The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side includes a screen unit 470 attached to the second base unit 450 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically by an upper bearing portion 451e and a lower bearing portion 451f, and a second base unit. An upper bearing member 480 mounted on the upper front of the unit 450 and rotatably mounting the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and mounted on the lower front of the second base unit 450 And a lower bearing member 485 that rotatably mounts the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

  In addition, the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side includes a rotation drive unit 490 mounted on the upper portion of the second base unit 450 by rotating the screen unit 470 and a cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450. A projector 500 which is arranged and capable of projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470 from the rear, and a rear surface of the unit base 451 which is mounted with the projector 500 and covers the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. A box-shaped projector mounting member 505 having an open front and a mounting gear member 475 of a screen unit 470 on the left side of the rotary drive unit 490 in the upper part of the second base unit 450 when viewed from the front. Upper cover 506 and the upper And two rotation detecting sensor 507 for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470 is attached to the bar 506 (rotational position), and a.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side is rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 about an axis extending vertically, and the effect image is projected from the projector 500, The effect image can be displayed (projected and displayed) so as to be visible to the player.

  The screen unit 470 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape and has a milky white translucent main screen 471, a disk-shaped part having one end in the axial direction of the main screen 471 as a part of the outer periphery, and a central part having an axis. A sub-screen 472 which is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction outward and has a translucent milky white color, and projects in a columnar shape outwardly in the direction perpendicular to the axis from the axial center of both ends of the main screen 471. The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, the operating gear member 475 which is attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and has gear teeth 475 a formed over substantially half of the outer periphery, and penetrates the sub-screen 472. A sub-screen decorative member 476 (see FIGS. 74 and 75) formed in a relief shape simulating a transparent and predetermined character (skull); A sub-screen decorative board 477 (see FIG. 75 and the like) mounted on the back side of the 472 and having a plurality of LEDs 477 a mounted on a surface facing the sub-screen 472, and a side opposite to the sub-screen 472 of the main screen 471. And a semicircular peripheral decoration member 478 that extends shortly from the end of the main screen 471 toward the central axis of the main screen 471.

  The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 has a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451 a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The main screen 471 has an axial length approximately 4/3 times the radius of the semi-cylindrical shape. The main screen 471 is decorated so that both ends in the axial direction are bordered by the peripheral decoration portion 472 a and the peripheral decoration member 478 of the sub-screen 472.

  The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape matches the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74B). . The sub-screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side, and has a peripheral decorative portion 472a in which a plurality of square pyramid-shaped irregularities are provided in a plurality of rows in the circumferential direction, and closes the inside of the peripheral decorative portion 472a. And a curved general screen portion 472b. The entire peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape such that the inner peripheral side protrudes in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen general portion 472b bulges in a direction away from the main screen 471 into a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471. A through-hole is formed in the screen general portion 472b of the sub-screen 472, and a sub-screen decorative member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

  The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are inserted into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 from the front, respectively, and are rotatably mounted.

  The operation gear member 475 meshes with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotation drive unit 490 and is formed with a gear tooth 475a formed over a substantially half circumference, and protrudes outward from one of circumferential ends of the gear tooth 475a. A stopper 475b, and a detection piece 475c that protrudes outward in a flat plate shape from the side opposite to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear teeth 475a. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 is located in the concave portion 481a of the upper bearing member 480 that is concave in an arc around the axis of the upper shaft member 473 when assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is regulated by contacting the pair of rotation regulating parts 451g of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the concave portion 481a.

  Although not shown in detail, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that comes into contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and this iron plate can be magnetically attached to a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It has become.

  The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position in which the main screen 471 is directed forward and a second position in which the sub-screen 472 is directed forward. The detection piece 475c is detected by a rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

  The sub-screen decoration member 476 is attached to the screen general portion 472b of the sub-screen 472. The sub-screen decoration member 476 is formed in a relief shape simulating a skull by a transparent member, and the thickness of the sub-screen decoration member 476 is complicatedly changed. It is difficult. Although not shown in detail, the letter “PUSH” is formed in the relief simulating the skull of the sub-screen decorative member 476.

  The sub-screen decorative board 477 is attached to the back side of the sub-screen 472 so as to form a gap between the sub-screen 472 and a plurality of LEDs 477a on the front side (the side facing the sub-screen 472). Has been implemented. The sub-screen decoration substrate 477 has an outer shape smaller than the sub-screen decoration member 476 and has a white surface. By making the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 emit light, the sub-screen decoration member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be made to emit light. More specifically, the sub-screen decorative board 477 can make the skull “eyes” and the letters “PUSH” emit light and light by making the LED 477a emit light.

  The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is disposed relatively close to the sub-screen 472, and has no member for diffusing light between itself and the sub-screen 472. , The player can recognize the point light source of the LED 477a. Further, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can block light from the projector 500. Therefore, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 can be projected on the sub-screen 472 by the projector 500.

  The peripheral decoration member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and similarly to the peripheral decoration portion 472a, a plurality of square pyramidal irregularities are provided in the circumferential direction of the arc. .

  As described above, the screen unit 470 includes two different screens, such as the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472. The main screen 471 is intended to display an effect image that is projected from the projector 500 over the entire surface of the semi-cylindrical shape, and is attracted to the player by the projection from the projector 500. On the other hand, the sub-screen 472 has a narrow range in which the effect image from the projector 500 forms the periphery of the center sub-screen decoration member 476 due to the presence of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 at the back center (the main screen 471 is narrower). (The range), the purpose is to display an effect image that gorgeously colors the periphery of the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the operation of pressing the operation button 410 on the player by the light-emitting decoration of the sub-screen decoration member 476 using the LED 477a. The purpose is to encourage.

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 close the front sides of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, which are opened forward. It is attached to the front of 451a. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are in a state where the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451, respectively. By attaching to the front surface of the unit base 451, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450.

  The upper bearing member 480 includes a bearing member 481 mounted on the upper part of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing part 451e whose front side is open, and a bearing member. And a frame top lens decorative substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of the 481. The bearing member 481 has a concave portion 481a that is concave in an arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is the deepest. The concave portion 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in a state assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and arranged, and a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the concave portion 481a. The concave portion 481a that is concave in the arc shape allows the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 to satisfactorily rotate between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  The frame top lens decorative board 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and is located behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in a state where it is assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. ing. Accordingly, the frame top lens 418 can be made to emit light by making the LED of the frame top lens decorative board 482 emit light.

  The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451f. By attaching the lower bearing member 485 to the front surface of the unit base 451 in a state where the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 is inserted into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the lower shaft member 474 is provided. Can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4g-5c. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The rotation drive unit 490 is mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, and can rotate the screen unit 470. The rotation drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 that is mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 and has a hollow inside, and a switching drive motor 492 that is mounted on the lower surface of the unit case 491 and has a rotation shaft protruding into the unit case 491. A spur gear-shaped drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the switching drive motor, and a spur gear-shaped first gear meshed with the drive gear and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. A transmission gear (not shown) is meshed with the first transmission gear and is meshable with the gear teeth 475 a of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470, and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. And a second transmission gear 495 having a spur gear shape.

  The second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475 a of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state where the rotation drive unit 490 is assembled to the second effect operation unit 400 </ b> A. The rotation drive unit 490 rotates the switching drive motor 492 to rotate the screen unit 470 around the axis extending back and forth through the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. Can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
The projector 500 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The projector 500 is arranged in a hemispherical cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 via the projector mounting member 505. The projector 500 can project and display the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by irradiating the effect image to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

  The projector 500 includes a cubic projector body 501 attached to the projector attachment member 505, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward from the projector body 501 in a columnar shape and irradiates the effect image forward from the front end.

  In the projector 500, the rear part of the projector main body 501 is mounted on the projector mounting member 505, and the lens part 502 and the projector main body 501 are disposed in the cover part 451b through the through-hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side. Mounted as

  The projector 500 can project an effect image over substantially the front of the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display a still image or a moving image as the effect image. This projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal type projector and has an automatic focusing function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector mounting member 505 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in a box shape with an open front. The projector 500 is mounted inside the projector mounting member 505, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The projector mounting member 505 can be mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 to cover the cover 451b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

  The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, so that the projector 500 can be mounted in a state where the projector 500 is inclined so as to match the inclination of the operation button 410. . A plurality of slits 505a penetrating back and forth are formed on the rear wall of the projector mounting member 505, and heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

  A second effect operation unit relay board 515 and a relay board cover 516 are mounted on the right side of the projector mounting member 505 in a front view.

[3-4g-5f. Top cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 451 a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to cover above the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensors 507 are for detecting the rotation position of the screen unit 470, and are mounted on the lower surface of the upper cover 506 in a state where they are separated from each other.

  Although not shown in detail, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached at positions separated by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis of the screen unit 470, and the operation gears in the screen unit 470 are provided. The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 include a detection piece 475c when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 faces forward and a detection piece 475c when the sub-screen 472 faces forward. The detection piece 475c at the time can be detected respectively. The rotation drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotation drive unit 490 is controlled based on the detection signal of the detection piece 475c by the two rotation detection sensors 507.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 70 and FIG. The buffer unit 510 is attached to a lower surface of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side, and reduces a shock when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit from above, and a plate unit cover in the plate unit 320. 326 is transmitted to the bottom plate 326i.

  The buffer unit 510 is in contact with an elastically deformable flat plate-shaped buffer member 511 whose upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and is in contact with the lower surface of the buffer member 511. And a buffer base 512 attached to the lower surface of the projector attachment member 505 so as to be relatively accessible.

  The buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 512a in contact with the lower surface of the shock-absorbing member 511, and leg pieces protruding downward from both left and right sides of the main body portion 512a in front view and extending in the front-rear direction. 512b. The leg portion 512b of the buffer base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  The buffer unit 510 is configured such that when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit down, the projector mounting member 505 mounted on the base unit 430 compresses the buffer member 511 of the buffer unit 510. To move down. The shock is absorbed by the compression of the buffer member 511. When the projector mounting member 505 moves further downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 abuts on the upper surface of the main body 512a of the buffer base 512. Since a gap is formed between the left and right leg pieces 512b of the main body 512a and the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the plate unit cover 326, the projector mounting member abutting on the upper surface of the main body 512a. When the 505 moves further downward, the flat plate-shaped main body portion 512a bends, and the shock can be absorbed by the bending of the main body portion 512a. Further, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body portion 512a bent downward contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body portion 512a is restricted. The impact is transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the attachment unit 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment unit of the plate unit cover 326 can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the 326a and the like, and to prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4g-7. Operation and effect of the second production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 74A is an explanatory diagram of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the center axis | shaft of the operation button extended with the screen facing forward. FIG. 75A is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 75B is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 74B. FIG. 76 (a) is a view in which the second production operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is going to do, (b) shows the part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of the 2nd effect operation unit of the state of (a). FIG. FIG. 77 (a) shows the second production operation unit hidden by a first button decoration portion, a button frame, and the like of the operation button in a view of the second effect operation unit viewed from a direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub-screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is going to do, (b) shows the part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of the 2nd effect operation unit of the state of (a). FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 or changes the operation button operation in accordance with a game state that is changed by a game ball being driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is possible to entertain the player by displaying an effect image in the 410 and to allow the player to operate the operation button 410 so that the player can participate in the effect presented to the player. is there.

  The second effect operation unit 400A is formed so that the overall height is substantially the same as the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is formed so that the entire width is slightly larger than １ ／ of the entire width of the door frame 3. The second effect operation unit 400A is disposed below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper part of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit 320, between the lower end of the leg portion 512b of the buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. , A gap is formed. That is, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached only to the upper part of the plate unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed to become. As a result, the second effect operation unit 400A changes the center axis CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) into a vertical line. It is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees so as to move upward as it goes forward. Accordingly, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is disposed above the plate unit 320 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his or her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (operation button 410), the operation button 410 can reach its front view (projection viewed from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). , And the operation button 410 and the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shafts 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 slide on the four cylindrical guide bosses 413c of the operation buttons 410, respectively. It is movably inserted and is urged forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In a normal state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the second effect operation unit 400 </ b> A causes the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be moved by the urging force of the operation button spring. Of the frame main body 416 in the vicinity of the central opening 416a.

  In the normal state, the second effect operation unit 400A is configured such that the center side (the center axis CL side) of the operation button 410 near the inner periphery of the button frame 412 is forward from the center opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. It is protruding. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) of the operation button 410, a portion protruding forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412. , Protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) of the button lens 411 with respect to the direction of the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the center axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring. When the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the movement of the operation button 410 is restricted and the movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface).

  Since the operation button 410 has an extremely large outer diameter as compared with the effect operation button provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. Likely to be. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in a conventional pachinko machine are mounted so that the central axis thereof extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment are operated. Since the button 410 is attached with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above similarly to a conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 separates from the central axis CL of the operation button 410. The part is pressed (see FIG. 61).

  By the way, the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the pressed portion is flat surface When pressing a part deviated from the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the part (the button lens 411) pressed by the player is pressed forward. When the operation button 410 is pressed at a position distant from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and moving the operation button 410 straight backward. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly moved backward without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 can be pressed. It is possible to entertain the effect of the operation sufficiently.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A is configured such that the vibration effect motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and the second effect operation unit 400A is suspended as described above. Since only the upper portion is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, when the vibration 424a rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at a portion farthest from the attached portion. Since this occurs, the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the second effect operation unit 400A. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below a position where the player can relatively easily press the operation button (near the upper portion of the operation button 410), a strong vibration is applied to the player pressing the operation button 410. Can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector mounting member 505 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326 are provided. The buffer unit 510 is disposed between the upper surface of the portion 326i. The cushioning unit 510 includes a cushioning member 511 that can be elastically deformed, and forms a gap between the main body portion 512a with which the cushioning member 511 contacts the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the shock is multi-staged by the elastic deformation (compression) of the buffer member 511 or the bending of the main body 512a of the buffer base 512. It can be absorbed, and it can be prevented that an unreasonable force acts on the attachment part 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment part 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the second effect operation unit 400A is damaged. Can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or struck with a strong force, for example, when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is presented to the player, the operation is performed. Since the button 410, the second production operation unit 400A, and the like are not damaged, the interruption of the game due to the damage can be avoided, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed. An increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed.

  Since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, the button lens 411 is compared with a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are increased, and even if the player is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 is hardly damaged.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are formed of transparent members, the first button decoration unit formed on the back side thereof. The decoration by unevenness such as 411a and the second button decoration 411b can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (see FIG. 63). In addition, since light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in plate thickness in the portion where the uneven decoration is formed, the rear side is difficult to visually recognize through the portion where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to the center side, the plurality of first button decoration portions 411a are provided. It is possible to make the rear of the button lens 411 hard to see behind at the outer peripheral portion of the portion inside the button lens 411 by the decoration of unevenness combining the triangles. Behind the part where the first button decoration part 411a is formed (rear in the direction of the center axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the second effect display device on the door frame side The gap between the outer periphery of the screen unit 470 and the outer periphery of the screen unit 470 is located from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration part 411a located in front of the gap. Can be made difficult to see. Thereby, even if the door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the player who has seen the operation button 410 can In addition to preventing discomfort, the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side can be arranged in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A includes a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, and the like, which are on the rear side (rear side) outside the outer periphery of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, and the like, from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. It is formed so that it cannot be seen. Specifically, in the state of the first position where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the upper and lower outer sides of the main screen 471, the left outer side of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and the right side of the peripheral decorative member 478. The outside portion (the cross hatched portion surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 76) is not seen from the player side.

  On the other hand, in the state of the second position in which the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, a portion outside the annular peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 (a cross hatched portion surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 76). ) Is not visible from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 are hardly seen. It can be hidden, and the appearance of the operation buttons 410, and thus the entire second effect operation unit 400A, can be improved.

  When the main screen 471 is in the first position facing forward, the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, the button frame 412, and the like of the button lens 411 cause the general screen portion of the sub-screen 472 to move. The 472b and the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are hard to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the sub-screen 472, the fact that the main screen 471 is rotatable, and the like. Therefore, when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub-screen 472, the operation By performing a motion that exceeds the player's expectation within the button 410, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in a state where the sub-screen 472 faces the front, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411. The member 474 is difficult to see (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (the sub-screen decoration member 476) is rotatable, so that the impact when the sub-screen 472 (the screen unit 470) is rotated can be increased. It can entertain players.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A is a button lens 411 that allows the user to visually recognize the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side disposed behind the operation button 410, and is located on the center side from the inner periphery of the button frame 412. Within the range of a predetermined width, a first button decoration portion 411a in the form of a polyhedron in which a plurality of triangular surfaces are combined is provided, and the second effect display on the door frame side disposed inside and behind the operation button 410. The device 460A is provided with a peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square pyramids are arranged and a peripheral decorative member 478. Thereby, the decoration (first button decoration part 411a) formed of a triangle disposed on the front side and the decoration (peripheral decoration part 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) formed of a square disposed on the rear side overlap so as to intersect. As a result, a complicated geometric pattern can be shown to the player, and the appearance can be improved to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  Further, as described above, the first button decoration portion 411a mainly composed of a triangle and the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478 mainly composed of a square are separated in the front-rear direction. When the position moves, the degree of overlapping changes, so that the overlapping geometrical pattern changes, so that the player can see the decoration with movement and the decoration with a three-dimensional feeling with depth. Can be shown to entertain the player.

  Further, in the second effect display device 460 </ b> A on the door frame side disposed inside and behind the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by the drive of the switching drive motor 492 to turn the main screen 471 forward or to move the sub screen 472 can be turned forward, and the decoration consisting of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, in a state where the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral edge decorative portion 472a and the peripheral edge decorative member 478 are vertically separated from each other and vertically extended. The decoration made up of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a row forms a geometric pattern decoration that vertically traverses the decoration made up of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Can be shown to players. On the other hand, in a state where the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decoration portion 472a is in a state of extending in a ring shape, and is a decoration composed of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a ring. However, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern decoration that overlaps the decoration made up of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Therefore, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed, so that the change in the decoration attracts the player's interest to the operation button 410 or the decoration of the decoration. The change can suggest the arrival of a chance or the like to the player, and can entertain the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a screen having different switchable screens (main screen 471 and sub screen 472) on the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the display unit includes the unit 470 and the projector 500 for projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470, it is possible to display an effect image completely different from the effect image display by the liquid crystal display device, and to have a strong impact on the player. Can be entertained. More specifically, the screen unit 470 includes a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and a disk-shaped sub-screen 472 having a relief-shaped sub-screen decoration member 476 at the center. It is provided at a rotation angle of 90 degrees around the axis in the circumferential direction.

  Then, in the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side, in a state where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the semi-cylindrical central axis is positioned to extend in the left-right direction, When viewed from the front, it looks like a quadrangular (rectangular) extending vertically (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is emitted forward from the projector 500 disposed behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75 (a)), and the translucent milky white Through the main screen 471, the effect image projected from the front side can be visually recognized. Since the main screen 471 has a smooth semi-cylindrical surface, the effect image has a display screen curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. Thus, while the display screen of a general liquid crystal display device is flat, the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. Can be recognized, and the player can be surprised, and the player can be noticed on the main screen 471, and the effect image projected and displayed on the main screen 471 can be enjoyed. be able to.

  On the other hand, in the state of the second position in which the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the center axis of the disk is substantially coincident with the center axis of the operation button 410, and when viewed from the front, the circular operation button 410 It can be seen that the sub-screen decorative member 476 imitating a skull is located at the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). In this state, when an effect image is emitted forward from projector 500 disposed rearward, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of sub-screen 472. By the way, since a flat and opaque sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 is applied to the portion of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477. Is shielded, and the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected on the central portion of the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 (see FIG. 75 (b)). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion where the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, when the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 emits light, the light can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the sub-screen 472, and the sub-screen provided at the center of the sub-screen 472 is provided. The screen decoration member 476 can be illuminated. Further, by causing the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 to emit light, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 can be made less visible. The entire side can be brightly decorated with light.

  The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side causes the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative board 477 to emit light with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, and displays an effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When illuminated, the effect image is displayed on the portion of the sub-screen 472 where the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is not projected, that is, on the portion outside the sub-screen decorative member 476 made of a skull-like decoration, and the effect image is displayed. Is decorated by the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477. In this state, the outside of the luminous decoration of the fixed sub-screen decoration member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), and a decorative effect completely different from the luminous decoration of the decorative member in the conventional pachinko machine is provided. The sub-screen 472 can be shown to the player, giving a strong impact to the player, and the player can pay attention to the sub-screen 472. Further, in this state, the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (with higher brightness) than the brightness of the effected image inside the effected image. Can be displayed, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and to display an effect image that makes the player more enjoyable.

  In the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side, the screen facing forward is rotated in an appropriate direction while the effect image is radiated forward from the projector 500, and is changed from the main screen 471 to the sub screen 472. When the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 are rotating, a part of the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 located in the projection range of the projector 500 when the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 are rotating. Then, the effect image is projected and displayed. That is, the effect image is displayed so as to straddle the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472. Therefore, when the main screen 471 is slowly changed to the sub-screen 472, a mysterious visual effect in which the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a and the sub-screen decoration member 476 are rotationally moved on the effect image projected from the projector 500. It can be shown to the player and entertained the player.

  As described above, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the decoration (the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Accordingly, the player can see the decoration with a movement and a three-dimensional effect, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power can be provided.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A can irradiate light such as an effect image to the front of the sub-screen decorative board 477 on which the LED 477a is mounted on the front and the front in the rear of the operation button 410 (inside of the button frame 412). A second effect display device 460A on the door frame side having the projector 500 is provided, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated by the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side.

  Also, the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 of the decoration substrate unit 420, behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a of the operation button 410 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are arranged, and by illuminating the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is provided behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside. The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated by emitting light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422 b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the second LED 423 b of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416 d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated. .

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415. By causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482 to emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be satisfactorily emitted and decorated.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens having different forms by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged inside and behind the operation button 410. The effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub-screen 472, and an effect that the shape of the display screen changes (switches), which is impossible with the conventional pachinko machine, can be presented to the player. , Can give the player a strong impact and entertain.

[3-4h. Overall Configuration of Effect Operation Unit in Third Embodiment]
Next, a third effect operation unit 400B which is a third embodiment of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78 to 85 and the like. FIG. 78A is a front view of a third effect operation unit different from the effect operation unit and the second effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 77 in the embodiment, and FIG. 78B is a right side view of the third effect operation unit. FIG. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the third effect operation unit. FIG. 80A is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 80B is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 79 (a). FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the third production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the third production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. FIG.

  The third effect operation unit 400B can be attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit 320 instead of the effect operation unit 400 or the second effect operation unit 400A. The third effect operation unit 400B can be pressed by a player similarly to the effect operation unit 400. Hereinafter, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the same components as those in the effect operation unit 400 will be denoted by the same reference numerals and described.

  The third effect operation unit 400B is an operation button 410 which has a circular outer shape and is formed transparently on the center side excluding an outer peripheral edge, and which can be pressed by a player, and an effect of a plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame unit 415 having a frame shape attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a; a decoration substrate unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of decorating the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 with light emission; A third base unit 520 mounted on the rear side of the frame unit 415 and having the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 mounted on the front surface; and a third base unit 520 visibly viewed from the player side through the operation button 410. A decorative rotator unit 530 attached to the That.

[3-4h-1. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B is formed in a circular shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side swells forward, and an outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 is mounted on the front side, and a cylindrical button base 413 is mounted on the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411.

  The operation buttons 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B have the same configuration as the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400, are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

[3-4h-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 from the front side so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed in a shape conforming to the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a circular central opening 416a, a plurality of outer peripheral openings 416b arranged in a row along the periphery of the central opening 416a, and a notch cut out at a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. A frame-shaped frame body 416 having a portion 416c and attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320, and is attached to the frame body 416 from the rear side so as to close the outer peripheral opening 416b. A pair of light-transmitting frame side lenses 417 and a light-transmitting frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 from the front side to close the cutout 416c are provided.

  The frame unit 415 of the third effect operation unit 400B has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, is given the same reference numeral, and a detailed description is omitted.

[3-4h-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the third base unit 520 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. In addition, vibration can be applied to the third effect operation unit 400B.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 which are respectively attached to the left and right front surfaces of the substrate base 421. , A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower portion of the front surface of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 include a first LED 422 a and a first LED 423 a capable of emitting and decorating only the second button decoration portion 411 b of the operation button 410, and a frame side of the frame unit 415. A second LED 422b and a second LED 423b are provided to allow only the lens 417 to emit light.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 of the third effect operation unit 400B has the same configuration as the decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, and is denoted by the same reference numeral, and detailed description is omitted.

[3-4h-4. Third base unit]
The third base unit 520 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the third base unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The third base unit 520 of the third effect operation unit 400B has the operation button 410 attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, the decorative rotator unit 530 is attached, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. .

  The third base unit 520 includes a housing wall portion 521a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and having a hemispherically concave rear portion at the center portion, and a blind hole opened forward outside the housing wall portion 521a. An annular unit base 521 having two holding holes 521b, a frame top lens decorative board 522 attached to the upper front part of the unit base 521, and four unit holes 521b inserted into the four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521 An operation button spring 523, three sensor holders 524 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 521, three pressure detection sensors 525 mounted on each of the sensor holders 524, respectively, for detecting a pressing operation of the operation button 410; In the third production operation unit attached to the rear side of the base 521 A substrate 526, and a third staging operation unit relay board cover 527 attached to the rear side of the unit base 521 so as to cover the rear side of the relay board 526, a.

  Further, the third base unit 520 includes a production operation unit first drive motor 528 attached to the left side surface of the unit base 521, and a spur gear-shaped attachment attached to the rotation shaft of the production operation unit first drive motor 528. It includes a first drive gear (not shown) and a first transmission gear 529 in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the first drive gear and is rotatably attached to the unit base 521. The first transmission gear 529 meshes with a rotating gear 531a of the decorative rotating unit 530 described later.

  The unit base 521 has a substantially circular outer shape and is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 521 includes, in addition to the housing wall portion 521a and the holding hole 521b, a light-shielding wall portion 521c that protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from the lower side of a portion where the frame top lens decorative board 437 is mounted on the upper front surface. A plurality of ventilation openings 521d penetrating the wall portion 521a, a left protruding portion 521e protruding forward from substantially the center on the left outside and the up-down direction of the housing wall portion 521a, and a housing protruding from the left protruding portion 521e. A right protruding portion 521f protruding forward from a right outer side of the wall portion 521a and substantially from the center in the vertical direction, a left shaft portion 521g extending rightward from the left protruding portion 521e in a cylindrical shape, and an extension of the left shaft portion 521g. And a right bearing 521h coaxial with the axis (first axis CL1) and penetrating through the right protruding portion 521f.

  The housing wall portion 521a that is recessed in a hemispherical shape rearward of the unit base 521 is formed so that the recessed front side can be housed in a state where substantially half of the rear side of the decorative rotator unit 530 does not contact.

  The four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521 are formed at four upper, lower, left, and right corners outside the housing wall 521a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The holding hole 521b has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss 413c, and the guide boss 413c can be slidably inserted.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 521b of the four holding holes 521b extends from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 521 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 521. At about 30 degrees counterclockwise. The upper right holding hole 521b of the four holding holes 521b is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 521 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 521 (the center of the operation button 410). Is formed at a position rotated by about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, two holding holes 521b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 521b are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 521 with respect to the upper two holding holes 521b. .

  The light-shielding wall portion 521c of the unit base 521 can prevent the light from the frame top lens decoration substrate 522 from leaking downward, so that the frame top lens 418 can be illuminated only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 522. It is for doing.

  The left shaft portion 521g of the unit base 521 has a horizontally extending left end fixed to the left protruding portion 521e, and the right side thereof is rotatably inserted into the rotating body side left bearing portion 531b of the decorative rotating body unit 530. Things. Further, the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521 has the cylindrical rotating body side right shaft portion 531c of the decorative rotating body unit 530 rotatably inserted therein. The left shaft portion 521g and the right bearing portion 521h are arranged coaxially with the first axis CL1 (see FIG. 83) extending in the horizontal direction. By the left shaft portion 521g and the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521, the decorative rotator unit 530 can be rotatably mounted around the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontal direction.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 522, and by emitting these LEDs, the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be illuminated. The frame top lens decorative substrate 522 has a white front surface, and the mounted LEDs are full color LEDs.

  The operation button spring 523 is a coil spring, and is inserted into the four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521 from the front. When assembled to the third effect operation unit 400B, the operation button spring 523 has a rear end in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 521b and a front end protruding rearward from the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. It is in contact with the rear end of the guide boss 413c. These operation button springs 523 urge the operation buttons 410 forward.

  The three press detection sensors 525 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. More specifically, on the front surface of the unit base 521, three pressing detection sensors 525 are provided, one at the lower left of the upper left holding hole 521b, the other at the lower right of the upper right holding hole 521b, and the other at the lower left. Are attached via the sensor holder 524 to the lower right side of the holding holes 521b. The three pressure detection sensors 525 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 521. These three pressure detection sensors 525 can detect three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

  The third effect operation unit relay board 526 is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 521, on the left outside (right side in front view) of the housing wall 521a in rear view. The third effect operation unit relay board 526 includes an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422, an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423, a vibration motor 424, a frame top lens decoration substrate 522, a press detection sensor 525, an effect operation unit first drive motor 528. The effect operation unit second drive motor 534 of the decorative rotator unit 530, the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535, the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536, and the door main body relay substrate (not shown) of the door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection.

  The relay board cover 527 extends leftward in a front view from a lower end of a portion that covers the rear side of the third effect operation unit relay board 526, and includes a leg 527a attached to a lower rear part of the unit base 521. When assembled to the door frame 3, the leg 527 a of the relay board cover 527 has a lower surface extending substantially horizontally, and a leg 527 a between the leg 527 a and the bottom plate 326 i forming the bottom of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. To form a slight gap (see FIG. 26). Accordingly, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit down, the frame unit 415 is not moved until the lower surface of the leg 527a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the plate unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the attachment part 416e and the effect operation unit attachment part 326a of the plate unit cover 326 downward. Then, after the lower surface of the leg portion 527a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, movement of the lower portion of the third effect operation unit 400B is restricted, and the effect operation unit of the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326. By preventing an excessive force from acting on the mounting portion 326a and the like, it is possible to prevent their breakage.

  The production operation unit first drive motor 528 is attached to the left side surface of the unit base 521, and is connected to the left shaft portion 521g of the unit base 521 via a first drive gear (not shown) and a first transmission gear 529. The decorative rotator unit 530 rotatably mounted by the right bearing 521h can be rotated around the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontal direction.

[3-4h-5. Decorative rotator unit]
The decorative rotator unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85 and 87. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the back. The decorative rotator unit 530 is attached to the third base unit 520, and allows the player to show a movable effect through a transparent portion of the operation button 410. As shown, the decorative rotator unit 530 has a substantially spherical outer surface as a whole.

  The decorative rotator unit 530 is rotatably attached to the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520, and has one of a disk-shaped rotator base unit 531 and a disk-shaped rotator base unit 531. A first decorative surface portion 532 rotatably mounted outside the surface, and a first decorative surface portion rotatably mounted outside a surface of the rotator base unit 531 opposite to the first decorative surface portion 532. A second operation surface unit 533 having a different decoration from 532 and a rendering operation unit second drive motor 534 (which is mounted in the rotating body base unit 531 and rotates the first operation surface unit 532 and the second operation surface unit 533) ( 83 (see FIG. 83).

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the decorative rotator unit 530 is attached to one surface of the rotator base unit 531 and includes a plurality of LEDs that can emit light toward the first decorative surface portion 532. The mounted first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 is mounted on the surface of the rotating body base unit 531 opposite to the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535, and can emit light toward the second decorative surface portion 533. A second decorative surface portion decorative board 536 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The rotator base unit 531 has a disk shape having a predetermined thickness, and has a hollow interior. The rotator base unit 531 is attached to a predetermined position on the outer peripheral surface and penetrates a spur gear-shaped rotator gear 531 a meshing with the first transmission gear 529 of the third base unit 520 and a center of the rotator gear 531 a. The rotating body side left bearing 531b into which the left shaft portion 521g is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable, and a cylindrical protruding from the outer peripheral surface opposite to the rotating body gear 531a so as to be relatively rotatable in the right bearing 521h. The rotating body side right shaft portion 531c to be inserted, and a stopper 531d protruding outward at the base end side of the rotating body side right shaft portion 531c are provided.

  The rotator gear 531a, the rotator-side left bearing 531b, and the rotator-side right shaft 531c are orthogonal to the second axis CL2 passing through the disc-shaped center of the rotator base unit 531 and pass through the axial center of the outer peripheral surface. It is arranged coaxially with respect to one axis CL1. The stopper 531d is formed so as to contact the front surface of the unit base 521 in the third base unit 520. The stopper 531d regulates the rotation range of the decorative rotator unit 530 relative to the third base unit 520 about the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontal direction to a predetermined angle range (here, 180 degrees).

  In addition, the rotating body base unit 531 includes a cylindrical bearing portion 531e extending concentrically with the second axis CL2 passing through the center of the disk and a plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f decorating the outer peripheral surface. , Is provided. The shaft member 532d protruding from the first decorative surface portion 532 is inserted into the bearing cylinder portion 531e, and the shaft member 532d can be rotatably mounted by bushes mounted on both ends. The peripheral surface decoration portion 531f penetrates the outer peripheral surface of the rotator base unit 531 and can release the heat in the rotator base unit 531 to the outside, and also decorates the outer peripheral surface of the rotator base unit 531. Can improve the appearance.

  Although not shown, the peripheral surface on which the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative rotator unit 530 in the rotator base unit 531 and capable of irradiating light toward the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f is mounted. A decorative part decorative board may be provided. By appropriately illuminating the LED of the peripheral decorative portion decorative board, the peripheral decorative portion 531f of the rotating body base unit 531 can be illuminated.

  The whole of the first decorative surface portion 532 is formed in a substantially hemispherical shape. The first decorative surface portion 532 includes a logo decorative portion 532a made of predetermined characters provided at the center of the bulging surface, and a light-transmitting second radially formed around the logo decorative portion 532a. An opaque first sub-decoration formed so as to fill the outer periphery of the one main decoration portion 532b and the first main decoration portion 532b, and the outer peripheral edge of which forms the circular outer peripheral end of the first decorative surface portion 532. A portion 532c and a shaft member 532d protruding in a columnar shape from the back surface along the center are provided.

  The logo decoration portion 532a and the first main decoration portion 532b are illuminated and decorated by light from the LEDs mounted on the first decoration surface decoration substrate 535. The shaft member 532d is rotatably inserted into the bearing cylinder 531e via a bush. The shaft member 532d is formed to have a length extending through the bearing cylinder portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531 and extending to the opposite side in a state where the shaft member 532d is assembled to the decorative rotating body unit 530. The state coincides with the second axis line CL2 orthogonal to CL1.

  The whole of the first decorative surface portion 532 can rotate around the second axis CL2 by attaching the shaft member 532d to the bearing cylinder portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531.

  The second decorative surface portion 533 is disposed between the rotary decorative portion 533a attached to the tip of the shaft member 532d of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the rotary decorative portion 533a and the rotary body base unit 531. And a fixed decorative portion 533b attached to the 531. Since the rotating decorative portion 533a is attached to the shaft member 532d, it can rotate together with the first decorative surface portion 532 via the shaft member 532d, and can rotate around the second axis CL2. On the other hand, since the fixed decorative portion 533b is attached to the rotating body base unit 531, it does not rotate together with the first decorative surface portion 532 via the shaft member 532d, and does not rotate around the second axis.

  The rotary decorative portion 533a is formed in a decorative shape having a plurality of fins (blades) in the circumferential direction, and has a plurality of decorations extending concentrically in the circumferential direction. The rotating decorative portion 533a can generate wind by rotating. In the fixed decorative portion 533b, a decoration having a plurality of radially extending lines is formed. The rotating decorative portion 533a and the fixed decorative portion 533b partially have translucency, and are illuminated and decorated with light from the LED mounted on the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is mounted in the rotating body base unit 531 so that the rotating shaft projects rearward. A spur gear-shaped second drive gear 534a is attached to the rotation shaft of the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. The second drive gear 534a meshes with a spur gear-shaped decorative surface gear 534b fixed in the middle of the shaft member 532d. Therefore, the first operation surface unit 532 and the second operation surface unit 533 (rotation operation unit 533a) are connected by the effect operation unit second operation motor 534 via the operation surface unit gear 534a, the operation surface unit gear 534b, and the shaft member 532d. Can be rotated together.

  The first decorative surface decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface decorative substrate 536 have a white front surface, and the mounted LEDs are full-color LEDs.

  In the decorative rotator unit 530 of the present embodiment, a first decorative surface portion 532 and a second decorative surface portion 533 having different decorations are arranged side by side in the circumferential direction around the second axis CL2. Specifically, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are provided at 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction.

[3-4h-6. Operation and Effect of Third Production Operation Unit]
Next, the operation and effect of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78, 81, and 88. FIG. 88 (a) is a front view of the third effect operation unit showing the second decoration surface portion of the decoration rotator unit facing forward, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 89 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing rotation of the first decorative surface in the third effect operating unit with the first decorative surface facing forward, and FIG. 89 (b) is the second decorative surface in the third effect operating unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows rotation of a 2nd decoration surface part in the state which turned forward.

  The third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player in accordance with a game state that is changed by a game ball being driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player Is operated by operating the operation button 410 to allow the player to participate in the player participation type effect presented to the player and entertain them.

  Although not shown, the third effect operation unit 400B has an overall height substantially equal to the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. ing. Further, the third effect operation unit 400B is formed so that the entire width is slightly larger than 全 of the entire width of the door frame 3. The third effect operation unit 400B is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in a front view.

  In the third effect operation unit 400B, the upper portion of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the state where the third effect operation unit 400B is attached to the plate unit 320, the lower surface of the leg 527a of the relay board cover 527 serving as the bottom surface is between the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. , A gap is formed. That is, the third effect operation unit 400B is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  In the third effect operation unit 400B, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed so that it becomes. Accordingly, the third effect operation unit 400B changes the center axis CL (see FIG. 82) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) into a vertical line. It is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees so as to move upward as it goes forward. Thus, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (third effect operation unit 400B). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his or her line of sight from the game area 5a to the third effect operation unit 400B (operation button 410), the operation button 410 can reach its front view (projection viewed from a direction parallel to the center axis CL). , And the operation button 410 and the decorative rotator unit 530 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the third effect operation unit 400B, the four guide bosses 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 521b of the third base unit 520, respectively, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 523. Have been. In a normal state (a state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the third effect operation unit 400B is operated by the urging force of the operation button spring 523 similarly to the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A. The front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of 410 is in contact with a portion near the center opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415.

  In the third effect operation unit 400B, in the normal state, the center side (the center axis CL side) of the operation button 410 near the inner periphery of the button frame 412 moves forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. It is protruding. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) of the operation button 410, a portion protruding forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412. , Protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 82 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) of the button lens 411 with respect to the direction of the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the center axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 523. When the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520, the backward movement is restricted, and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface).

  Since the operation button 410 has an extremely large outer diameter as compared with the effect operation button provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. Likely to be. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are mounted so that the central axis thereof extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons of the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment are operated. The button 410 is mounted with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, similarly to the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A, so that the player can operate the operation button from above similarly to the conventional pachinko machine. When the user presses the button 410, a part of the operation button 410 away from the center axis CL is pressed as shown by a white arrow in FIG.

  By the way, the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the pressed portion is flat surface When pressing a part deviated from the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the part (the button lens 411) pressed by the player is pressed forward. When the operation button 410 is pressed at a position distant from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and moving the operation button 410 straight backward. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly moved backward without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 can be pressed. It is possible to entertain the effect of the operation sufficiently.

  The third effect operation unit 400B is configured such that the vibration effect motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and the third effect operation unit 400B is suspended as described above. Since only the upper portion is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, when the vibration 424 rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at a portion farthest from the attached portion. As a result, the entire third effect operation unit 400B can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the third effect operation unit 400B. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed directly below the position where the player can easily press the operation button, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player pressing the operation button 410, It can surprise the audience and entertain the production.

  Further, the third effect operation unit 400B is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg 527a of the relay board cover 527 forming the lower surface and the plate unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i, when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit, the lower surface of the leg 527a is brought into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i. The shock can be absorbed by the downward bending of the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 527a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the third effect operation unit 400B is restricted, and the effect operation of the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326 is performed. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the unit attachment portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent damage to the third effect operation unit 400B and the like. Accordingly, even when the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B is presented to the player with an effect of pressing the operation button 410, the operation button 410 or the Since the three-stage operation unit 400B and the like are not damaged, the interruption of the game due to the damage can be avoided, the decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed, and the damage to the game hall side can be suppressed. An increase in burden can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, the button lens 411 is formed in a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411 even when strongly hit, so that the button lens 411 is hardly damaged.

  Further, since the third effect operation unit 400B includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to the center side, the first button decoration portion 411a is provided. The decoration of the unevenness makes it hard to see the rear part at the outer peripheral part of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rearward in the direction of the center axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the outer peripheral surface of the decorative rotator unit 530 However, the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap makes it difficult to see the gap on the outer periphery of the decoration rotator unit 530 from the front side (player side). . Thus, even if the rotating decorative rotator unit 530 is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the player who sees the operation button 410 feels uncomfortable. Can be prevented, and the decorative rotator unit 530 can be disposed within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, so that the operation button 410, the decorative rotator unit 530, and the overall appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Can be better.

  Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the first decoration surface decoration substrate 535 and the second decoration surface decoration substrate 536 are provided in the decoration rotating body unit 530 arranged in the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412). The first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be illuminated and decorated in the operation button 410 by causing the plurality of LEDs mounted thereon to emit light. Then, the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533 are illuminated and decorated, so that the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated. At this time, since the button base 413 of the operation button 410 includes the cylindrical main body 413a surrounding the outer periphery of the decorative rotator unit 530, the light from the decorative rotator unit 530 is transmitted to the outside of the main body 413a. There is no leakage, and only the inside of the operation button 410 can be luminously decorated.

  In addition, the third effect operation unit 400B is located behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decoration substrate in the decoration substrate unit 420. The first LED 422a of the operation button 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are arranged, and by illuminating the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated. Can be done. The first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a cylinder of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415. 52 and 83, etc. (see FIGS. 52 and 83, etc.), and light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a passes through the inside of the main body 413a (on the side of the decorative rotator unit 530) and the inner tube. There is no leakage to the outside of the part 416d, and only the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 can be luminously decorated.

  Further, the third effect operation unit 400B is provided behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside. The second LED 423b of the decorative board 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated by emitting light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422 b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the second LED 423 b of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416 d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated. .

  In the third effect operation unit 400B, the frame top lens decorative board 522 of the third base unit 520 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and is mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative board 522. By making the plurality of LEDs emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be made to emit light. From the lower side of the third base unit 520 where the frame top lens decorative board 522 of the unit base 521 is attached, a flat light shielding wall portion 521c protrudes forward to near the lower rear end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED of the frame top lens decoration board 522 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  The third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment can visually recognize the decorative rotator unit 530 disposed on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 from the front. In the normal state, the third effect operation unit 400B has a state in which the first decorative surface portion 532 of the decorative rotator unit 530 faces forward as shown in FIGS. In this state, the center axis of the shaft member 532d (second axis CL2) of the first decorative surface portion 532 substantially matches the center axis CL of the operation button 410 (see FIG. 82). In a normal state, the rotational position of the first decorative surface portion 532 around the second axis CL2 is rotationally stationary in a state where the logo decorative portion 532a having directionality is oriented in a correct direction.

  In a normal state, the stopper 531d of the rotator base unit 531 in the decorative rotator unit 530 is in contact with the front surface above the right bearing 521h of the unit base 521 in the third base unit 520. That is, in the normal state, the rotation of the decorative rotator unit 530 in the direction in which the upper portion moves rearward with respect to the first axis CL1 extending horizontally is restricted by the stopper 531d.

  In this normal state, the rotator gear 531a of the decorative rotator unit 530 is driven by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 in the third base unit 520 via the first drive gear (not shown) and the first transmission gear 529. Is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the right side, the decorative rotator unit 530 rotates about the first axis CL1 such that the upper part moves forward. When the decorative rotator unit 530 rotates 180 degrees around the first axis CL1 from the normal state, the stopper 531d contacts the front surface of the unit base 521 lower than the right bearing 521h, and further rotation is performed. Is regulated, and the rotational drive by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 is stopped.

  Although not shown, the third base unit 520 includes a rotation detection sensor that detects the rotational position of the decoration rotator unit 530, and the rotation of the decoration rotator unit 530 is performed based on the detection by the rotation detection sensor. The rotational position is controlled.

  When the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated by 180 degrees around the first axis CL1 from the normal state, the second decorative surface portion 533 faces forward as shown in FIG. Therefore, the second decorative surface portion 533 can be viewed well through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. In this state, the second axis CL2 of the second decorative surface portion 533 substantially matches the center axis CL of the operation button 410.

  The third effect operation unit 400B extends coaxially with the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 in the decorative rotator unit 530 via the second drive gear 534a and the decorative surface portion gear 534b. When the shaft member 532d is rotated, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 attached to both ends of the shaft member 532d can be simultaneously rotated (see FIG. 89). In other words, the first operation surface unit 532 and the second operation surface unit 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 perpendicular to the first axis CL1 extending horizontally by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. Can be.

  Although not shown, the decorative rotator unit 530 includes a rotation detection sensor that detects the rotation position of the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533, and the rotation detection sensor detects the rotation position. The decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be stopped at an arbitrary rotation position. Therefore, even if the first decorative surface portion 532 is provided with the logo decorative portion 532a having directivity, since the rotation can be stopped at a position corresponding to the direction, the decoration of the first decorative surface portion 532 is impaired. The decorativeness can be surely exhibited without being performed.

  In addition, the third effect operation unit 400 </ b> B converts the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 provided in the decorative rotator unit 530. Each can be illuminated. The light-emitting decoration of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 rotates around the first axis CL1 in which the decorative rotator unit 530 extends horizontally. This can be performed even when the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotating around the second axis CL2 orthogonal to the first axis CL1.

  The second decorative surface portion 533 includes the rotating decorative portion 533a that rotates and the fixed decorative portion 533b that does not rotate. When a plurality of LEDs are turned on, a part of the light emitted forward through the fixed decoration part 533b is periodically emitted by the opaque part or the colored part of the rotating rotation decoration part 533a. This makes it possible to show the player a flickering light-emitting decoration, which can strongly attract the interest of the player.

[3-4h-7. Movable production in the third production operation unit]
Next, the movable effect in the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the movable effect of rotating the decorative rotator unit in the third effect operation unit. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing a movement of a movable effect of rotating the decorative rotator unit in a state where the first decorative surface portion and the second decorative surface portion are rotated in the third effect operation unit. First, with reference to FIG. 90 and the like, a description will be given of a movable effect of the decorative rotator unit 530 using only the effect operation unit first drive motor 528. In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 90 (a) and the like, the first decorative surface portion 532 having the logo decorative portion 532a faces forward.

  As an example of a movable effect that rotates only around the first axis CL1 extending horizontally, from a normal state (the state of FIG. 90A), a first drive gear (shown in FIG. Omitted) The decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the right side through the first transmission gear 529 and the rotator gear 531a without stopping halfway, and the first decoration is performed. The second decorative surface portion 533 disposed on the opposite side of the surface portion 532 faces forward (see FIG. 90 (d)). This allows the player to see a movable effect in which the first decorative surface portion 532 rotates so as to move downward, while the second decorative surface portion 533 moves and appears from above. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the first decorative surface portion 532 is suddenly switched to the second decorative surface portion 533 having a different decoration, which can surprise the player and change the decoration. It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, as a movable effect different from the above, the effect operation unit such that the decorative rotator unit 530 reciprocates in a counterclockwise direction in an angle range of 0 to 60 degrees in a right side view from a normal state. The first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and backward multiple times. Thereby, when the first decorative surface portion 532 rotates so as to face downward, a part of the second decorative surface portion 533 is slightly visible above the first decorative surface portion 532 with the plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f therebetween. (See FIG. 90 (b)), the player can be strongly attracted to the second decorative surface portion 533 which is hidden by the reciprocating rotation of the decorative rotator unit 530. Whether or not the second decorative surface portion 533 faces forward can increase the player's expectation of the arrival of a chance. Thereafter, by returning the decoration rotating body unit 530 to the original state (the state of FIG. 90A), it is possible to indicate to the player that a chance does not come. On the other hand, by further rotating the decorative rotator unit 530 so that the second decorative surface portion 533 faces forward (the state shown in FIG. 90 (d)), it is possible to suggest that a chance has arrived, and It is possible to entertain the people and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, as a movable effect different from the above, the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated 90 degrees in a counterclockwise direction in a right side view from a normal state, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotator base unit 531 is directed forward. (See FIG. 90 (c)). Thus, the first decorative surface portion 532 faces downward with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 facing forward, and the second decorative surface portion 533 faces upward with the upper surface facing downward. In this state, since the decorations of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 become unclear, a plurality of peripheral portions provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotator base unit 531 are relatively positioned. The decoration of the surface decoration portion 531f can be clearly seen, and the decoration of the peripheral decoration portion 531f can be enjoyed. In addition, by stopping the rotation of the decorative rotator unit 530 at the intermediate position where the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f is directed forward, it is possible to make the player foresee a change in the game situation, and the game of the player Expectations can be raised. Then, by rotating the decorative rotator unit 530 in a predetermined direction, the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward as a base, or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward. The same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, in a state where the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in a right side view from a normal state (see FIG. 90 (c)), a predetermined angle around the rotation angle is obtained. The effect operation unit first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and backward a plurality of times so as to reciprocate within the range. Thus, the first decorative surface portion 532 side and the second decorative surface portion 533 side are more visible across the rotating body base unit 531 (the plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f). Whether the first decorative surface portion 532 faces the front or the second decorative surface portion 533 faces the front can be excited and excited, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest. After that, the decoration rotator unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction so that the first decoration surface portion 532 is directed forward or the second decoration surface portion 533 is directed forward. The effect of the invention can be obtained.

  Also, as a movable effect different from the above, the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated by 180 degrees from the normal state, and the second decorative surface portion 533 is turned to the front (see FIG. 90 (d)). Based on the state, it is also possible to perform a movable effect that performs an operation opposite to the above, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained. In this case, the second decorative surface portion 533 facing forward rotates so as to move upward, and the first decorative surface portion 532 appears from below, so that the player feels a rising momentum. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game, and to turn the player's line of sight into the game area 5a above the third effect operation unit 400B by rotating the second decoration surface portion 533 upward. It is possible to entertain a game or an effect in the game area 5a, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  When performing the above-described movable effect, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 are appropriately lit to emit light, and the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion The decorative surface portion 533 is appropriately illuminated. This makes it easier to see the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 seen through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, so that the player can clearly recognize the difference between those decorations. In addition, it is possible to sufficiently exhibit the premium feeling due to the difference in the decoration, to enjoy the decoration, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Further, since the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533 are illuminated and decorated, the interest of the player can be directed to the operation button 410, so that the player participation type effect of pressing the operation button 410 is performed. At times, the player can be urged to press the operation button 410, and the player can participate in the player-participation-type effect to entertain.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 91 and the like, a description will be given of a movable effect of the decorative rotator unit 530 using the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 and the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. In the initial state, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), the first decorative surface portion 532 having the logo decorative portion 532a is directed forward, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is connected to the effect operation unit second drive motor. By means of 534, the operation button 410 is rotated around the second axis CL2 (here, clockwise) extending so as to coincide with the center axis CL of the operation button 410. In this state, since the first decorative surface portion 532 rotates around the second axis CL2, it is difficult for the player to recognize the logo of the logo decorative portion 532a having directivity.

  As an example of a movable effect performed in a state where the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534, the first decorative surface portion 532 (second decorative surface portion 533) is moved along the second axis. While rotating around the CL2, the effect rotating unit first drive motor 528 rotates the decorative rotator unit 530 in a counterclockwise direction in a right side view at a stretch without stopping halfway, 180 degrees. The second decorative surface portion 533 rotating on the opposite side of the one decorative surface portion 532 is set in a state facing forward (see FIG. 91 (d)). Thus, the first decorative surface portion 532 that has been rotating clockwise is suddenly switched to the second decorative surface portion 533 having a different decoration, and the second decorative surface portion 533 (the rotary decorative portion 533a) is connected to the first decorative surface portion 532. Is rotated counterclockwise in the opposite direction, which can have a strong impact on the player, strongly attract the player's interest, and It can be made to think that there is a good thing, and the sense of expectation for the game can be raised, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, as a movable effect different from the above, the decorative rotator unit 530 in a state where the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. However, the direction operation unit first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and backward a plurality of times so as to reciprocate in the counterclockwise direction within the angle range of 0 to 60 degrees when viewed from the right side. Thus, when the first decorative surface 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 rotates around the first axis CL1 so as to face downward, the first decorative surface 532 rotates around the second axis CL2 above the first decorative surface 532. A plurality of peripheral decorative portions 531f that are not visible are visible, and a part of the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around the second axis CL2 is slightly visible above the multiple peripheral decorative portions 531f. (See FIG. 91 (b)). Therefore, the decoration rotator unit 530 reciprocates around the first axis line CL1 to strongly attract the player's interest to the second decoration surface portion 533 which is invisible and invisible, and the second decoration surface portion Whether or not the player 533 faces forward can increase the player's expectation of the chance. Thereafter, the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction around the first axis CL1, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward (the state of FIG. 91 (a)), or the second decorative member. When the surface portion 533 is directed forward (the state of FIG. 91 (b)) and the player reaches a desired state, the arrival of a chance can be convinced, the player can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest is suppressed. Can be done. After turning the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 forward, the rotation may be stopped so that the logo decorative portion 532a of the first decorative surface portion 532 is oriented correctly. This allows the player to clearly recognize the logo decoration portion 532a of the first decoration surface portion 532, thereby suggesting the arrival of a chance, and increasing the player's expectation of the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, as a movable effect different from the above, from the state where the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534, the decoration rotating body unit 530 Is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in the right side view around the first axis CL1 so that the outer peripheral surface of the rotator base unit 531 faces forward (see FIG. 91 (c)). . Thus, the first decorative surface portion 532 faces downward with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 facing forward, and the second decorative surface portion 533 faces upward with the upper surface facing downward. The first decorative surface 532 and the second decorative surface 533 are in an unclear state since they are located and moved so as to move in the same direction. Therefore, the plurality of peripheral decorative portions 531f on the outer peripheral surface of the stationary rotating body base unit 531 sandwiched therebetween can be clearly seen. Therefore, in the operation button 410, the stationary peripheral decoration portion 531f can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the peripheral decoration portion 531f, and the decoration can be enjoyed. Then, by rotating the decorative rotator unit 530 in a predetermined direction, the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward as a base, or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward. The same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Furthermore, while the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are being rotated around the second axis CL2, the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated around the first axis CL1, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotator base unit 531 is moved forward. In this state (see FIG. 91 (c)), the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 is turned over a plurality of times so as to reciprocate within a predetermined angle range around the first axis CL around this state. To rotate forward and reverse. Thereby, with the rotating body base unit 531 (the plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f) interposed therebetween, the first decorative surface portion 532 side or the second decorative surface portion 533 side each rotating around the second axis CL2 can be seen. , The player can be excitedly excited by whether the first decorative surface portion 532 faces forward or the second decorative surface portion 533 faces forward, so that the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Can be done. Thereafter, the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction around the first axis CL1, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward (the state of FIG. 91 (a)), or the second decorative member. By setting the surface portion 533 to the front (the state of FIG. 91B), the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, as a movable effect different from the above, after rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2 from the normal state, the decorative rotator unit 530 is moved around the first axis CL. By rotating the decorative rotator unit 530 by 180 degrees around the first axis CL from the state in which the rotating second decorative surface portion 533 is turned forward or from the normal state, the second decorative surface portion 533 is rotated by 180 degrees. After the surface portion 533 is directed forward, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2, and based on this state (see FIG. 91 (d)), Can perform a movable effect that performs the reverse operation, and can provide the same operation and effect as described above. In this case, the rotating second decorative surface 533 facing forward rotates around the first axis CL1 so as to move upward, and is opposite to the second decorative surface 533 with respect to around the second axis CL2. Since the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating in the direction appears from below, it is possible to make the player feel a rising momentum, to increase the expectation for the game, and to increase the second axis. The upward movement of the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around CL2 can direct the player's line of sight to the game area 5a above the third effect operation unit 400B, and within the game area 5a. It is possible to entertain a game or an effect in the game, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  When performing the above-described movable effect, the rotation of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is reversed in the middle. Alternatively, it may be made to reciprocate within a predetermined angle range. In addition, the rotation speed of the decoration rotating body unit 530 around the first axis CL1 by the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 and the second rotation of the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533 by the rendering operation unit second drive motor 534. The rotation speed may be the same as or different from the rotation speed around the axis CL2. By appropriately combining these, it is possible to increase the number of patterns of the movable production by the third production operation unit 400B, and it is possible to make the player hard to get tired of by abundant variations of the movable production and to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, when the above-described movable effect is performed, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 are appropriately lit to rotate around the second axis CL2. The first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are appropriately illuminated. Accordingly, in a state where the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed forward, the entire transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be illuminated with uniform light. On the other hand, in a state in which the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed forward, the transparent button lens 411 blinks in a blinking manner due to periodic blocking of light by the rotating decorative portion 533a. It can be illuminated with light. As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be variously illuminated and decorated, the interest of the player can be directed to the operation button 410, and the player participation type effect of pressing the operation button 410 can be performed. Is executed, it is possible to prompt the player to perform the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the player can participate in the player-participation type effect and entertain.

[3-4h-8. Exhaust heat action of the third production operation unit]
Next, the heat removal action of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92 and the like. FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of air due to the rotation of the second decorative surface in the third effect operation unit. In the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment, the decorative rotator unit 530 disposed on the rear side of the operation button 410 includes the operation button 410 and the unit base 521 (the housing wall 521a) of the third base unit 520. , The front and rear are arranged in the closed button interior space AS (see FIG. 92). A plurality of ventilation openings 521d penetrating back and forth are formed in a housing wall portion 521a that forms the rear portion of the button interior space AS and covers the rear side of the decorative rotator unit 530. Therefore, the in-button space AS communicates with the inside of the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which the third effect operation unit 400B is mounted through a plurality of ventilation openings 521d. Although not shown, the mounting space 326j communicates with the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through an exhaust port formed in the bottom plate portion 326i and the lower plate cover 340.

  In the third effect operation unit 400B, in the decorative rotator unit 530, one shaft member 532d rotatably mounted coaxially with the second axis CL on the bearing cylinder 531e of the rotator base unit 531. A first decorative surface portion 532 and a second decorative surface portion 533 having different decorations are attached to both ends, respectively, so that the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can rotate together. The effect operation unit second drive motor 534 for rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 is mounted in the hollow rotating body base unit 531. On the outer peripheral surface of the rotator base unit 531, a plurality of peripheral decoration portions 531 f formed of penetrating hole-shaped decorations are formed. Are in communication with each other.

  In the decorative rotator unit 530, of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 that are rotatably mounted around the second axis CL, the second decorative surface portion 533 rotates around the second axis CL. The decorative portion 533a is formed in a shape that can generate wind when rotated.

  In the third rendering operation unit 400B having the above-described configuration, the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533 are connected to the rendering operation unit unit 530 with the first decoration surface portion 532 of the decoration rotating body unit 530 facing forward. When the second drive motor 534 rotates in a predetermined direction around the second axis CL, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotary decorative portion 533a on the second decorative surface portion 533 generates a plurality of winds of the housing wall portion 521a covering the rear. Through the ventilation opening 521d, the air escapes rearward from the housing wall 521a (see FIG. 92A). By this wind flow, the air in the button interior space AS in which the decorative rotator unit 530 is housed can be forcibly discharged to the outside and ventilated. Since the in-button space AS and the inside of the rotating body base unit 531 communicate with each other through the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f, heat released from the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is transmitted to the plurality of peripheral units. It can be discharged to the rear of the third effect operation unit 400B (in the mounting space 326j of the plate unit 320) through the surface decoration portion 531f, the in-button space AS, and the ventilation port 521d. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an abnormal rise in the temperature in the decoration rotator unit 530 and the operation button 410, and it is possible to prevent a problem caused by heat.

  In addition, the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment, the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533 in a state where the second decoration surface portion 533 of the decoration rotating body unit 530 is directed forward, the effect operation unit first. When the second drive motor 534 rotates in a predetermined direction around the second axis CL, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotary decorative portion 533a on the second decorative surface portion 533 is guided backward along the inner surface of the operation button 410. Then, it passes through the plurality of ventilation openings 521d of the housing wall 521a covering the rear of the decorative rotator unit 530, and comes out behind the housing wall 521a (see FIG. 92 (b)). The air flow in the button interior space AS in which the decorative rotator unit 530 is housed can be forcibly discharged to the outside and ventilated by the flow of the wind, so that it is mounted in the rotator base unit 531. The heat released from the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 passes through the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f, the button interior space AS, and the ventilation port 521d, and is behind the third effect operation unit 400B (the mounting space 326j of the plate unit 320). Inside). Thereby, it is possible to suppress an abnormal rise in the temperature in the decoration rotator unit 530 and the operation button 410, and it is possible to prevent a problem caused by heat.

  The exhaust heat discharged into the mounting space 326j through the plurality of ventilation openings 521d of the housing wall portion 521a of the unit base 521 passes through the pachinko machine 1 through an exhaust port (not shown) formed in the bottom plate portion 326i and the lower plate cover 340. Is discharged to the outside.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 540 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as exploded from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as exploded from the rear. FIG. 96 is a sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 93 (a). The door frame left side unit 540 covers the front of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (the door frame left side decorative board 160) above the plate unit 320. It is attached to the front left part of the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 540 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 540 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 541 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and a left side in a front view of the through hole 111, and a left unit base 541. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 542 attached to the front surface, and a translucent member disposed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and an upper left unit mounted on the upper front surface of the left unit base 541 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, projecting forward in a tubular frame shape, and extending vertically. The decoration base 544 is attached to the lower part of the front of the left unit base 541 from the front side of the left unit decoration lens member. A left unit lower decorative base 545 projecting forward in a frame shape shorter than the decorative base 544, and covering the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 544 and the left unit lower decorative base 545. It includes a transparent left unit decorative cover 546 attached to the front side of the left unit base 541, and a plurality of decorative members 547 attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 546.

  The left unit base 541 of the door frame left side unit 540 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 541a penetrating front and back on the front surface. As shown, the plurality of openings 541a include a circular hole and a rectangular hole extending vertically. The left unit base 541 is configured such that the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surfaces of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162) are connected to the plurality of openings 541a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. The openings 541a of the left unit base 541 are formed such that the LEDs 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located substantially at the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 541 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 542 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 542A and a lower diffusion lens member 542B. The left unit diffusion lens member 542 includes a circular lens portion 542a in front view corresponding to the circular opening 541a in the left unit base 541, and a square in front view corresponding to the square opening 541a. A lens unit 542b. In the state where the door frame left side unit 540 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161 a and 162 a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 542 a and the square lens portion 542 b. Is formed.

  The circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 has a front surface and a rear surface formed into a smooth convex lens shape. By the circular lens portion 542a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed at the rear can be radiated forward in a dot shape. With the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 542a, the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated.

  The square lens portion 542b of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 has a central diffuse reflection portion 542c that is concavely conically rearward at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 542d that is formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 542c at the front surface. The input lens portion 542e bulging rearward in a curved shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 542c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 542e generally increases outside the input lens portion 542e on the rear surface. And a front reflector 542f that is inclined to move.

  The front diffusion lens portion 542d of the square lens portion 542b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the central diffuse reflection portion 542c. More specifically, the front diffusion lens portion 542d has a cross-sectional shape cut along the radial direction, a groove portion is concavely formed in an arc shape rearward, and a mountain portion between the grooves is formed forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 542d is formed such that grooves and peaks are alternately located in the circumferential direction at radially extending lines dividing in the circumferential direction.

  The front reflecting portion 542f of the rectangular lens portion 542b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 542e. These grooves are recessed in a V-shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflector 542f has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and a mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape with a pointed rearward, and is formed in a saw-like shape. The front reflection portion 542f is formed such that the groove and the ridge move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflector 542f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction. The radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction coincides with the radially extending dividing line in the front diffusion lens portion 542d.

  In the state where the square lens portion 542b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 542e.

  In the square lens portion 542b, light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input into the square lens portion 542b from the input lens portion 542e. Since the input lens portion 542e bulges rearward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel forward in parallel, and the input light Almost all can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 542c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 542c is perpendicular to the axis extending forward and backward (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 542c. ), And travels from the center side to the outside along the front surface in the square lens portion 542b. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflector 542c travels outward from the center (in a direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflector 542c) over the entire thickness of the square lens portion 542b in the front-rear direction.

  When light reflected from the central side to the outside in the square lens portion 542b substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 542f, the light is reflected by the front reflecting portion 542f. Reflects to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 542f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the distance from the central diffuse reflecting portion 542c increases, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 542b in the front-rear direction decreases with increasing distance from the center. (See FIG. 96). Thus, the light reflected outward in the central diffuse reflection portion 542c over the entire thickness of the square lens portion 542b in the front-rear direction is sequentially forwardly directed by the front reflection portion 542f from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

  The light reflected forward by the front reflector 542f passes through the front diffusion lens 542d and is emitted forward from the square lens 542b. At this time, since the cross section of the front diffusion lens portion 542d is formed in a wavy shape, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 542f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 542b The light can be emitted substantially uniformly from the front surface (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member).

  The square lens portion 542b is formed by dividing the plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines in the front diffusion lens portion 542d and the front reflecting portion 542f, and then forming a plurality of concentric arc grooves on the dividing line. Are shifted in the radial direction so that concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light emitted from the front surface of the square lens portion 542b to the front has the density of concentric striped patterns. Light can be prevented from being emitted, and more uniform light and shade can be emitted forward. Thereby, the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the square lens portion 542b in the left unit decorative lens member can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  The unillustrated left unit decorative lens member is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 546. The left unit decorative lens member is located at a position located in front of the circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffusion lens member 542, and is located at the front of the square lens portion 542b of the left unit diffusion lens member 542. And a multifaceted decorative part formed at the site. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape having a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends short before and after. The multi-face decoration part has a plurality of square pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons formed in the vertical direction on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in such a shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-face decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multi-face decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 546. The left decorative lens member has a multi-sided decorative portion that extends forward from the square lens portion 542b of the left unit diffused lens member 542 by light emitted from the circular decorative portion forward of the circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffused lens member 542. The light applied to the light-emitting devices respectively causes light-emitting decoration.

  The upper decorative base 544 of the left unit is formed in a square shape extending in the front-rear direction in a square shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The left unit upper decorative base 544 is inclined such that a portion constituting the lower surface of the outer periphery projects downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and a lower portion of the portion penetrates forward and backward. The upper decoration base 544 on the left unit is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit lower decorative base 545 is formed in a U-shape that is open upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decorative base 545 is inclined from the substantially vertical center at the front end to the rear end such that the upper side moves rearward as going upward. The lower unit lower decorative base 545 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit decoration cover 546 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 540. The left unit decoration cover 546 is bent so that the middle part in the up-down direction is depressed rearward, and the lower part is bent rearward along the front end of the left unit upper decoration base 544; A U-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 545 is connected to a lower end of the upper U-shaped part and an upper end of the lower U-shaped part. And a linear portion.

  The left and right ends of the left unit decorative cover 546 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 544 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 545, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 546 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

  The decorative member 547 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 546 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 547 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 97B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 100 is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 97 (a). FIG. 101 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 97 (a), and FIG. 101 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line QQ in FIG. 97 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached above the plate unit 320 to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and to the right of the through hole 111 in a front view, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The right side decorative board 552 attached to the door frame and the right side decorative board 552 are attached to the front of the right unit base 551 on the left side of the center in front view and extend in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction. Transparent flat right unit left diffusion lens member 553, right unit left diffusion member 554 attached to the left side of right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and decorated, and right unit left decoration member Transparent flat right unit left camera attached to right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554 Includes a over 555, the.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side in front view of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, on the right side of the front view center on the front surface of the right unit base 551, and on the right unit left diffusion lens. A transparent plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 that is attached to the member 553 and extends in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and is attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated. A right unit right decorative member 557 in the form of a sheet, and a transparent flat right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. I have.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is arranged between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and is shallow extending in the vertical direction and the front and rear direction with the front and right sides open. A box-shaped, opaque right unit left light blocking member 559, and a right unit left light blocking lens member 556, which is attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light blocking member 559. And a right unit right light blocking member 560 having a flat plate shape.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decoration lens member 561, the right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561, and the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to a front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close a front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover And a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and the door frame relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570 are not shown. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangular shape having a long front-rear extension and a short front-rear extension in the shape of a rectangular tube. Have been. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 includes a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center on the front side in the left-right direction, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center on the front side in the left-right direction, and a center mounted on the front side in the left-right direction. And a plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is for light emitting decoration of the right unit left decorative member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. In addition, the right LED 552b is for causing the right unit right decorative member 557 to emit and decorate via the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for making the right unit decorative lens member 561 emit light.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 has both front and rear surfaces formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door main body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 includes a flat main body 553a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall 553b projecting from the rear side of the main body 553a to the right in a front view in a short flat shape. A notch 553c, which is cut out in a square shape from the right end side of the rear wall portion 553b to the left from the front and formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body 553a in the front view A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed so as to be able to house the 554, an input lens portion 553e that projects rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 553a, and a plurality of input lenses 553e are provided in the vertical direction. And a plurality of side reflectors 553f vertically arranged such that the input lens portion 553e is located at the center in the up-down direction.

  The main body 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner on the front end side of a vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Also, as shown in FIG. 101, the main body 553a is entirely moved with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move rightward in front view from the rear end side toward the front. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes more forward than the front end of the door frame left side unit 540 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b is in contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

  The plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The accommodation recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, it is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rear surface of a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending rectangle projects rearward and a rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. And a site. These input lens units 553e are located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state where the input lens unit 553e is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thus, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body 553a.

  The side reflection part 553f is provided with two or more (six) in the up-down direction. Each side reflecting portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, a surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to a surface of the main body portion 553a, and a surface farther from the input lens portion 553e is a main body portion. 553a extends perpendicular to the plane, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the side-surface reflecting portion 553f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that a mountain portion between the grooves is directed toward the center when cut in a radial direction with the input lens portion 553e as a center. , Are formed in a sawtooth shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction at radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is configured such that light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 forwards into the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens unit 553e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is concavely curved forward, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted by the curved surface so as to spread, so that each input lens portion 553e in the main body portion 553a. Will be diffused radially forward with the center as the center.

  The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the entire body moves rightward as viewed from the front as it goes forward. The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens 553e hits a flat left surface in the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted from the left side of the main body 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left side of the main body 553a, and is reflected toward the side reflection section 553f on the inner side of the left side. Becomes

  Then, the light that has entered the main body 553a forward from the input lens portion 553e is reflected to the left as viewed from the front by hitting the saw-shaped side reflector 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body 553a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is also emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a, but the right unit left light shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body portion 553a has a white color. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side reflector 553f in the main body 553a and the light radiated to the right from the side reflector 553f to the left of the right unit left light blocking member 559 are left. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the main body portion 553a is radiated to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a can be illuminated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflection portion 553f, after the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form the concentric arc grooves. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that light emitted from the left side of the main body portion 553a to the outside (left side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shading. And more uniform light and shade can be radiated to the left. Thus, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodating recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  In addition, since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the left side (the side where the housing concave portion 553d is formed) of the main body 553a in a front view. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the portion 553f and lines extending radially can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right unit left decorative member 554 can be seen. Can be decorated by the side reflector 553f.

  The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker's logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo that is presented to the player on the game board 5 in accordance with the concept of the effect is transparent. Is applied. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat main body 556a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall protruding from the rear side of the main body 556a to the left in a front view in a short flat shape. Part 556b, a notch 556c formed in a rectangular shape to the right from the left end side of the rear wall 556b in a front view and formed at predetermined intervals in a vertical direction, and a right side in a right front view of the main body 556a A housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed so as to be able to house the unit right decorative member 557, an input lens portion 556e that projects rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and a plurality of vertically arranged input lens portions 556e, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. On the left side, a plurality of side reflectors 556f are provided in the vertical direction such that each input lens unit 556e is located at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end side of a vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. And the outer shape of the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same as that of the main unit 553a. Also, as shown in FIG. 101, the main body 556a is entirely moved with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the left as viewed from the front as going from the rear end side to the front. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 540 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall portion 556b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 contacts the left end of the rear wall 556b.

  The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 form a square opening penetrating forward and backward. Is formed, and the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be satisfactorily illuminated and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The accommodation recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and its outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Accordingly, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is recessed forward so as to be spherically curved from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending rectangle projects rearward and from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. And a site. The input lens portions 556e are located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state where the input lens portions 556e are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thus, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body 556a.

  The side reflection part 556f is provided with two or more (six) in the up-down direction. Each side reflecting portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves which are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, a surface closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to a surface of the main body portion 556e, and a surface farther from the input lens portion 556e is a main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the plane of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the side surface reflection portion 556f is formed in a pointed triangular shape such that a mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side when cut in a radial direction with the input lens portion 556e as a center. , Are formed in a sawtooth shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 556f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction at radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is configured such that the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 enters the main unit 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens unit 556e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens unit 556e is concavely curved forward, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted by the curved surface so as to spread, so that each input lens unit 556e in the main body 556a. Will be diffused radially forward with the center as the center.

  The main body 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the entire body moves to the left as viewed from the front as it goes forward. Light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits a flat right surface in the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, and is reflected on the inner surface of the right surface toward the side reflection portion 556f. Becomes

  The light that has entered the main body 556a forward from the input lens portion 556e is reflected rightward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-shaped side reflector 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body 556a. It will be irradiated. In addition, although light is also radiated outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body portion 556a has a white color. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is emitted to the right side through the main body 556a. . Therefore, from the right side of the main body section 556a, the light reflected rightward by the side face reflection section 556f in the main body section 556a and the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 which is radiated leftward from the side face reflection section 556f. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the main body 556a is radiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be illuminated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflection portion 556f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction at the dividing line to form a concentric arc groove. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body 556a is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shading. Thus, uniform light with more and less light and shade can be irradiated to the right. Accordingly, the right unit right decorative member 557 accommodated in the accommodating recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed) of the main body 556a in front view. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the portion 556f and lines extending radially can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent part is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflection part 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent part, and the transparent part of the right unit right decorative member 557 can be seen. Can be decorated by the side reflection portion 556f.

  The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker's logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that is presented to the player on the game board 5 in accordance with the concept of production is transparent. Is applied. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right decorative member 557 and the right cover 558 of the right unit are formed substantially symmetrically with the right decorative member 554 and the left cover 555 of the right unit. The decorations applied to the right decorative member 554 and the right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light-blocking member 559 is formed to have substantially the same shape in side view as the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides opened. The right unit left light blocking member 559 includes a flat main body 559a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall 559b protruding shortly to the right from the rear side of the main body 559a in a front view, and a rear wall 559b. A plurality of cutouts 559c are formed in a rectangular shape from the right end side of the wall portion 559b to the left as viewed from the front and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. A plurality of flat reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

  The body portion 559a of the right unit left light blocking member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end side of a vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upward as the front side is forward. The right diffusion lens member 553 and the right diffusion lens member 556 have substantially the same outer shape as the main bodies 553a and 556a of the right diffusion lens member 553 and the right diffusion lens member 556.

  The rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall portion 559b extends to the right side from the substantially center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of the rear wall portion 559b is in contact with the left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560.

  The plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a set of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d that are substantially the same height as the left and right widths and are vertically separated from each other. The reinforcing portions 559d of each set are respectively formed at positions behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are increased by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

  The right unit right light blocking member 560 has a shape in side view such that the upper corner of the front end side of the vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light blocking member 560 closes the right opening that is opened to the right of the right unit left light blocking member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state where the right unit right light blocking member 560 is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 101, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are connected to the right unit. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are disposed so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . Through the space formed between the main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light radiated forward from the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decoration board 552 to the right unit decoration. The light is emitted to the rear side of the lens member 561.

  Further, the right light shielding member 559 and the right light shielding member 560 of the right unit are formed of an opaque member, and are radiated forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 correspond to the corresponding left LED 552a, right LED 552b, and Light emission decoration can be performed only by the middle LED 552c.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged behind the respective divided spaces because the internal space is vertically divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 prevents light from interfering with each other between the spaces. , Can be independently illuminated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to vertically divide the area into a plurality of (four) areas and to make each of them independently emit light.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and having a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape having a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly before and after. The multi-sided decorative portion 561b has a plurality of square pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in the vertical direction. It is formed in the shape as provided.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-face decorative portion 561b divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. Among the three parts from the top, the multi-face decoration parts 561b are arranged one on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged at the center in the vertical direction, and the three parts from the top, the multi-face decoration is provided on the lowermost part. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated and decorated by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 disposed at the rear.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape conforming to the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed so as to cover both left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and both right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 projects slightly forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a light-impermeable member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (the right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, in a state where it is assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes larger than the door frame left side unit 540 in a plate shape, and protrudes slightly forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. I have. The door frame right side unit 550 independently includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on the protruding left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. To make a luminous decoration.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and greatly protrudes forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility in a game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is connected to the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side. An effect such as a partition can be exerted between them. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to a player playing with the present pachinko machine 1 that the player is playing in a private room, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around. Can be.

  In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, even in a game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island facilities may be installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized even in a lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out in a game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are arranged. Accordingly, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on the right and left sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are illuminated and decorated, even if they are not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1, The pachinko machine 1 can be notified of the presence of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player.

  Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as clogging of a ball or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides. By causing the member 561 and the like to emit light in a unique manner, the staff in the game hall can be immediately notified of the occurrence of the problem and made to recognize the occurrence of the problem, thereby enabling quick response to the problem. Therefore, the interruption of the game by the player can be resolved at an early stage, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to the player being frustrated.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 102 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 105 is a sectional view taken along line RR in FIG. 102. The door frame top unit 570 is attached above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the center in the left-right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to the left and right sides of the central base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, extend right and left, and the center in the left and right direction projects forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating front and rear at a front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape having a rear open end, and a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a. A plurality of (three on each side) slits that extend and penetrate in the front-back direction, respectively, and are vertically separated A unit body 574 having 574b and attached to the front sides of a central base 571 and a pair of side bases 572, and a unit body 574 arranged at the front side of a pair of upper speakers 573 so as to close a pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of perforated metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 574.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 and has a translucent top decoration member 576, and is attached to the rear side of the top decoration member 576. A door frame top decoration board 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a plurality of slits 574b which are mounted on the front surface of the unit body 574 respectively and are closed, and both right and left ends of the top middle decoration member 576. A plurality of (three left and right) light guide members 578 in the form of a transparent flat plate extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit body 574 over the opening 574a, and the top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 574. Top left decorative lens members 579 and 579 respectively attached to the left and right sides and respectively covering the front surfaces of a plurality (three) of light guide members 578 The top right decorative lens member 580 and the front left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front side, and the opening 574a from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. And a top center left decorative member 581 and a top center right decorative member 582 extending to the vicinity of the center side end portion of each of them.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is mounted inside each of the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 574, and LEDs are respectively mounted on portions of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends. Door frame top left decorative board 583 and door frame top right decorative board 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574 b formed respectively on the left and right sides of the center of the unit body 574 on the rear side in the left and right direction. A pair of board bases 585 respectively attached to the parts, and a door which is attached to the front surface of the pair of board bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 574. Frame top middle left decorative board 586, door frame top middle right decorative board 587, door frame top middle left decorative board 586 And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the door frame top unit relay board 589 mounted on the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 574 and the central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 574 to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 574, and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 574. And a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 574.

  The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a square shape in front view extending left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 is attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 is assembled in the door frame top unit 570, and each of the front surfaces is obliquely mounted such that the side near the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570 moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 is a full-range cone-type speaker that can output sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 574 is formed in a shape as viewed from the front such that the lower portions near the left and right ends of a quadrangular shape extending left and right bulge downward. In other words, the unit main body 574 is formed such that the shape of the unit body 574 as viewed from the front is formed by cutting out a rectangle extending left and right with a trapezoid that is narrowed upward from the lower side. The unit body 574 has a rectangular shape extending in the left and right directions and a half of the full width (length in the left and right direction) about the center in the left and right direction on the front end side of the square as the base. The shape is formed by combining a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a square that protrudes short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid being a long side. Therefore, the unit main body 574 has a line connecting the left and right ends of the unit main body 574 with the left and right ends of the unit main body 574 on both sides of the front protruding portion at the center in the left and right direction on the front surface. It is located behind (recessed).

  In the unit main body 574, openings 574a penetrating back and forth are formed in portions of the front surface from the left and right ends to positions outside the portions protruding forward, respectively. The unit main body 574 has a plurality of slits extending obliquely to a portion of the front surface that protrudes forward in a trapezoidal shape, extending left and right at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front and rear direction. 574b are formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend right and left from near the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit main body 574 that extends obliquely forward to near the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574, each being vertically separated by three.

  Further, the unit body 574 includes an upper opening 574c which is notched squarely from the rear end toward the front at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d which is notched forward from the rear end to the left and right in the lower surface. , Is provided. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 574 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  The unit main body 574 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The top left decorative portion 574e has a front surface formed at a position substantially the same in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that the front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 574 is formed of an opaque member.

  The middle decoration member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 574. The top middle decorative member 576 has a pentagonal shape in which the shape in a front view is bent so that the center in the left-right direction of the lower side of the substantially square is located downward, and extends outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. It is formed in a shape that combines a right-angled triangle connecting the tip of the set side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the side pentagon. The in-top decoration member 576 is inclined such that the pentagonal portion on the front surface moves rearward as it goes downward. The top middle decoration member 576 is entirely formed in a three-dimensional shape, and has translucency.

  The door frame top middle decorative substrate 577 is inclined behind the top middle decorative member 576 in such a manner that the front surface is inclined to move backward as it goes downward along the front surface of the pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the inside decoration substrate 577 of the door frame, and the top decoration member 576 can be illuminated by emitting light from the LEDs.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the left and right outer sides of the front end of the front protruding portion on the front surface of the unit main body 574. The light guide member 578 is a straight part that extends straight left and right from the end to the center from the end toward the center. 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the center end portion of the straight portion 578a toward the center. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the up-down direction at the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the height in the up-down direction at the circular arc portion 578b. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant at the straight portion 578a, and is formed such that the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b decreases toward the center. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 574, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 574 from the front. I have.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and having a saw-like concavo-convex shape, a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b and having a plurality of concavities and convexities, It has.

  In a state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both left and right outer ends face the LEDs 583 a and 584 a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top center right decorative board 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both left and right outer ends, the light is transmitted to the straight portion 578a. While traveling inward toward the center, the light is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of the top front decorative lens member 580 in front of the straight portion 578a is illuminated.

  The light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Accordingly, a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be illuminated.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 is formed by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, or the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. By guiding the light from the LEDs 584a and 587a, the whole of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 disposed in front can be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 574. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently house the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, irregularities of a quadrangular frustum protruding forward are arranged on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the middle top decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit main body 574. In other words, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the right side from the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 574. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a for independently accommodating the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, irregularities of a quadrangular frustum protruding forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the middle top decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 574. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top frame decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 574 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top center left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center is closer to the top right. The decorative lens member 580 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is mounted inside the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574 e) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 583 a is mounted facing right. On the door frame top left decorative board 583, an LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end faces of three light guide members 578 mounted on the front surface on the left side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 105). ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. By the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative board 583, the portion located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit main body 574 in the top left decorative lens member 579 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminous decoration.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. In the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end faces of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 105). ). Each of the three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. By the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative board 584, a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 574 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminous decoration.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit main body 574 where a plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 has a substantially square side wall having sides extending vertically and forward and backward, a rectangular rear wall extending frontward in the left-right direction at right angles from a rear side of the side wall, and a front end of an upper side of the side wall. An upper wall of a substantially right triangle that connects the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall with the line connecting the middle of the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and an outline that connects the lower side of the side wall and the lower side of the rear wall on the opposite side to the upper wall And a lower wall of a right-angled triangle, and is formed in a triangular prism-shaped box shape having an open space between upper and lower oblique sides. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit main body 574 such that an open portion is closed by the unit main body 574. To this board base 585, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or a door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached so that the opened portion is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585 such that a box-shaped open portion is closed from the front in a board base 585 attached to the rear left side of the left and right centers of the unit main body 574. Can be The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front face of the board base 585, so that the front face moves to the left and right so as to move forward toward the center in the left and right direction of the unit body 574. It will be in an inclined state. Thus, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b are formed on the left side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction. And the state becomes substantially parallel.

  A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 574. Thus, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is in a state where the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state assembled in the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits a plurality of LEDs 586a to cause a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top left decorative lens member 579 to emit light through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open part from the front in a board base 585 attached to the right rear side of the left and right center of the unit main body 574. Can be The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front face of the board base 585, so that the front face moves to the front side toward the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574, so as to move to the left and right. It will be in an inclined state. Thus, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 are formed. And the state becomes substantially parallel.

  A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 574. Thereby, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state where the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state assembled in the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light at a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top right decorative lens member 580 through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light shielding members 588 is attached to the rear of the front surface of the unit main body 574 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 and the unit main body 574. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other by a light-impermeable member. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower portions of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 arranged in line with the three slits 574b in the unit main body 574. Partitioning. With this light blocking member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration It is possible to satisfactorily emit and decorate the decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 independently of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. The connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved such that front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 gouge backward. Therefore, it is possible to give an illusion to the player that only the top middle decoration member 576 protrudes forward, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 579 which decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed at the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed on both left and right ends of the unit main body 574. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punched metal behind each of the left and right ends near the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Since the speaker cover 575 is provided between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are vertically separated from the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, the speaker cover 575 faces forward. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in a good condition, and a high quality stereo sound can be enjoyed.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decoration. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be satisfactorily illuminated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can decorate the entire front surface of the upper portion of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the through-hole 111 penetrating the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 before and after the door frame base 110 is made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than the conventional pachinko machine. The height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left and right direction. Is smaller. Thereby, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the player (front) as widely as possible through the through-hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponding to the game board 5 having a large game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 is a rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 bulging forward below the through-hole 111. The front surface of the lower half (the part lower than the upper plate 321) on both left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 (the front surface of the lower plate front decorative portion 326c) is recessed so as to go backwards (the plate unit). The right and left front ends of the rendering operation unit 400 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400 are formed in a concavely curved shape such that the front surfaces on both left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are located rearward. ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the effect operation unit 400 is highlighted to the player. Thus, the effect operation unit 400 can be strongly noticed.

  The door frame 3 inclines the effect operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the plate unit 320 below the through-hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. When the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is turned to the head (face) of the player, and the player drops his / her gaze to activate the staging operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation buttons 410 can be seen almost in front, so that the large and round operation buttons 410 can be intensely visually recognized, and the sense of expectation for the effect using the operation buttons 410 can be increased. In addition, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed. Maseru can be.

  Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with the operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward and round, when the operation button 410 is operated, the hand is moved by a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the operation button 410 can be “rapidly pressed” relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward and is round, is mounted in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, as well as left or right. , Or from the front, and the operation using the operation buttons 410 can be more enjoyed by the operation buttons 410 with good operability.

  In addition, the door frame 3 has the effect operation unit 400 attached by the plate unit 320 in a suspended state, and has a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at a lower portion of the effect operation unit 400. When the vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 according to the state, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the hand of the player touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the operation button is surprised by the player. The effect using 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (production operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The lower plate 322 below the lower palate becomes less noticeable, which makes it easier for a player who is familiar with the conventional pachinko machine to recognize that the pachinko machine is clearly different, and appeals to the player's interest. The pachinko machine 1 having high power can be obtained.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the lower part of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326 d that is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently ensured. Further, since the rear of the lower plate 322 is wrapped around the rear side of the staging operation unit 400, when the player puts his / her left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his left hand on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertip to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and to increase the size of the lower plate opening 326d. In contrast, the fact that the volume of the lower plate 322 is large can be recognized by touch.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c through which the game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 and a lower plate for removing the game balls of the lower plate 322 to a dollar box below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is arranged linearly forward and backward, and is disposed on the right outside of the lower plate opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400) when viewed from the front. In other words, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are connected to the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a in the dish unit cover 326 (right outside of the lower tray opening 326d), and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. Since it is arranged on the rear side, the lower counter ball supply port 323c and the lower counter ball extraction hole 322a are not visible from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (sling machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, since the door frame 3 has the lower dish hole 322a disposed below (in front of) the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower dish 322, the lower dish hole 322a is opened. Then, the game balls released from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 are immediately discharged from the lower plate ball hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as they enter the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the dollar box through the lower plate 322 is also reduced. I can't see it. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to the player that the game balls on the upper plate 321 or the game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 830 with the upper plate 321 being full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Since it is possible, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation of hitting the game ball and the effect image), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

  In the lower frame 322, the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate hole 322a at a position on the front left side of the lower plate supply port 323c, and the lower plate 322 on the right side of the lower plate hole 322a. Since the raised wall is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball hole 322a, the game balls supplied to the lower dish 322 from the lower dish ball supply port 323c are directly transferred to the lower dish ball. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or can be indirectly guided to the lower hole 322a by being reflected on the right wall. Thus, in a state in which the lower bowl extracting hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower bowl 322 from the lower bowl supplying port 323c is located on the left side of the lower bowl extracting hole 322a in the lower bowl 322. The lower plate 322 can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball hole 322a without entering the (lower plate first area A1), so that the game balls flowing through the lower plate 322 are not shown to the player. The game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not obstructed by the player's hand. The sound from the speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be favorably output to the front, and the sound from the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Also, when the player puts his hand on or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can make the player feel tactilely the vibration caused by the heavy bass from the speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker opening 326e. It is possible to entertain the people and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 which is a plate-like and largely protrudes forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility in a game hall, the door is opened. Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect such as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing with the present pachinko machine 1 can play in the private room. It is possible to give an illusion that the player is playing, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around.

  Further, since the door frame 3 can decorate the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, a gaming hall in which the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side. The pachinko machine 1 can notify the presence of the pachinko machine 1 even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 or from a distance such as from the side along the island facilities, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. Machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes, in the door frame top unit 570 above the through-hole 111, a top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left and right front surfaces of the top middle decoration member 576, The shape of the door frame top unit 570 at the top middle decorative member is smaller than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the left and right front ends of the top middle decorative member 576. 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape such that the front surfaces on both left and right sides are located rearward. This allows only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to appear to protrude significantly forward, so that the top middle decoration member 576 can be emphasized and emphasized to the player. The interior decoration member 576 can be strongly noticed.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers which are separated to the left and right are provided above a door frame in a conventional pachinko machine, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of perforated metal at both left and right ends in a door frame top unit 570 attached above the through hole 111. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extend from the left and right sides of the center top middle decorative member 576 to both left and right sides through the front of the speaker cover 575, and The entire front surfaces of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 is not noticeable at the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that the player is present, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal to the player can be provided, and the pair of upper speakers 573 can provide the player with high-quality stereo sound. it can.

  As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, on the lower side and the upper side from the through-hole 111, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are formed. , Each of which protrudes greatly forward in the center in the left-right direction, so that the player can see the decoration with a sense of unity above and below the virtual line passing through the center in the left-right direction, and with sophisticated decoration The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

  In addition, the door frame 3 projects the front middle decoration member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 arranged vertically at the center in the left-right direction, so that the top middle decoration member 576 is formed. And when the effect operation unit 400 is illuminated and decorated, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting line extending vertically in the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged in the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. As shown, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein. The body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to an island facility of a game hall on the upper and lower sides of the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the open front side is closed. It can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and that can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. The upper hinge member 60 and the lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 are attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view so as to be rotatable, respectively. The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably mounted, respectively, and the reinforcing frame 660 mounted to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in a front view are provided. .

  The body frame 4 is attached to a lower part of the front surface of the body frame base 600 and is used to launch a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; And a locking unit 700 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out game balls to the cage player side, a board unit 900 attached to a lower rear portion of the main body frame base 600, and an openable / closable attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 106 to 109, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view shape extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and a game board insertion port 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game A game board placement portion 602 which forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and a left and right end of the lower end of the game board 5 which protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement portion 602. And a game board regulating unit 603 for regulating backward movement.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 includes a launching device mounting portion 604 for mounting the ball launching device 680 formed on the lower right side in front view of the game board mounting portion 602, and a right side of the launching device mounting portion 604 in front view. A cylinder insertion opening 605 that penetrates back and forth and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and a front and rear lower left side from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 when viewed from the front, and the door of the board unit 900 A connection opening 606 that allows the frame relay board 911 to face forward, and a circular opening that penetrates back and forth at the lower left side in front view of the game board placement section 602 and allows the speaker unit 920 of the board unit 900 to face forward. And a speaker opening 607.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 601 in a front view, and the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is rotatable at the rear end. A rear extension 608 is provided for attachment. Further, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed near the upper and lower ends at the left end of the rear surface when viewed from the front, and is an upper hinge mounting for mounting the main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. A portion 609 and a lower hinge attachment portion 610 are provided.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is rotatably mounted at an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be able to open and close, and at a position slightly below and to the left of the center of the game board placement unit 602 in the front-right direction. And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion opening 601.

[4-2. Upper hinge member on body frame side and lower hinge member on body frame side]
The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 and the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the body frame base 600.

  The main frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L-shape, and a columnar protruding upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The upper hinge member 622 pivotally supported by the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, and the upper hinge main body 621 penetrates the upper hinge main body 621 on the left side in the front view of the upper hinge pin 622 to pivotally support the upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side. Hinge hole 623 for a door frame for use. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 has a portion of the upper hinge body 621 bent downward, which is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the body frame base 600.

  The main frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates vertically at a front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and a front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L-shape. A lower hinge hole (not shown) for the outer frame that is pivotally supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and a horizontally extending flat plate that is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641. Hinge second main body 643 in which the rear part of the plate-like plate material is bent upward in an L-shape, and a lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side of the door frame 3 that penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643. And a door frame hinge hole 644 for pivotally supporting the door frame, and extending upward from the left end behind the door frame hinge hole 644 in a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643, and the door frame 3 A restricting piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of .

  The lower hinge second main body 643 has a horizontally-extended portion with a predetermined interval above the horizontally-extended portion of the lower hinge first main body 641, and a portion bent upward has a lower hinge first portion. The body 641 is in contact with the front surface of the portion bent upward. In the main frame side lower hinge member 640, a portion bent upward of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 is attached to the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcement frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross section in a plan view with a right side opened, and extends vertically with a constant cross section. In addition, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and vertically behind a portion extending rightward from the front end. A pair of left positioning members 661 are mounted vertically separated from each other.

  The reinforcing frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600, and also into the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Illegal insertion of a tool can be prevented.

[4-4. Ball launching device]
The ball firing device 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106, 108, and 109. The ball firing device 680 is a device for driving game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this ball firing device 680, the hitting strength of the game ball changes according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 680 A flat-plate-shaped firing base 681 mounted on the firing-device mounting portion 604 of the main body frame base 600; A firing solenoid 682 comprising a rotary solenoid mounted on the rear surface of the firing base 681 on the right side in front view and having a rotation axis extending forward through the firing base 681; A ball-hitting hammer 683 having a base end attached to a rotation axis of the firing solenoid 682, A launch rail 684 that is attached to the front of the launch base 681 so as to extend diagonally upward and to the left from near the tip of the hitting hammer 683, and on which a game ball can roll; It has.

  In this ball launching device 680, game balls are supplied from the ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the firing rail 684, and the game balls are supplied to the upper right end of the firing rail 684. When the handle 302 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting hammer 683. The game ball hit by the ball hammer 683 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 684, and is hit into the game area 5a.

  If the hit ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the strength of the hit of the game ball or the like, the distance between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). , Falls into the foul ball receiving port 275 of the foul cover unit 270 below, and is discharged to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the body frame base 600 of the body frame 4 and can lock between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 includes a unit base 701 attached to the right side of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units 700 protruding forward from the unit base 701 and locking with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and capable of being locked to the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower portion of the unit base 701 in a cylindrical shape, A protrusion protrudes from the front end in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmitting member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3. A key cylinder 710 for unlocking either the hook 702 for the frame or the hook 703 for the outer frame.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the payout unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the payout unit viewed from the back. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 114 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 116A is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 116B is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the front and exploded. FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 119A is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 119B is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS in FIG. FIG. 120 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is closed by the movable ball removing piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 120 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is opened by the movable ball removing piece. It is.

  FIG. 121 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 122 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the front and exploded, and FIG. 122 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 123 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full ball path unit when disassembled from the front, and FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from behind. Further, FIG. 126 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state where the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank route unit, and FIG. 126 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the taxiway opening / closing door is open. . FIG. 127 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full tank path unit. FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of gaming balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIG. 110 and FIG. 111, the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is attached to an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape extending left and right and opened upward and attached to a payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. And a tank rail 803 extending left and right for guiding the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 in the left direction when viewed from the front. In the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left, and are aligned in two front and rear rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 128) that swings downward from above.

  The payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front. A payout device 830 which is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 and pays out game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from a payout control board 951 accommodated in a payout control board box 950. And Game balls are distributed in two rows from the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, and the payout devices 830 pay out game balls one by one.

  Further, the payout unit 800 guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 downward, and plays the game balls according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. Guide path 861 that guides the game balls forward to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 from the front end, and guides the game balls discharged from the full tank discharge port 850 e forward to the front frame of the door frame 3 from the front end. The full guide path 862 that guides to the full tank receiving port 274, and the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 are connected to the main body frame. And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has a rear side opened, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has a front side opened, and a front case 822. A flat partition plate 823 that is attached between the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and that separates the front case 821 and the rear case 822 from each other. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 mounted thereon, and a pair of movable piece members front 825 and rear piece which are rotatably mounted by the shaft member 824 and are disposed in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. 826, and a ball-out detection sensor 827 mounted in the front case 821 and capable of detecting the rotational positions of the pair of movable piece members 825 and 826. To have.

  The front case 821 has a ball guiding entrance 821a which is open at the upper part of the right side thereof so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a ball guiding exit which is open at a position closer to the right side than the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. 821b, and a guiding path 821c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 821a and the ball guiding outlet 821b and through which game balls can flow. The guide passage 821c extends from the ball guide entrance 821a to the vicinity of the left end thereof at an obliquely lower angle with respect to the horizontal at a small angle, and at the center of the height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introducer 821d. The detection unit 821e includes a detection unit 821e that extends straight down to the vicinity, and a meandering unit 821f that extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 821e to the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 has a cutout portion 821g on the right wall of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c when viewed from the front.

  The rear case 822 has a ball guiding entrance 822a that is open at the upper part of the right side thereof so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a ball guidance exit that opens at a position closer to the right side than the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. 822b, and a guiding path 822c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 822a and the ball guiding outlet 822b and through which game balls can flow. The guiding passage 822c extends obliquely from the ball guiding entrance 822a to the vicinity of the left end so as to be lower at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and the center of the height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introducing portion 822d. The detection unit 822e includes a detection unit 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 822f that extends from the detection unit 822e in the width of the left and right sides of the rear case 822 in a meandering manner. In addition, the rear case 822 includes a cutout portion 822g on the right wall of the detection portion 822e in the guide passage 822c when viewed from the front.

  The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821. I have.

  The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 includes a vertically movable flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a, a shaft hole 825b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right surface of the movable piece 825a, and through which a shaft member 824 is inserted, and a movable piece 825a. An extension 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 825a. The extension 825c and the movable piece 825a are connected to each other, and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. A connecting portion 825d, a weight mounting portion 825e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through hole penetrating forward and backward; A detection piece 825f which extends outward from the right end and which can be detected by the ball cutout detection sensor 827, and a flat extension outward from a position close to the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 passes through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attachment portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. Then, the movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the cutout portion 821g of the front case 821, and the lower end of the movable piece 825a projects into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is The state is brought into contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 821c (detection unit 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts on the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is prevented from further rotating in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 821c (leftward in front view). In addition, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in a direction (to the right in a front view) in which the lower end of the movable piece 825a approaches the wall of the guide path 821c, the left surface of the movable piece 825a Coincide with the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f at the front of the movable piece member 825 is in a state of not detecting with respect to the ball out detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 821c, the ball-out detection sensor 827 does not detect.

  The movable piece member rear 826 includes a vertically movable plate-like movable piece 826a, a shaft hole 826b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a, and through which a shaft member 824 is inserted, and a movable piece 826a. An extension 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and the extension 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other, and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. A connecting portion 826d, a weight mounting portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and has a through hole penetrating forward and backward, and A detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end and that can be detected by the ball cutout detection sensor 827, and a flat extension that extends outward from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attachment portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is positioned directly below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the cutout portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a projects into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g is The state is in contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c (detection unit 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts on the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is prevented from further rotating in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in a direction (to the right in front view) so that the lower end of the movable piece 826a approaches the wall of the guide passage 822c, the left surface of the movable piece 826a Coincide with the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f behind the movable piece member 826 is in a state of not detecting with respect to the ball cutout detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 822c, the ball-out detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls being arranged in a row in front and rear by a tank rail 803, and a plurality of game balls are arranged in a row. 822 allows the user to be guided back and forth in two rows to the lower payout device 830 (see FIG. 128). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and can flow well. Can be.

  Also, when the game balls flow through the guide paths 821c and 822c of the ball guiding unit 820, the game balls come into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a at the front 825 of the movable piece member and at the rear 826 of the movable piece member, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are moved. The movable member front 825 and the movable member rear 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f at the front of the movable piece member 825 and at the rear of the movable piece member 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the ball cutout detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that a game ball is present in the guide paths 821c and 822c.

  When the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guiding unit 820 pays out the game balls, the game balls in the guide paths 821c and 822c flow downstream. When the game balls flow in the guidance passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game balls flowing in the introduction portions 821d and 822d increases, and the game balls flowing in the introduction portions 821d and 822d are movable pieces above the detection portions 821e and 822e. It rebounds to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game ball, the vibration causes the movable pieces 825a and 826a to be caught or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide paths 821c and 822c. Scratched dust and dirt can be removed, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be favorably rotated by their own weight and the like.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls flowing through the respective guiding passages 821c and 822c by using separate movable piece members 825 and 826, respectively. Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member rear 826 is detected by one ball cutout detection sensor 827, when there is no game ball in any of the guide paths 821c and 822c, the movable piece member front. The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece 825 or the rear of the movable piece 826 rotate so as to protrude into the guide paths 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball has disappeared are detected by the ball out detection sensor 827. You. Therefore, since the running out of the game ball can be detected at an early stage, the game ball can be quickly replenished, and the time during which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, by screwing metal screws as weights into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e of the front movable member 825 and the rear movable member 826, the weight of the front movable member 825, the movable member rear 826, and the weight of the weight. Accordingly, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction in which they project into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably mounted outside the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. No dust or dust adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even when the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls. By doing so, it is possible to rotate satisfactorily, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

  As described above, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment includes the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the front and rear movable pieces 825 and 826 whose lower ends protrude into the guide paths 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow by their own weight. By attaching weights made of metal screws to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface in contact with the game ball, the weight of the movable piece can be determined by the weight of the weight of the weight before the movable piece member 825 and after the movable piece member 826. The lower ends of 825a and 826a can be easily turned (projected) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably mounted outside the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. No dust or dust adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even when the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls. Thus, the movable pieces 825a and 826a (the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member) can be prevented from rotating.

  Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e formed as the through holes, and the front of the movable piece member 825 and the rear of the movable piece member 826 frequently rotate, the weight remains. The front 825 and the rear 826 of the movable member can be maintained in a good state for a long time without coming off from the front 825 of the movable member and the rear 826 of the movable member (weight attachment portions 825e, 826e). . Further, the weight can be easily attached to the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, thereby simplifying the trouble of attaching the weight. Thus, the cost of assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, since the guide portions 821d and 822d are provided upstream of the portions where the movable pieces 825a and 826a protrude in the guide passages 821c and 822c, the introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding game balls toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a are provided. Since the game balls flow through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the game balls contact the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, by vibrating the movable pieces 825a and 826a, it is possible to remove dust, dirt, and the like that have been caught or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c. The front part 825 and the rear part 826 of the movable part can be favorably rotated.

  Therefore, since the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be favorably rotated, the state (presence / absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game ball can be detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem due to erroneous detection or the like. Even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide balls 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that promptness can be obtained. Can be replenished with game balls, and by reducing the time during which the game is interrupted as short as possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The payout device 830 has a box shape with an open rear side, a payout opening 831a that is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface so that game balls can pass, and a game ball that opens near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. Payout exit 831b, a ball extraction outlet 831c that is open near the right end of the bottom surface in front view so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a payout passage 831d that connects the payout entrance 831a and the payout exit 831b and through which game balls can flow. And a front box 831 that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball extraction outlet 831c and has a ball extraction passage 831e through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A payout opening 832a, which has a box shape with an open front side, and is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. The dispensing outlet 832b is opened to be able to pass, the ball extracting outlet 832c is opened near the right end of the bottom surface in front view so that the game ball can pass, and the dispensing inlet 832a communicates with the dispensing outlet 832b so that the game ball is distributed. It includes a possible payout passage 832d, and a rear box 832 that has a ball free passage 832e that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 832d and communicates with the ball removal outlet 832c, and through which game balls can flow.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and is a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 whose rear side is open, and is attached to the inside of the front box 831 so that the rotating shaft passes through the front box 831. The dispensing motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, a driving gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 834, meshes with the driving gear 835, and can be rotated by the front box 831 and the front cover 833. , A driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, a driven gear 837 penetrating rotatably, and a front end attached to the front cover 833 and A shaft member 838 whose end penetrates the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and a shaft member 838 penetrating the shaft member 838, which is rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832. A dispensing blade 839 that is disposed in the passages 831d and 832d and rotates integrally with the driven gear 837, and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that is mounted between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detects the rotation of the discharging blade 839. And

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and has a flat partition plate 841 for separating the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832; And a rear box 832, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting a game ball discharged by the rotation of the payout blade 839 and discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, payout passages 831d and 832d, and a ball emptying passage. 831e and 832e are diverged from each other and are rotatably mounted by a front box 831 and a rear box 832, and can be used to close the ball passages 831e and 832e. A ball release lever 844 slidably mounted vertically slidably on the upper right side of the box 832 to make the ball release movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable; It is equipped with a.

  The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout entrance 831a to the ball ejection outlet 831c, and is lower at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. Bends to extend vertically to the left, near the center of the total height, to the left to extend substantially horizontally, and then extends vertically downward about 1/3 from the left end to the left and right width of the front box 831 again It is bent in a crank shape so as to be located just above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. Dispensing blades 839 are arranged in a portion of the dispensing passage 831d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball emptying passage 831e is a form in which a portion extending obliquely downward and to the right from the payout entrance 831a in the payout passage 831d is further extended. It diverges to the height near the center.

  In addition, the front box 831 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the payout exit 831b in the payout passage 831d, and protruding rearward as it goes downward, and is formed at an upper portion on the right side in front view. And a lever mounting portion 831g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout inlet 832a to the ball ejection outlet 832c, and is lower at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. Bends to extend vertically to the left, near the center of the total height, to extend almost horizontally to the left, and then extends vertically downward about 1/3 from the left end to the left and right width of the rear box 832 again. Thus, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located immediately above the dispensing outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the rear box 832, and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 832b. The dispensing blade 839 is disposed at a portion of the dispensing passage 832d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball emptying passage 832e is a form in which the portion extending obliquely downward and to the right from the payout entrance 832a in the payout passage 832d is further extended from the height of about 1/3 from the upper surface to the total height of the rear box 832. It diverges to the height near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the payout outlet 832b in the payout passage 832d, and is formed at an upper portion of a guide shelf 832f protruding forward as it goes downward, and on the right side in front view. And a lever mounting portion 832g for mounting the ball pullout lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The pay-out passages 831d, 832d and the ball empty passages 831e, 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the payout blades 839 are arranged. Further, between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached. In other words, the game balls flowing through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game balls flowing through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are separated from the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought near the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angle of 60 degrees in the circumferential direction from a spur gear-shaped gear portion 837a meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. A plurality of detecting pieces 837b and a connecting portion 837c projecting rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a in a cylindrical shape and having irregularities formed on a peripheral surface at a rear end thereof and connectable to the dispensing blade 839 are provided. .

  The dispensing blade 839 extends cylindrically forward and backward, and protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder 839a at regular intervals in a circumferential direction from a front end of the base cylinder 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted. A plurality (three) of front blades 839b and a plurality of front blades 839b projecting from the rear end of the base cylinder portion 839a in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be alternated. 3) A rear blade 839c and a connected portion that projects cylindrically forward from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a and has irregularities that can be connected to the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837 at the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

  The front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c of the dispensing blade 839 are provided three each at an interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blade 839c is rotated relative to the front blade 839b so as to be staggered. It extends outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc depressed toward the center, and the diameter of the arc is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c), a ball housing portion 839e capable of housing only one game ball is formed.

  Also, the three front blades 839b and the rear blade 839c are formed such that the outer diameter D1 of the outer periphery of the base cylinder portion 839a about the axis thereof is 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. The diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylinder 839a up to the part closest to the axis of the base cylinder 839a in the arcuate region (sphere housing 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). Is formed about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most concave portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. It is four times.

  Therefore, it is possible to hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 to 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball by the arc portion (ball accommodation portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. As a result, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be promptly accommodated between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c) (the ball accommodating portion 839e).

  In the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, with the dispensing device 830 assembled, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out respectively. In addition, the discharge blade 839 is disposed at a position below the center of the entire height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 in the discharge passages 831d and 832d, and is bent in a crank shape. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the rotation center of the payout blade 839 is located immediately below a portion that extends vertically downward from near the center of the entire height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Then, in the portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d that are bent in a crank shape, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the payout blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the payout blade 839, and the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the distance S is set to 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most concave portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

  Accordingly, when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 839 comes into contact with the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c, the payout device 830 passes through the crank-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d. , And is not discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839, can pass through the crank-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d, 832d, and can pass through the payout outlets 831b, 832b. Released downward.

  Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to be about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer diameter of the game ball is set to 1 by the ball accommodating portion 839e. Since a depth of / 7 to ４ is accommodated, the time required for accommodating game balls can be shortened while the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 is made as small as possible. Thereby, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated quickly, the game balls can be stored in the ball storage portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the related art, and the time required for paying out game balls can be reduced.

  The ball-moving movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape up and down and back and forth, and has a body portion 843a whose lower portion is bent to form a letter shape when viewed from the front, and a tubular shape that extends back and forth at the upper end of the body portion 843a. A shaft tube portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper part of the outer side surface of the main body portion 843a bent, and a main body portion 843a. And a weight mounting portion 843d (see FIG. 120) formed of a through hole penetrating front and rear at a lower portion bent in a V-shape.

  When the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball removing movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower part of the main body 843a extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is rotatable at a position extending obliquely to the lower right in front view from the payout entrances 831a and 832a and at a position outside the wall on the right side in front view slightly higher than the portion bent downward. Mounted on

  The payout device 830 of the present embodiment has a state in which the ball-pulling lever 844 is slid downward in a normal state, and the lower part of the ball-pulling lever 844 is brought into contact with the projecting portion 843c of the ball-pulling movable piece 843 from the right in front view. In contact. This restricts rotation of the ball-moving movable piece 843 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 120A).

  In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a of the ball-moving movable piece 843 that is bent in a rectangular shape, the upper side extends vertically from the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is obliquely lower left in front view. Extending to The lower end of the main body portion 843a is located near a portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball emptying passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, the ball removing movable pieces 843 (the main body portion 843a) close the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and the surface facing the left side of the main body portion 843a forms a partial wall of the payout passages 831d and 832d. are doing.

  The ball-moving movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that, in a normal state, the center of gravity of the ball-moving movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line passing through the center of the shaft cylinder portion 843b. Although a force for rotating the anti-clockwise rotation in a front view is exerted by this, the rotation in the counterclockwise direction is regulated by the ball release lever 844, so that the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower portion of the ball pulling lever 844 separates from the protrusion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise in front view. Restrictions on movement are lifted. Accordingly, the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located immediately below the shaft cylinder portion 843b. Note that the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the right side surface of the lower part of the main body 843a contacts the left surfaces of the members forming the right side surfaces of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 120 (b)). As a result, the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game balls entering from the payout openings 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removing passages 831e and 832e to be discharged downward from the ball removing outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball-moving movable piece 843 is provided with the weight mounting portion 843d, a weight made of a metal screw is screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d to mount the ball-moving lever 844 upward. Then, when the regulation of the counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball-moving movable piece 843 projects into the ball-drawing passages 831e and 832e due to the weight of the ball-moving movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be easily rotated in the direction (counterclockwise in front view).

  In a normal state in which the ball-pulling lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball-pulling passages 831e and 832e, game balls entering from the payout ports 831a and 832a are transferred to the main body 843a of the ball-pulling movable piece 843. Since the contact is made with the game ball, the ball-moving movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact with the game ball. Therefore, dust, dust, and the like that are caught or intruded between the lower end of the ball removing movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removing passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removing movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball-moving movable piece 843 from becoming unable to rotate due to biting, dust, or the like.

  Further, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d formed as a through hole, the weight can be moved even if the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates frequently. The ball-moving movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without being detached from the (weight attachment portion 843d). Further, the weight can be easily attached to the ball-moving movable piece 843 only by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d. Can be reduced.

  If the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long time by the ball removing movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable piece 843, or the rotating shaft rusts, and the ball removing movable piece 843 rusts. The movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game balls entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a are brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the movable ball removing piece 843, the ball removing passage 831e is formed by the movable ball removing piece 843. , 832e are closed, and when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the closure is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 843. The ball removing movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removing passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball removing lever 844 is operated to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, the ball removing movable piece 843 can be favorably rotated, so that the game ball can be reliably removed. In addition, workability during maintenance and the like can be improved.

[4-6c. Top full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to a position below the payout device 830 in the payout unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 851 whose rear side is open, and is mounted on the rear side of the upper full tank base 851 and its front side is open. The dispenser includes a box-shaped upper full cover 852 and a dispensing device pressing member 853 rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 830 upward.

  In addition, the upper full tank path unit 850 includes an upper payout ball receiving opening 850a that is open upward to allow a game ball to pass therethrough at a position on the left side from the left and right center in the front view on the upper surface, and a right side from the left and right center in the front view on the upper surface. Is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and is received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper ball storage passage 850c of a predetermined size through which game balls flow, a normal discharge port 850d that opens downward at a lower portion of the upper ball storage passage 850c directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a, and an upper ball storage A full tank discharge port 850e that opens downward at a position other than the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, a normal discharge port 850d, and a full tank discharge port 850e. And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  In addition, the upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper ball emptying path 850g that guides game balls entering from the upper ball emptying entrance 850b downward, and an upper part that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball emptying path 850g. And a ball ejection outlet 850h. In the upper full tank path unit 850, a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball ejection outlet 850h are sequentially opened from the left side in a front view and downward. The upper full tank path unit 850 includes a back cover attaching portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

  When the upper full ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830 and the upper ball emptying inlet 850b. Are located immediately below the ball ejection outlets 831c and 832c of the dispensing device 830. In addition, the upper full tank path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, and the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball discharge outlet 850h are connected to the normal guide path of the lower full tank path unit 860. 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball guide path 865, each of which opens directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 128).

  In the upper full tank path unit 850, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, a game ball that has entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving opening 850a is opened directly below the upper payout ball receiving opening 850a. From the normal discharge port 850d.

  When the inside of the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls, the game balls cannot be stored, and when the inside of the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with game balls, the normal release is performed. The outlet 850d is in a closed state. When a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of the game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition piece 850f, the game balls newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c get over the partition piece 850f and become full. It will be discharged downward from the tongue discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 322 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860.

  In this manner, the upper full tank path unit 850 automatically transfers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 321 in accordance with the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 322.

[4-6d. Bottom full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 123 to 127. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the upper full tank path unit 850. The lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward, and guides the game ball from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 by the normal guide path 861. And a full tank guide path 862 for guiding the game balls released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward and guiding the game balls from the front end to the full tank receiver 274 of the door frame 3; A guideway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 by changing the guideway open / close door 863 to And a closing spring 864 that urges the front end opening in a direction to close the opening.

  In addition, the lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game ball discharged from the upper ball emptying outlet 850h of the upper full tank path unit 850 to the front, and from the center right end in the front-rear direction on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900. And a lower ball-free guideway 865 for discharging air to the sphere.

  In the lower full tank path unit 860, a normal taxiway 861, a full tank taxiway 862, and a lower ball empty taxiway 865 are arranged in order from left to right in front view. The normal guideway 861, the full tank guideway 862, and the lower ball empty guideway 865 have their rear ends opened upward. Further, the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are arranged on the left and right, and extend forward to near the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lower. Further, the full tank taxiway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal taxiway 861. The normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball empty guide path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be vertically divided as shown in the figure.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to the front end of the lower case 867 at a position between the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862. Being energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full sphere path unit 860, a full tank guide path 862 opening to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view is one game with respect to the normal guide path 861. It is arranged at a position lower by the height of the sphere. The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and on the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 includes a disc-shaped base 863a that is rotatably mounted, a first door plate portion 863b that extends obliquely to the upper left from the base 863a and that can close the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending in a flat plate shape to the right from the base portion 863a and capable of closing the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862, and an extension portion 863d extending in a plate shape diagonally to the lower left from the base portion 863a. , An operating projection 863e projecting forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extension 863d and capable of abutting against the door opening / closing abutting portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 does not require the openings to be closed, but means that the game balls cannot pass through. The operation projection 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base 863a when viewed from the front, and is inclined so that the front end face projects forward as approaching the end side in the counterclockwise direction. are doing.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 864 so that the second door plate portion 863c is located at the front end of the lower case 867 from below the front end opening of the full guideway 862. By contacting the boss 867a protruding forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment has a front end formed with a through ball passage 273, a full tank receptacle 274, and a door opening / closing port in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 127). When the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the guideway opening / closing door 863 does not abut on the operation protrusion 863 e. As a result, it is rotated clockwise in a front view, and stops in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 126). (A)). Therefore, in this state, the game balls in the normal taxiway 861 and the full-filled taxiway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal taxiway 861 and the full-filled taxiway The game ball does not spill from the road 862.

  Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operation protrusion 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863, and the operation is started. Due to the inclination of the front end face of the projection 863e, a force acts on the guideway opening / closing door 863 in a counterclockwise direction in front view against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that have closed the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal taxiway 861 And the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 126 (b)). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861 and the second door plate 863c is located above the front end opening of the full guideway 862. .

  In the state where the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4 and the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank are full. In front of the front end opening of the taxiway 862, the penetrating sphere passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located. The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full ball receiving port 274 side.

  In this way, the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made different from each other in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are rotated by rotating the taxiway opening / closing door 863. Since the doors are opened and closed, the operating range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 can be reduced in size. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be more effectively utilized.

  The payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is full of game balls and the game balls cannot be released to the upper plate 321, and more payout devices 830 from the payout device 830. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls. Then, when game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal taxiway 861 is full of game balls, the game balls are normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. When it remains above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it flows to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, Payout of the game ball to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270 is automatically switched. After that, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 in addition to the upper plate 321 becomes full of the game balls and cannot supply the game balls to the lower plate 322, the foul cover unit 270 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 277 of. Then, when the movable piece 278 rotates and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 by storing the game balls in the storage passage 277, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are filled with the game balls. Is notified, and the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is released.

  The stopping of the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 in response to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is performed by, for example, storing the game balls until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270. In this state, the number that can fill the storage path 277 on the upstream side, the full guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, and the upper sphere storage path 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850 can be filled. When the game balls are paid out, the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, more game balls can be stored than in the conventional pachinko machine, and in a game state where many game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are dispensed by paying out the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being full of game balls, and to allow the player to concentrate on big hit games and entertain them.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a speaker for bass sound mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in a front view. A speaker unit 920 having a power supply board 921, a power supply board box 930 which is mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side when viewed from the front, and in which a power supply board is accommodated; An interface control board box 940 accommodating an interface control board therein, and a payout control board 951 mounted on the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of game balls are accommodated therein. And a dispensing control board box 950. .

  The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 mounted on the front surface of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. The door frame relay board 911 is used to relay the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board, and the peripheral control board, and the door main body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Things. The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall structure of gaming board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 129 is a front view of the game board with the panel plate of the game panel in an opaque state. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 129 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 129 as viewed from the back. FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. Further, FIG. 134 is a front view in which the front unit of the game board is cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area. FIG. 135 is a front view of the game board in which the panel plate of the game panel is in a transparent state.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is provided with a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 so that the rear end of the game area 5a And a plate-shaped gaming panel 1100 for partitioning. A plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is inside the game area 5a (not shown). The game board 5 has a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a game content which is attached to the rear face of the board holder 1200 and which is played by driving game balls into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 212) for controlling the power supply.

  Also, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100, a main effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of the game panel 1100. And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The main effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than an inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and also holds a transparent flat panel plate 1110 and an outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side and the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 includes a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept game balls hit into the gaming region 5a, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001. A first opening 2002 which is always open to accept a game ball at a different position in the inside, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, A second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing through the gate section 2003, and a game ball being received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Depending on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery to be selected, a game winning ball 2005 in which a game ball can be accepted in any one of them and a game ball received in the game special winning hole 2005 are distributed. A receiving space 2006 of a predetermined size, and a first receiving port 2007 and the second receiving port 2008 for receiving the game ball receiving space 2006 either, a.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a start port unit 2100 having one general winning port 2001. A side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in a front view and has two general winning openings 2001, and a start which is a lower right corner in a front view in the game area 5a. One general winning opening 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, a receiving space 2006, a first receiving opening 2007, and a second receiving opening which are attached to the right side of the mouth unit 2100 in a front view. Attacker unit 2400 having 2008, game area 5a above starting port unit 2100 and side unit 2200 It includes the frame-shaped center won game 2500 is attached to the front view substantially central slightly above closer, the.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape whose front is open and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 attached to the rear end of the rear surface of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010 a on the rear left side, and a rear surface of the back box 3010. A first effect drive board 3032 attached to the right side of the panel relay board 3031 in rear view, a second effect drive board 3033 attached to the rear side of the first effect drive board 3032 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, It has.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a front decoration unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, a rear movable effect unit 3200 mounted above the opening behind the front decoration unit 3100, and And a rear rear movable effect unit 3300 attached to the front side of the rear wall in the rear box 3010 at the rear side of the rear upper movable effect unit 3200.

  The back rear movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 includes a rear rear center movable effect unit 3350 mounted in the back box 3010 and a rear rear mounted near the left and right sides of the turning table 3380 of the rear rear center movable effect unit 3350. A left movable production unit 3400 and a back right movable production unit 3500, a back rear upper movable production unit 3600 attached to the upper part of the swivel table 3380, and a back rear lower movable production attached to the lower part of the swivel table 3380. And a unit 3700.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 (a) is a perspective view of a front component and a game panel of a game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 136 (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower left end from the center in the left-right direction in front view and extending clockwise in the circumferential direction in front view, passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in front view, and extending obliquely to the upper right, An inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. And an out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the area 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  The front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000 and having an upper part curved inside the front component 1000; an upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail And an impact portion 1006 that connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and that a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow preventing member which is turned by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only in the open position where it is turned around and opened between the outer rail 1001 and returned to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates forward and backward at the rear end of the out guide part 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in front view in the frame. The game ball guided rearward by the out guiding unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  In addition, the front component 1000 is located outside the vicinity of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end thereof, below the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and outside the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3 is formed in the security recess 1009. It will be in the inserted state. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to penetrate into the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the board 5, the rear projection 202 and the security recess 1009 will hinder the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

  Although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning projections projecting rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning projections into inner rail fixing holes formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed on the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  Further, although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses protruding rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses can be positioned between the panel holder (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1123 of the panel holder in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 penetrates the notch 1011 to form the lower full tank path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as a glass or a metal. The thickness of the panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even when an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It has been. In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 which is the lowest position in the game area 5a and corresponds to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 and is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel plate 1110 so as to penetrate back and forth, and to attach the front unit 2000.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection (not shown) projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in this example) than the panel plate 1110. Panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side (not shown). And a through-hole 1122 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1123 which is notched upward from a lower end at a lower left corner in a front view. The notch 1123 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the normal guiding of the lower full tank path unit 860 penetrates these notches 1011. The front end openings of the road 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper part and the front part opened, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below, when assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged part 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 133) for controlling the contents of the game and payout of the game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And

  The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Must be performed, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the improper act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the payout control board 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second starting port sensor 2402, a special winning opening sensor 2403, a first receiving port sensor 2404, a second receiving port sensor via a panel relay board 3031. 2405, a starting port solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, a V winning port solenoid 2416, a general winning port sensor 3101, a first starting port sensor 3102, and a magnetic sensor (not shown).

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  As shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 129, the function display unit 1400 displays a status indicator 1401 composed of three LEDs for displaying a game state and a normal lottery result selected by passing a game ball to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display 1402 consisting of two LEDs, a normal reserve display 1403 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and reception of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 A first special symbol display 1404 made up of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn by the first game, and a second LED made of two LEDs showing the number of reserves related to the acceptance of game balls to the first starting port 2002 One special reserved number display 1405 and eight special lottery results obtained by accepting game balls in the second starting port 2004. A second special symbol display 1406 made up of LEDs, a second special reserved number indicator 1407 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of game balls to the second starting port 2004, and a first special lottery When the result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like, or when the game ball received in the special winning opening 2005 is received in the first receiving opening 2007, the number of times of opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005 ( And a round indicator 1408 made up of five LEDs for displaying the number of rounds).

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the back of the main effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 212) that controls an effect presented to a player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. .

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a main control board 1310, an effect operation unit 400, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, a main effect display device 1600, a first effect drive board 3032, a second effect drive board 3033, And so on.

[5-7. Main production display device]
Next, the main effect display device 1600 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The main effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The main effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to a substantially central rear surface of the rear wall of the back box. The main effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (the player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main effect display device 1600 is a 12-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The main effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The main effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side in front view, and right fixing pieces 1602 protruding outward from the right side in front view. The main effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves 3010c opening on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from obliquely behind the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020. Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding downward.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. The front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112. And project rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving a game ball hit into the game area 5a and is always open and has a plurality (four in this example) of general winning ports 2001 and a plurality of general winning ports 2001. Is a first opening 2002 which is always open to accept a game ball at a different position in the game area 5a, and a gate 2003 which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball. And a second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball through the gate unit 2003, and a first starting port 2002 or a second starting port 2004. A special winning opening 2005 is provided in which game balls can be received in accordance with either a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result which is drawn by receiving game balls.

  A plurality of (four in this example) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first start port 2002 is located right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate unit 2003 is arranged below the center in the vertical direction near the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate unit 2003. The large winning opening 2005 is disposed at the upper right of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction and at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted immediately above the out port 1008 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a starting port unit 2100 having one general winning port 2001 and a first starting port 2002; A side unit 2200 that is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in front view and has two general winning openings 2001, and a side unit that is mounted on the right side of the starting port unit 2100 in front view. An attacker unit 2400 having one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, a receiving space 2006, a first receiving opening 2007, and a second receiving opening 2008; And a frame-shaped center part 2500 attached to the approximate center of the area 5a.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 (a) is a front perspective view of the starting port unit and the side unit in the front unit of the game board, and FIG. 137 (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from the rear. The starting port unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1008 near the lower end in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 is formed at a position immediately above the out port 1008 at the uppermost portion, and has a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time and is always open upward. One general prize, which is formed at the front of the mouth 2002 and below the first starting port 2002 and to the left in front view, and has a size capable of accepting only one game ball at a time and constantly opening upward. And a mouth 2001.

  The starting port unit 2100 has a transparent portion except for the front of the general winning port 2001 and the first starting port 2002, and has a rear side (a front and rear decoration of the back unit 3000 through a transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100). Unit 3100).

  The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the panel board 1110, so that the general winning port 2001 and the first starting port 2002 protrude forward from the front surface of the panel board 1110, and are opened upward. The mouth 2002 is located immediately below the center of the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 described later. Therefore, when the game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, it is accepted at the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability. The starting port unit 2100 can guide the game ball received in the general winning port 2001 or the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and deliver it to the back decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. The game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are respectively detected by the general winning opening sensor 3101 and the first starting opening sensor 3102 of the back decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 212). ).

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes two general winning openings 2001 arranged near the right end in front view, and a right shelf 2201 arranged above the two general winning openings 2001 and inclined so as to become lower rightward. And a left shelf 2202 that is arranged above the right shelf 2201 near the left end in front view and is inclined so as to become lower rightward.

  One of the two general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 is open diagonally upward to the right at the lower right end of the right shelf 2201, and the other is diagonally left to the lower left of the right shelf 2201. It opens upward. The two general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200 are arranged side by side so as to face each other. The side unit 2200 has two general winning openings 2001 (right shelf 2201) and a left shelf 2202 excluding the front surface formed transparently, and is formed on the rear side (through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the rear panel). The back decoration unit 3100) of the unit 3000 can be visually recognized.

  By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front of the panel board 1110, the two general winning openings 2001, the right shelf 2201, and the left shelf 2202 project forward from the front of the panel board 1110, and the rightmost Is located slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 of the starter unit 2100. When the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the right shelf 2201 is lower than the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, and the left shelf 2202 is higher than the first start port 2002. Position. The left end of the left shelf 2202 of the side unit 2200 is close to the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000, and can guide a game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 to the right.

  The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and deliver it to the back decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3101 of the back decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 212).

[5-8c. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. FIG. 138 (a) is a perspective view of the attacker unit in the front unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 138 (b) is a perspective view of the attacker unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 139 is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a flow path of a game ball in the attacker unit. The attacker unit 2400 is disposed in the game area 5a, at the lower right corner in front view, to the right of the starting port unit 2100 in front view, and attached to the front of the panel board 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 includes one general winning opening 2001 out of the four general winning openings 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, a receiving space 2006, a first receiving opening 2007, and a second receiving opening 2007. A receiving port 2008 is provided.

  The outer shape of the attacker unit 2400 when viewed from the front is formed in an L-shape with the right upper end extending upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction. In the attacker unit 2400, a gate portion 2003 through which game balls flow (pass) up and down is arranged at an upper right corner, and a second starting port 2004 that can be opened forward is arranged immediately below the gate portion 2003. ing. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a large winning opening 2005 that can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004, and always opens diagonally rightward at the lower left of the large winning opening 2005. One general winning opening 2001 is arranged. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, a receiving space 2006 of a predetermined size through which game balls received in the special winning opening 2005 are distributed is arranged below the special winning opening 2005. Further, the attacker unit 2400 has a first reception port 2007 that can be opened upward in the reception space 2006 and a second reception port that is always open upward on the right side of the first reception port 2007. Two receiving openings 2008 are arranged.

  In the attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 is opened with a size slightly larger than the game ball, and the gate portion 2003 is vertically penetrated with a size slightly larger than the game ball. In the attacker unit 2400, the second starting port 2004 is slightly larger than the game ball and is opened forward, and the large winning opening 2005 is about four times the outer diameter of the game ball in the left-right direction. It is open five times wider upward.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a gate sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, a second start port sensor 2402 for detecting a game ball received at the second start port 2004, and a gate prize port 2005. Large winning a prize port sensor 2403 for detecting a game ball received, a first reception port sensor 2404 for detecting a game ball received in the first reception port 2007, and a second detection port for detecting a game ball received in the second reception port 2008. And a second receiving sensor 2405.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a second start port door 2411 that can open and close the second start port 2004 and a start that opens and closes the second start port door 2411 according to a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball through the gate unit 2003. Mouth solenoid 2412, a special winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the special winning opening 2005, and a first special lottery where the special winning opening door 2413 is drawn by accepting a game ball to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. An attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result, and opens and closes the first reception port 2007 (game balls that are received by the special winning opening 2005 and flow through the reception space 2006 are opened by the first reception port 2007). Alternatively, the V winning opening door 2415 and the V winning opening door 2415 are connected to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening. And a, and V winning hole solenoid 2416 to open and close in response to the first special lottery result is the lottery or the second special lottery result by accepting game balls to 004.

  The attacker unit 2400 extends vertically at the upper right corner in front view, and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 at the upper and lower ends, respectively, and a gate passage 2421 through which game balls can flow, A left side passage 2422 extending up and down on the left side of the gate portion 2003 and through which game balls can flow, a right side passage 2423 extending up and down on the right side of the gate portion 2003 and through which game balls can flow, and a gate passage 2421. An attacker that extends to the left below the left side passage 2423 and the right side passage 2423 and below the right side passage 2423 so as to be lower on the left end side above the special winning opening 2005, and through which game balls can flow. And a passage 2424.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting port left wall portion 2425 and a second starting port right wall portion 2426 extending up and down on both left and right sides of the second starting port 2004 and forming a part of the gate passage 2421. A left side passage bottom wall portion 2427 extending from the upper end of the second starting port left wall portion 2425 to the upper left and forming a bottom wall of the left side passage 2422; and a height lower than the gate portion 2003. A right side passage right wall portion 2428 extending up and down from the second starting port 2004 to a height lower than the second starting port 2004 and forming a right wall of the right side passage 2423, and a lower end of the right side passage right wall portion 2428. An attacker passage bottom wall portion 2429 extending leftward halfway in the left-right direction of the special winning opening 2005 so as to lower the left end side and forming a bottom wall of the attacker passage 2424; Left side from the left end of the is provided with a release ledge 2430 which extends to the left so as to be lower.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the gate passage 2421 has a portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 communicating with the left side passage 2422 and the right side passage 2423 so that game balls can pass therethrough. . The second starting port 2004 is configured such that game balls cannot be directly received from the left side passage 2422 and the right side passage 2423 by the second starting port left wall portion 2425 and the second starting port right wall portion 2426 on the left and right sides. I have. The downstream end of the left side passage 2422 is joined to the gate passage 2421 above the second start port 2004 by the left side passage bottom wall portion 2427. The attacker passage 2424 extends to the left from the left side passage 2422. Note that the large winning opening 2005 which is long open left and right has a right end located substantially immediately below the second starting opening 2004, and a part of the upper side (opening) is covered by the attacker passage bottom wall portion 2429. I have.

  The second starting port door 2411 can close the second starting port 2004 that is open frontward from the front, and can rotate around an axis whose lower side extends left and right near the lower end of the second starting port 2004. Installed. The second starting port door 2411 is rotated (rotated) so that the upper side moves forward by driving the starting port solenoid 2412, thereby opening the second starting port 2004 and closing the gate passage 2421. The game ball that has flowed down in the gate passage 2421 or the left side passage 2422 can be guided to the second starting port 2004 side to be received in the second starting port 2004. The second starting port door 2411 closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid is ON (when energized). Let it.

  The special winning opening door 2413 is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so as to extend forward and backward and having a lower left end. It is possible. The special winning opening door 2413 closes the special winning opening 2005 by moving forward, and guides the game sphere circulating on the attacker passage bottom wall 2429 of the attacker passage 2424 to the left and discharges the shelves 2430. Can be handed over. The special winning opening door 2413 is opened by opening the special winning opening 2005 by retreating by driving the attacker solenoid 2414, and after passing through any one of the gate passage 2421, the left side passage 2422, and the right side passage 2423, the attacker door 2413 is opened. The game ball released from the left end of the attacker passage bottom wall 2429 of the passage 2424 can be received in the special winning opening 2005. The special winning opening door 2413 closes the special winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the special winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

  The V winning opening door 2415 is formed in the receiving space 2006 in a plate shape extending in the front-rear direction and extending right and left so that the right end is lowered. The first entrance 2007 (V winning opening) can be opened and closed. The V winning opening door 2415 closes the first receiving opening 2007 by moving forward, guides the game ball received in the special winning opening 2005 to the right, and always opens upwards. 2008. In addition, the V winning opening door 2415 is retreated by driving the V winning opening solenoid 2416 to open the first receiving opening 2007, and the game balls received in the large winning opening 2005 can be returned to the first receiving opening with a high probability. 2007 can be accepted. The V winning opening door 2415 closes the first receiving opening 2007 when the V winning opening solenoid 2416 is OFF (when not energized), and closes the first receiving opening when the V winning opening solenoid 2416 is ON (when energized). Release 2007. In other words, the V winning opening door 2415 can distribute the game balls received in the special winning opening 2005 so as to be received in either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008.

  In this attacker unit 2400, the gate passage 2421 is located below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center role 2500, which will be described later, while being attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110. The unit 2003 and the second starting port 2004 are located above the stage 2530 of the center role 2500. Also, the special winning opening 2005 is located above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the general winning opening 2001 is located below the first starting opening 2002.

  Next, the flow of a game ball in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. When assembled on the game board 5, the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 is located above the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500. It does not pass. Therefore, only a game ball that has flowed down the right side (right guide passage 2540) of the center role 2500 may pass through the gate portion 2003. Downstream of the right guide passage 2540, a left side passage 2422, a gate passage 2421, and a right side passage 2423 are opened side by side from the left, and a game ball flowing down the right side of the center role 2500 is one of them. Will be entered. Since the upper end opening of the gate passage 2421 in which the gate portion 2003 is disposed opens upward below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center role 2500, the center role 2500 is closed. The game ball flowing down the right side enters the gate passage 2421 with a high probability and passes through the gate portion 2003.

  Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged from the gate passage 2421 to the attacker passage 2424 through the front of the second starting port door 2411 closing the second starting port 2004 immediately below. At this time, if the second starting port door 2411 is turned forward and is in the open position, the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 abuts on the back surface of the second starting port door 2411 and The user is guided to the starting port 2004 and is received by the second starting port 2004. The second starting port door 2411 responds to a normal lottery result that is determined when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 (a game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2401) (the normal lottery result is “normal hit”). At that time, by appropriately setting the lottery time of the normal lottery result, the opening / closing timing of the second starting port door 2411, and the like, the game ball itself that has drawn the “normal hit” itself is accepted into the second starting port 2004. be able to.

  The game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402.

  In the gate passage 2421, since the left side of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 communicates with the lower end of the left side passage 2422, the gate passage 2421 enters the left side passage 2422 on the left side of the gate portion 2003. The game balls that have flowed are allowed to flow to the front side of the second starting port 2004 without passing through the gate portion 2003. Therefore, in a state where the second starting port door 2411 is moved to the open position and the second starting port 2004 can be received, a game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 or a game ball flowing through the left side passage 2422. Can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability. Since the right side of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 communicates with the middle of the right side passage 2423, the gate passage 2421 is connected to the right side passage 2423 on the right side of the gate portion 2003. There is a possibility that the entered game ball is accepted by the second starting port 2004. On the other hand, a game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 or flowing through the left side passage 2422 may enter the right side passage 2423 through a portion of the gate passage 2421 communicating with the right side passage 2423, It does not necessarily pass through the front of the second starting port 2004 (second starting port door 2411).

  When the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the center role 2500 is not received by the second starting port 2004, it is discharged from the lower end of the gate passage 2421 or the right side passage 2423 to the attacker passage 2424.

  The game ball discharged into the attacker passage 2424 is guided to the left along the inclination of the attacker passage bottom wall 2429, and closes the special winning opening 2005 from the left end of the attacker passage bottom wall 2429. It is discharged downward from the left end of the discharge shelf 2430 via 2413. At this time, when the special winning opening door 2413 that closes the special winning opening 2005 retreats and the special winning opening 2005 is opened, the game balls released into the attacker passage 2424 have a high probability of the large winning opening. Accepted in 2005. The game ball received in the special winning opening 2005 is sent to the receiving space 2006 after being detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403, and is sent to the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008 by the V winning opening door 2415. It is distributed to.

  The game ball received in the first reception port 2007 or the second reception port 2008 is detected by the first reception port sensor 2404 or the second reception port sensor 2405, and then is located below (substrate holder) behind the game panel 1100. 1200).

  There is a possibility that the game ball discharged downward from the discharge shelf 2430 may be received in one general winning opening 2001 arranged below. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided to the rear side of the panel board 1110 and then passed to the back decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. On the other hand, game balls not received in the general winning opening 2001 pass through the out opening 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a and are discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the game panel 1100.

[5-8d. Center role]
Next, the center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. The center role item 2500 is disposed above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a, substantially in the center in front view, and slightly upward, and is mounted on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Have been. The center role 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and allows the user to visually recognize, from the front, various effect units provided in the main effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the inside of the frame. Can be.

  In the frame-shaped center role 2500, the entire periphery excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball hit into the game area 5a is placed in the frame. It is inaccessible.

  The center role item 2500 is provided on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front, with a warp entrance 2520 that is open to allow a game ball in the game area 5a to enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520, which can be released. It has a warp exit 2522 that is open, and a stage 2530 that can release the game ball released from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction and then discharge it into the game area 5a.

  The stage 2530 of the center role 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and corresponds to a position directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center role 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel board). 1110), it is formed in a wavy shape such that the substantially central position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. The stage 2530 is inclined such that a portion (top) slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left and right direction and a lowest portion (valley) on the left and right sides thereof become lower toward the front. The game balls can be released into the game area 5a from those portions.

  In the state where the center role item 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (top) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2530 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball is released from the center of the stage 2530, it is accepted by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

  In addition, the center role item 2500 includes a right guide passage 2540 that guides the game ball flowing down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side when viewed from the front slightly to the left and then discharges the ball downward. The right guide passage 2540 is formed such that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540 is located slightly to the left of the gate unit 2003 in the attacker unit 2400 in a state where the center role item 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. I have.

  Further, the center role item 2500 includes a logo decoration unit 2550 provided at an upper part in the frame and provided with a predetermined logo (not shown) according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The logo decoration unit 2550 has a translucent logo decoration 2551 in which a predetermined logo is formed in a relief shape, and is attached to the rear side of the logo decoration 2551 and can irradiate light forward. And a logo decoration board 2552 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The logo decoration unit 2550 can appropriately illuminate and decorate the logo decoration 2551 with the LED of the logo decoration board 2552. The logo decoration unit 2550 is formed so as to be located above the main effect display device 1600 in a front view in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5.

  The center role item 2500 is formed such that the outer peripheral surface on the right side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball from the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 when assembled to the game board 5. Therefore, when the game ball circulates on the right side of the center role 2500, it flows along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center role 2500, and all the game spheres flowing on the right side of the center role 2500 enter the right guide passage 2540. Enter and be guided. Thereby, when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a so as to flow on the right side of the center role item 2500 (so-called right-handed), the game ball can pass through the gate unit 2003 with a high probability. At the same time, a game ball can be accepted with a high winning opening 2005 that is opened (opened) with a high probability.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100. Note that a main effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape whose front is open and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 attached to the rear end of the rear surface of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010 a on the rear left side, and a rear surface of the back box 3010. A first effect drive board 3032 attached to the right side of the panel relay board 3031 in rear view, a second effect drive board 3033 attached to the rear side of the first effect drive board 3032 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, It has.

  Further, the back unit 3000 covers the first effect drive board cover 3034 attached to the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the first effect drive board 3032, and covers the rear side of the second effect drive board 3033. And a second effect drive board cover 3035 attached to the back box 3010.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a frame-shaped front decoration unit 3100 attached along the outer peripheral edge at the front end of the back box 3010, and an opening 3010 a on the rear side of the front decoration unit 3100 in the back box 3010. And a rear-side movable effect unit 3300 attached to the front side of the rear wall of the back box 3010 behind the upper-side movable effect unit 3200 in the back box 3010. And a back rear left movable production unit 3400 and a back rear right movable production unit 3500 which are attached to the turning table 3380 of the rear rear center movable production unit 3350 in the rear rear movable production unit 3300 so as to be separated from each other. .

  In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 attached to the upper front part of the turning table 3380 of the rear center movable effect unit 3350, and a back rear lower movable effect unit attached to the lower front part of the turning table. 3700. The back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 includes a sub effect display device 3640 having a smaller display screen than the main effect display device 1600.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. FIG. 145 (a) is a perspective view of the back box of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 145 (b) is a perspective view of the back box of the back unit as viewed from the back. The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square shape, and a flat frame-like shape protruding rearward with a gap from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the main effect display device 1600 is depressed outward from the inside of the frame on the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b when viewed from the rear, and A notch portion 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the mounting portion 3010b in rear view, and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached, is provided.

  The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the main effect display device 1600. In addition, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the main effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear surface in a rear view so as to be slidable up and down.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses and mounting holes for mounting each movable effect unit and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

[5-9b. Back decoration unit]
Next, the front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 416 and the like. FIG. 146 (a) is a perspective view of the back front decorative unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 (b) is a perspective view of the back front decorative unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. The back front decoration unit 3100 is attached to the front end of the back box 3010, and is formed in a frame shape extending substantially all around the periphery of the back box 3010.

  The front decoration unit 3100 includes a general winning opening sensor 3101 for detecting a game ball received in a general winning opening 2001 provided in the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2400 in the front unit 2000, respectively. A first starting port sensor 3102 for detecting a game ball received in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and a magnetic sensor 3103 capable of detecting an illegal magnet applied from outside in the game area 5a. , Is provided.

  The back front decoration unit 3100 includes an L-shaped front front left decoration unit 3110 formed along the left side and the lower side of the front end of the back box 3010, and the right side and the top side at the front end of the back box 3010. And a rear right decoration unit 3130 formed in an inverted L shape so as to conform to the above.

  The back front left decorative unit 3110 is a translucent L-shaped left base 3111 attached along the left side and the lower side of the front end of the back box 3010, and is mounted on the front side of the left base 3111. A light-transmitting rear left decorative body 3112 having a relief-shaped decoration formed on the front surface thereof, and attached to the front of the left base 3111 behind a vertically extending portion of the rear front left decorative body 3112. The front left back decoration board 3113 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward are mounted on the front side, and the left base 3111 on the rear side of the left and right extending part of the back front left decoration 3112. A back and front lower decorative substrate 3114 mounted with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear side and capable of irradiating light to the front on the front side.

  The front back left decorative unit 3110 can pass a game ball to a position behind the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 of the front unit 2000 in a portion extending left and right of the back front left decorative body 3112. An opening 3112a is provided. The game ball that has passed through the opening 3112a is discharged downward through the space between the back front left decorative body 3112 and the left base 3111. At this time, the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3101 attached to the left base 3111, and the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is placed on the left base 3111. It is detected by the attached first starting port sensor 3102. Note that the magnetic sensor 3103 is attached to the left base 3111 at a position near the rear of the first starting port 2002.

  The back front left decorative unit 3110 can make the front front left decorative body 3112 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front left decorative board 3113 and the back front lower decorative board 3114. .

  The back front right decorative unit 3130 is mounted on the front end of the back box 3010 along the right side and the upper side and has a translucent inverted L-shaped right base 3131 and is mounted on the front side of the right base 3131. And a translucent front right decorative body 3132 having a relief-shaped decoration formed on the front surface, and a front side of the right base 3131 behind a vertically extending portion of the rear front right decorative body 3132. A front right decoration board 3133 having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon and capable of irradiating light forward to the front, and a right base 3131 at a rear side of a left and right extending part of the front right decoration 3132. And a front upper decorative board 3134 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward are mounted on the front side.

  The back front right decorative unit 3130 can cause the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front right decorative substrate 3133 and the back front upper decorative substrate 3134 to emit light as appropriate, so that the back front right decorative body 3132 can emit light. .

  In the state where the back front decoration unit 3100 is assembled on the game board 5, the back front left decorative body 3112 and the back front right decorative body 3132 are disposed outside the center role object 2500 in the front view game area 5a, and It can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the transparent panel board 1110. Thereby, the back front decoration unit 3100 can decorate the rear side of the area where the game balls flow outside the center role item 2500 in the game area 5a.

[5-9c. Movable production unit on the back]
Next, the back upper movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 to 152. FIG. 147 is a perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 148 is a perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective view of the back up / down unit of the back up movable effect unit as viewed from the front together with the back up movable main unit. FIG. 150 is an exploded view of the back up / down unit of the back up movable effect unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from behind with the back upper movable main unit. FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper movable main unit of the back upper movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear upper movable body unit of the back upper movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view.

  The rear upper movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the rear side of the front decoration unit 3100 in the back box 3010 and above the opening 3010a. The upper back movable rendering unit 3200 includes a back raising / lowering unit 3210 mounted in the back box 3010, and a back upper moving main unit 3230 raised / lowered by the back lifting / lowering unit 3210.

  The back elevating unit 3210 is a flat elevating unit base 3211 mounted in the back box 3010, and a circle protruding forward from the lower right corner of the elevating unit base 3211 to rotatably mount the back upper movable body unit 3230. A back-up / down drive motor 3213 mounted on a rear surface of a column-shaped up / down support shaft 3212, a back / up unit base 3211, and having a rotating shaft extending forward through the up / down unit base 3211; A lifting gear 3214 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 3213, a lifting relay gear 3215 in the form of a spur gear engaged with the lifting drive gear 3214 and rotatably mounted on the lifting unit base 3211; , The operation gear portion 3216a meshing with the lifting relay gear 3215, and the operation gear portion 3216a. An extension 3216b extending radially outward, a cylindrical drive pin 3216c projecting forward from near the tip of the extension 3216b, and a plate-like elevating member formed at the tip of the extension 3216b A lifting / lowering link gear member 3216 that has a detection piece 3216d and is rotatably attached to the lifting / lowering unit base 3211.

  In addition, the back elevating / lowering unit 3210 penetrates back and forth at one end, and has a driving hole 3217a into which the driving pin 3216c of the elevating link gear member 3216 is rotatably inserted, and front and rear at the other end. A rod-shaped elevating link member 3217 penetrating and having an operation hole 3217b into which the operation pin 3231b of the back upper movable body base 3231 of the upper back movable body unit 3230 is rotatably inserted, and attached to the front surface of the elevation unit base 3211. A stopper member 3218 for restricting a rotating end of the elevating link gear member 3216 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front; a first effect driving substrate 3032 and a second effect driving substrate attached to the stopper member 3218; 3033 and the upper back rotation drive motor 3235 of the upper back movable main unit 3230 and the upper back mounting A back-up relay board 3219 that relays connection with the board 3234; and a back-up / down detection sensor 3220 attached to the stopper member 3218 and capable of detecting the up / down detection piece 3216d of the up / down link gear member 3216. I have.

  The elevating unit base 3211 is formed of a metal plate. The elevating unit base 3211 is provided with a lower stopper portion 3211a that is bent forward and extends vertically and vertically at a portion below and to the left of a portion where the supporting shaft 3212 is attached. A plate-shaped shock absorbing material 3221 is attached to the rightward facing surface of the lower stopper portion 3211a. The lower stopper portion 3211a is formed such that the upper back movable main body base 3231 of the upper back movable main unit 3230 abuts via the shock absorbing material 3221, and is clockwise in the front view of the upper back movable main unit 3230. (A movable end below the free end (right end in front view) of the upper back movable main body unit 3230).

  The lifting drive gear 3214 and the lifting relay gear 3215 are formed to have the same diameter, and the operating gear portion 3216 a of the lifting link gear member 3216 is formed to be larger in diameter than the lifting relay gear 3215. The elevating link gear member 3216 has an extending portion 3216b extending outward from the operating gear portion 3216a in a fan shape. The stopper member 3218 has a flat upper stopper portion 3218a extending forward. When the side surface of the extending portion 3216b of the elevating link gear member 3216 abuts on the lower surface of the upper stopper portion 3218a, the rotating end of the elevating link gear member 3216 in the counterclockwise direction is regulated. . In other words, the upper stopper portion 3218a restricts the rotation of the elevating link gear member 3216 in the counterclockwise direction, so that the upper stopper 3218a moves upward and downward from the free end of the back upper movable body unit 3230 via the elevating link gear member 3216. The moving end (rising end) is regulated.

  The back upper movable body unit 3230 is a shallow box-shaped open rear side and extends left and right, and the left upper end near the front view is rotatably attached to the back ascent / descent unit 3210, and the back upper movable body base 3231; A disk-shaped upper first rotating decorative body 3232, which is rotatably mounted around an axis extending forward and backward from the right end of the base 3231 at a position closer to the left, and is disposed on the front side of the upper upper rotating decorative body 3232. A back upper second rotary decorative body 3233 rotatably attached to the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 at a position eccentric to the axis of the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232; And a back decoration board 3234 attached to the rear surface of the back movable main body base 3231 behind the one rotation decoration body 3232 and the back upper second rotation decoration body 3233.

  The back upper movable body unit 3230 is attached to the front surface near the left end of the back upper movable body base 3231, and has a rotating shaft that penetrates through the back upper movable body base 3231 and projects rearward. 3235, a spur gear-shaped rotation drive gear 3236 attached to the rotation shaft of the back upper rotation drive motor 3235, a spur gear-shaped input gear portion 3237 a meshing with the rotation drive gear 3236, and a rear side of the input gear portion 3237 a And a transmission relay gear 3237 having an output gear portion 3237b smaller in diameter than the input gear portion 3237a, and meshing with an output gear portion 3237b of the transmission relay gear 3237 to be rotatably attached to the upper movable main body base 3231. A first relay gear 3238 in the form of a spur gear, and a movable upper body base 3231 meshed with the first relay gear 3238 A spur gear-shaped second relay gear 3239 rotatably mounted, and a spur gear-shaped third relay gear meshed with the second relay gear 3239 and rotatably mounted on the upper back movable main body base 3231. 3240, a first rotary decorative body gear 3241 meshed with the third relay gear 3240 and integrally rotating with the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232, a back upper movable body base 3231 and a rear upper first rotary decorative body 3232, And a spur gear-shaped second rotary decorative body gear 3242 that is arranged between the second rotary decorative body 3233 and rotates integrally with the rotation of the first rotary decorative body 3232 on the back. Have.

  Further, the back upper movable body unit 3230 is attached to the back upper movable body base 3231 and detects a rotation position of the back upper first rotary decoration body 3232, a back upper rotation detection sensor 3245, and a back upper first rotary decoration body. The shaft cores are arranged on the rear side of the 3232, and each extend back and forth on the circumference of a predetermined radius centered on the shaft center of the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 on the front surface of the back upper movable main body base 3231. A plurality of back and forth decorations 3246 that are rotatably mounted around and a back and forth decoration 3246 that is mounted on the rear side of the first rotation decoration 3232 on the back and comes into contact with the back and forth decorations 3246 so that the back and forth decorations 3246 are in contact. A first cam member 3247 and a second cam member 3248 for rotating the decorative body 3246 to partially protrude outside the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232, and a plurality of back upper and lower decorative bodies 3246; It s a plurality of return spring 3249 which is urged to rotate in a direction that does not protrude outward from the back on the first rotating decorative body 3232, and a.

  The upper back movable main body unit 3230 includes a base cover 3250 attached to the rear side of the upper back movable body base 3231 so as to cover the rotation drive gear 3236 and the transmission relay gear 3237 from the rear side, and a back upper decorative board 3234. And a board cover 3251 attached to the rear side of the upper back movable main body base 3231 so as to cover the rear side.

  The upper half of the back movable main body base 3231 is formed in a disk shape with a right half extending left and right having a diameter larger than that of the left half. The upper back movable main body base 3231 penetrates back and forth substantially at the center of the left end in the vertical direction, and is rotatably mounted on the elevating support shaft 3212 of the back elevating unit 3210. And a working pin 3231b rotatably inserted into a working hole 3217b of the elevating link member 3217 near the lower end of the portion, and a forward cylindrical protrusion at substantially the center of the right half disk-shaped portion. Boss portion 3231c, the first rotation support hole 3231d, which penetrates back and forth at the center of the boss portion 3231c, and rotatably mounts the upper back first rotary decorative body 3232, and the same as the first rotation support hole 3231d. A spur gear-shaped fixed gear portion 32 formed on the core and formed on the outer periphery near the front end of the boss portion 3231c and meshing with the second rotary decorative body gear 3242 Includes a 1e, the.

  In addition, the upper back movable main body base 3231 penetrates back and forth in the right half disk-shaped portion, and has a plurality of openings 3231f in which the first LED 3234a of the back upper decorative substrate 3234 faces forward, and the outer periphery of the disk-shaped portion. In the vicinity of the first rotation support hole 3231d, a plurality of cylindrical members projecting forward from positions at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on a circumference of a predetermined radius centered on the first rotation support hole 3231d, and on which the decorative body 3246 on the back is rotatably mounted. A support pin 3231g, an immersion stopper 3231h projecting forward in the vicinity of each support pin 3231g and restricting a rotating end of the back upper-side outset decorative body 3246 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, and a support pin 3231g. An appearance stopper 323 that protrudes forward in the vicinity and regulates a rotation end of the back upper and lower concealed decorative body 3246 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. It includes a i, a.

  The back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 has an outer shape formed in a deformed polygonal shape, and is formed larger than the right half disk-shaped portion of the back upper movable body base 3231. The back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 is provided with a square spiral decoration, and is formed of a colored translucent translucent portion and a metal opaque plating layer. Parts. The first upper back rotary member 3232 protrudes rearward from the center of the rear surface in a columnar shape, and is rotatably inserted into the first rotation support hole 3231d of the upper rear main body base 3231; The uniaxial portion 3232a includes a second rotation support hole 3232b that penetrates back and forth at an eccentric position and that rotatably mounts the second upper back decoration 3233. The first rotating decorative body gear 3241 is attached to the rear end of the first shaft portion 3232a of the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232. In addition, the second rotation support hole 3232b is rotatably inserted into the second shaft portion 3233a of the back upper second rotary decorative body 3233.

  The back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 has a deformed polygonal outer shape and is formed smaller than the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232. More specifically, the back upper second rotary decorative body 3233 is formed to have a diameter approximately half of the diameter of the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232. The back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 has an angular spiral decoration, and is made of a colored translucent translucent portion and a metallic opaque plating layer. Parts. The back upper second rotary decorative body 3233 has a second shaft portion 3233a that protrudes rearward from the center of the rear surface in a columnar shape and is rotatably inserted into the second rotary support hole 3232b of the rear upper first rotary decorative body 3232. Have. The second rotating decorative body gear 3242 is attached to the rear end of the second shaft portion 3233a of the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233.

  The upper back decoration substrate 3234 irradiates light in a direction away from the boss portion 3231c (first rotation support hole 3231d) of the upper back movable main body base 3231 with a plurality of first LEDs 3234a capable of irradiating light forward. A plurality of possible second LEDs 3234b. The plurality of first LEDs 3234a and the second LEDs 3234b are respectively mounted on the front surface. Further, the upper back decoration board 3234 includes a flat cable 3234c connected to the back upper relay board 3219 of the back lifting unit 3210. The flat cable 3234c is sandwiched between the upper back movable main body base 3231 and the base cover 3250.

  The plurality of first LEDs 3234a of the back upper decorative substrate 3234 are in a state of facing forward from the plurality of openings 3231f of the back upper movable body base 3231 when assembled to the upper back movable body unit 3230, respectively. By the LED 3234a, light can be emitted from the rear side of the first upper back decoration 3232 and the second upper back decoration 3233 to make them emit light.

  The plurality of second LEDs 3234b of the back upper decorative substrate 3234 are in the vicinity of the respective support pins 3231g of the back upper movable body base 3231 (with the first rotation support hole 3231d as the center) when assembled to the upper back movable body unit 3230. (Near the counterclockwise direction). The second LED 3234b emits light in a state in which the back upper inset decorative body 3246 is partially protruded, so that the second LED 3234b protrudes outside the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 in the inset decorative portion 3246b of the back upper inset decorative body 3246. 158 can be made to emit light (see FIGS. 158 (b) and 159).

  The speed change relay gear 3237 has an input gear portion 3237a formed to have a larger diameter than the rotary drive gear 3236 and the second relay gear 3239, and an output gear portion 3237b having a smaller diameter than the second relay gear 3239 and to the rotary drive gear 3236. They have the same diameter. The first relay gear 3238 is formed to have the same diameter as the input gear portion 3237a of the transmission relay gear 3237. The second relay gear 3239 is formed to have the same diameter as the third relay gear 3240 and the first rotary decorative body gear 3241.

  Each of the plurality of back upper and lower decorative bodies 3246 is formed in the same shape. The plurality of back and forth infested decorative bodies 3246 are provided with a first infested decorative body 3246A, a second infested decorative body 3246B, a third infested decorative body 3246C, a fourth infested decorative body 3246D, and a fifth infested decorative body 3246E. ing. The back upper and lower decorative body 3246 penetrates back and forth and is rotatably mounted by inserting the support pins 3231g of the back upper movable main body base 3231. The base 3246a extends outward from the base 3246a. A protrusion decoration part 3246b on which a mold decoration is formed, a protrusion part 3246c extending from the base part 3246a in a direction different from that of the protrusion decoration part 3246b, and a columnar protrusion protruding forward from the tip of the protrusion part 3246c. Contact portion 3246d. The back and forth decorative body 3246 is made of a transparent member, and a part of the decorative part 3246b is decorated with a plating layer having a metallic luster. In addition, the back-upside-out decorative body 3246 includes, on the rear surface thereof, a triangular cross section protruding rearward, extending in an arc shape around the base portion 3246a, and a plurality of lens portions 3246e formed concentrically. I have.

  In the state in which the back-upside-out decorative body 3246 is assembled to the back-upside movable main body unit 3230, it is assembled so that the up-and-down decoration part 3246b is located between the immersion stopper 3231h and the appearance stopper 3231i in the back-upside movable body base 3231. It is in a state of being in contact with the immersion stopper 3231h of the upper back movable main body base 3231 by the urging force of the return spring 3249 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front (see FIG. 155). In this state, most of the back-side up / down decorative body 3246 is located right behind the back-upper first rotary decorative body 3232, and cannot be seen from the front (state of the immersion position).

  The abutment portion 3246d of the back upper appearance decoration member 3246 can be brought into contact with the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 attached to the rear side of the back upper first rotary decoration member 3232, By contacting the first cam member 3247 or the second cam member 3248 that has moved around due to the rotation of the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232, the base portion 3246a (the back upper movable main body) is opposed to the urging force of the return spring 3249. The support pin 3231g of the base 3231 is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the entire back and forth decorative body 3246 is rotated in the clockwise direction. It moves further outward, and becomes a state visible from the front (state of the appearance position). In addition, when the back and forth decorative body 3246 rotates vigorously in the clockwise direction, the appearing and stopping decorative portion 3246b comes into contact with the emergence stopper 3231i of the back upper movable main body base 3231, whereby the clockwise rotation is further performed. Is regulated. Then, when the contact between the contact portion 3246d and the first cam member 3247 or the second cam member 3248 is released, the back upper and lower decorative body 3246 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the urging force of the return spring 3249. Then, it returns to the initial immersion position.

  When assembled on the back upper movable main body unit 3230, the back upper appearance decoration body 3246 is disposed forward of the upper back decoration board 3234, and is rotated about the base 3246a to thereby make the appearance decoration part 3246b. Is moved outward from the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 in front view, the light from the corresponding second LED 3234b of the back upper decorative board 3234 is applied to the rear surface of the appearing / decorating decorative portion 3246b. ing. More specifically, when the back and forth decorative body 3246 is in the appearing position, the appearing and decorating part 3246b is located in front of the light irradiation direction of the second LED 3234b when viewed from the front, and the rear surface of the appearing and reflecting decorative part 3246b (lens part). 3246e) is irradiated with light from the second LED 3234b obliquely from behind. The light irradiating obliquely rearward to the lens portion 3246e composed of a plurality of triangular ridges is refracted on the rear surface of the appearing / decorating decorative portion 3246b and enters the appearing / decorating decorative portion 3246b. Partially radiated forward from the front surface after being diffusely reflected between (see FIG. 159). As a result, when viewed from the front (from the player side), the portion of the back-and-forth appearing decorative body 3246 that protrudes outside the back-and-forth first rotating decorative body 3232 of the appearing decorative part 3246b appears to be shining, The part can be decorated with light.

  The first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 rotate the appearing / decorating decorative portion 3246b of the back upper / herb decorative member 3246 between a retracted position invisible from the player side and an appearing position invisible from the player side. Things. The first cam member 3247 includes a flat plate-like rotation detecting piece 3247a extending rearward. When the rotation detecting piece 3247a is detected by the upper back rotation detecting sensor 3245 attached to the upper back movable main body base 3231, it is possible to detect the rotational position of the first upper back decoration 3232. In a state where the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are assembled to the back upper movable main body unit 3230, a plurality of the first cam members 3247 and the second cam members 3248 are rotated by rotating the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 (in a counterclockwise direction in front view). The upper and lower decorative members 3246 can be rotated (in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front) by contacting any one of the contact portions 3246d of the upper and lower decorative members 3246.

  In addition, the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are circumferentially arranged at a predetermined angle (about 156 degrees) on a circumference of a predetermined radius centered on the first shaft portion 3232a of the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232. ) Mounted separately. More specifically, the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are separated from each other at an angle different from the angle (72 degrees) at which the plurality (five) of the upper and lower decorative members 3246 are separated from each other. It is attached to one-turn decorative body 3232. Thereby, the timing at which the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 abut on the contact portion 3246d of the back-side up / down decorative body 3246 can be made different, and the two back-upside-out pop-up decorative bodies 3246 are different. It can appear at the timing.

  The back upper movable effect unit 3200 has a back elevation unit 3210 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and to the left of the center in front view, and is provided at the lower right corner of the back elevation unit 3210. The back upper movable main unit 3230 is rotatably attached to the elevating support shaft 3212. More specifically, in the upper back movable main body unit 3230, the shaft hole 3231a on the left end side is rotatably attached to the lifting support shaft 3212 of the back lifting unit 3210, and the lower side of the shaft hole 3231a Is connected to the drive pin 3216c of the elevating link gear member 3216 in the back elevating unit 3210 via the elevating link member 3217.

  In the back upper movable main body unit 3230, the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 is rotatably attached to the center of the right half disk-shaped portion of the back upper movable body base 3231, and the back upper second rotation. A decorative body 3233 is rotatably attached to the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 at a position eccentric from the center thereof. More specifically, the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 has a first shaft portion 3232a extending rearward and rotatably attached to the first rotary support hole 3231d of the back upper movable main body base 3231. The first shaft portion 3232a has a rear end provided with a rotation from a back upper rotation drive motor 3235, a rotation drive gear 3236, a transmission relay gear 3237, a first relay gear 3238, a second relay gear 3239, and a third relay gear 3240. The first rotary decorative body gear 3241 transmitted via the.

  On the other hand, the back upper second rotary decorative body 3233 has a second shaft portion 3233a extending rearward and rotatably attached to the second rotary support hole 3232b of the rear upper first rotary decorative body 3232. At the rear end of the second shaft portion 3233a, a second rotary decorative body gear 3242 meshing with the fixed gear portion 3231e of the upper back movable main body base 3231 is attached.

  In the upper back movable main body unit 3230, the upper back appearing decorative body 3246 is rotatably attached to a plurality (five) of support pins 3231g projecting forward in the upper back movable main body base 3231. Is urged by a return spring 3249 to rotate counterclockwise in front view.

[5-9c-1. Direction by a movable production unit on the back]
Next, an effect using the back upper movable effect unit 3200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 153 to 159 and the like. FIG. 153 (a) is a front view of the back upper movable effect unit showing the upper back movable body unit in a normal rising position, and FIG. 153 (b) is a lower position where the upper back movable body unit is rotated. It is a front view of a back upper movable effect unit. FIG. 154 is a front view of the back upper movable main unit schematically showing rotation of the back upper first rotating decorative body and revolving of the back upper second rotating decorative body. FIG. 155 is a front view of the upper back movable main unit schematically showing the movement of the plurality of upper and lower decorative objects and the LEDs on the upper back decoration board. FIG. 156 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back upper second rotating decorative body and the back upper appearing / decorating decorative body in the back upper movable main body unit according to the rotation angle of the back upper first rotating decorative body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back upper second rotating decorative body following back 156 according to the rotation angle of a back upper first rotating decorative body. FIG. 158 (a) is a front view of the back upper movable main body unit shown together with the LED of the back upper decorative board in a state where the back upper first rotating decorative body is rotated 45 degrees in a counterclockwise direction from a normal state, (B) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the TT line in (a). FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the back upper and lower decorative body at the appearance position and the second LED of the back upper decorative board by enlarging the portion of arrow A in FIG. 158.

  In the normal state, the back upper movable main unit 3230 extends left and right on the right side of the back ascent / descent unit 3210 when viewed from the front in the normal state, and the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 and The back upper second rotary decorative body 3233 is in an ascending position in which it is moving upward. In the state of the ascending position, the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 are located above the main effect display device 1600 in front view, and the frame of the center role item 2500. Is located on the right side of the logo decoration unit 2550 inside, and is visible from the player side (front) (see FIGS. 129 and 135). In a normal state, the lifting detection piece 3216d of the lifting link gear member 3216 is detected by the back lifting detection sensor 3220.

  In a normal (up position) state in which the upper back movable main unit 3230 extends substantially horizontally, the upper first rotary decorative body 3232 and the second upper rotary attached to the right end side of the upper back movable main unit 3230. Due to the weight (self-weight) of the decorative body 3233 and the like, a force is applied to rotate the right end side downward (clockwise as viewed from the front) around the lifting support shaft 3212 on the left end side. . Also, in the back upper movable main unit 3230, the action pin 3231b attached to the lifting link member 3217 of the back lifting unit 3210 is disposed below the lifting shaft hole 3231a (the lifting support shaft 3212). The action pin 3231b attempts to move leftward due to the force of the upper back movable main unit 3230 rotating in the clockwise direction. Accordingly, the lifting / lowering link member 3217 attached to the operation pin 3231b is pressed leftward via the operation pin 3231b by the force of the upper rear movable main unit 3230 rotating in the clockwise direction. Power is acting.

  In the state of the ascending position, the extension line connecting the centers of the drive hole 3217a and the operation hole 3217b of the ascending / descending link member 3217 passes above the center of the ascending / descending link gear member 3216. By the leftward force acting on the member 3217, the lifting link gear member 3216 tries to rotate in the direction in which the drive pin 3216c inserted into the drive hole 3217a moves upward (counterclockwise in front view). Will be done. At this time, since the extending portion 3216b of the lifting link gear member 3216 is in contact with the upper stopper portion 3218a of the stopper member 3218, the lifting link gear member 3216 can further rotate in the counterclockwise direction. Instead, the rotation of the lifting link gear member 3216 is regulated and maintained in a stopped state.

  As a result, the upper back movable main unit 3230 does not rotate in the clockwise direction around the lifting / lowering support shaft 3212 due to its own weight, but is maintained (locked) in the raised position. Further, in this state, a force of the back upper movable body unit 3230 due to its own weight trying to rotate acts on the upper stopper portion 3218a of the stopper member 3218 via the extending portion 3216b of the lifting link gear member 3216. Since it does not act on the lifting relay gear 3215 side meshing with the operation gear portion 3216a of the link gear member 3216, it also acts on the back lifting driving motor 3213 via the lifting relay gear 3215 and the lifting driving gear 3214. Never. Therefore, in the normal state (state of the ascending position), it is not necessary to drive the back-up / down drive motor 3213, and the load on the back-up / down drive motor 3213 can be reduced.

  In the back upper movable main body unit 3230, the rotation detection piece 3247a of the first cam member 3247 attached to the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 is in a state where it is detected by the back upper rotation detection sensor 3245. The rotation of the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 has stopped. Further, in a normal state, a plurality (five) of the upper and lower decorative members 3246 on the rear upper movable main body unit 3230 are attached to the rear side of the first upper rotary decorative member 3232 by the first cam member 3247 and It is in a state of not contacting (contacting) any of the second cam members 3248. In this normal state, the plurality of back upper and lower decorative bodies 3246 abut against the immersion stoppers 3231h, each of which regulates the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view by the biasing force of the return spring 3249. It is in the state of the immersion position immediately behind the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232. Therefore, the plurality of back upper and lower decorative objects 3246 are invisible from the player side (front). Further, in the plurality of back-up and out embellishment decorative bodies 3246 each in the immersion position, each contact portion 3246d has the first cam member 3247 and the second It is located on the orbit of the two cam member 3248.

  In this normal state, when the lifting / lowering link gear member 3216 is rotated clockwise in front view by driving the back lifting / lowering drive motor 3213, the drive pin 3216c revolves downward and to the left. Therefore, the revolving motion of the drive pin 3216c pulls the lifting link member 3217 attached to the drive pin 3216c to the left. When the lifting link member 3217 is pulled to the left, the action pin 3231b of the upper back movable body base 3231 of the upper back movable body unit 3230 attached to the action hole 3217b of the lifting link member 3217 is pulled to the left. As a result, the upper back movable main unit 3230 rotates around the support shaft 3212 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front.

  Then, when the upper back movable main body base 3231 of the upper back movable main body unit 3230 abuts on the lower stopper portion 3211a of the elevating unit base 3211, the driving of the lower elevating drive motor 3213 is stopped, and the clockwise direction is further increased. Rotation is restricted. In this state, the upper back movable main body unit 3230 extends substantially up and down, and the lower upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the lower upper second rotating decorative body 3233 move to the lower position where they have moved downward. (See FIG. 153 (b)).

  Since the shock absorbing material 3221 is attached to the lower stopper portion 3211a, even if the upper movable main unit 3230 rotates (moves) vigorously from the raised position to the lowered position, the shock is alleviated to reduce the impact. Damage to the upper movable main unit 3230 can be avoided. Further, the impact absorbing member 3221 can prevent the back upper movable main unit 3230 from rebounding at the lower stopper portion 3211a, and can reliably stop at the lowered position.

  In a state in which the upper back movable main body unit 3230 is moved to the lowered position, the upper back first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 are positioned at the front center of the main effect display device 1600 (the game area 5a in front view). (See FIG. 203). Thereby, since the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 are easily visible from the player side, the interest of the player is changed to the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the rear upper second rotating decorative body 3232. The decorative body 3233 can be strongly attracted, and at the same time, it is possible to enjoy those decorations and movable effects described later.

  In this lowered position, when the upper back rotation drive motor 3235 is driven to rotate the first rotary decorative body gear 3241 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the first upper back decoration gear 3241 is rotated through the first shaft portion 3232a. The rotating decorative body 3232 rotates in the counterclockwise direction. When the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 rotates about the first shaft portion 3232a (first rotation support hole 3231d), the second shaft penetrating the first shaft portion 3232a eccentrically forward and backward. The rotation support hole 3232b revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a. In this second rotation support hole 3232b, the second shaft portion 3233a of the back upper second rotary decorative body 3233 is rotatably attached, so that the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 is centered on the first shaft portion 3232a. , The back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a via the second shaft portion 3233a.

  When the back upper second rotary decorative body 3233 revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a, the second rotary decorative body gear 3242 mounted on the second shaft portion 3233a of the rear upper second rotary decorative body 3233 also becomes the first rotary decorative body gear 3242. It revolves around the shaft portion 3232a. Since the second rotary decorative body gear 3242 meshes with the fixed gear portion 3231e of the upper back movable main body base 3231 formed coaxially with the first shaft portion 3232a, the second rotary decorative body gear 3242 is engaged. When 3242 revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a (fixed gear portion 3231e), the second rotary decorative body gear 3242 rolls along the outer periphery of the fixed gear portion 3231e due to the engagement of the gears. The rotating decorative body gear 3242 rotates (rotates) about the second shaft portion 3233a (see FIG. 154). Accordingly, when the back upper rotation decoration body 3232 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back upper rotation drive motor 3235, the back upper second rotation decoration body 3233 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while rotating the first shaft portion. It will revolve around 3232a.

  In the back upper movable main body unit 3230, since the two first cam members 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are attached to the back side of the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232, the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 rotates. Then, the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 also rotate (revolve around the first shaft portion 3232a). When the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 revolve, the two back diagonal back and forth decorative bodies 3246 of the plurality (five) of the back and forth decorative bodies 3246 at the immersion position according to the revolving positions. By pressing against the contact portion 3246d against the contact portion 3246d of the return spring 3249 and pressing the contact portion 3246d against the urging force of the return spring 3249, the back upper and lower decorative body 3246 is rotated about the support pin 3231g, and the retractable decorative portion The 3246b can be moved to an appearance position outside the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 in a front view (see FIG. 155 and the like).

  The outer periphery of each of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 is formed in a rhombus shape, and the contact portion 3246d slides along the outer periphery of the rhombus with the rotation of the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232. Move. The movement of the contact portion 3246d with respect to the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 will be described in detail. After abutting near the front end of the facing side and sliding rearward along that side, it turns around near the rear end of the side and slides forward. Then, after moving from the front end in the rotation direction of the outer periphery of the rhombus to the side facing outward, slide rearward along the side facing outward and separate from the rear end of the rear side facing outward. Make a great move.

  The movement of the back-side up / down decorative body 3246 due to the rotation of the back-side first rotary decorative body 3232 will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 and 157. (A) to (c) of FIG. 156 and (d) to (f) of FIG. 157 show the counterclockwise rotation of the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 from the normal state (the state of FIG. 156 (a)) in front view. In a direction of 15 degrees. First, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 156 (a), the rotation detection piece 3247a of the first cam member 3247 is detected by the back upper rotation detection sensor 3245, and the back upper rotation drive motor 3235 is driven (the upper rear The rotation of the single-rotation decorative body 3232) is stopped, and each of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 is separated from the abutting portion 3246d of the plurality of back-side up / down decorative bodies 3246. In this state, the first cam member 3247 has approached the contact part 3246d of the first appearance decoration 3246A between the respective contact parts 3246d of the first appearance decoration 3246A and the fifth appearance decoration 3246E. Position. In addition, the second cam member 3248 is located at a substantially intermediate position between the respective contact portions 3246d of the third emerged decorative body 3246C and the fourth emerged decorative body 3246D.

  When the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction together with the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 from this normal state, first, the first cam member 3247 is firstly retracted. The second cam member 3248 comes into contact with the contact portion 3246d of the body 3246A, and then the second cam member 3248 comes into contact with the contact portion 3246d of the fourth protrusion decorative member 3246D arranged diagonally to the first protrusion decorative member 3246A. Will be in contact.

  In the state where the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 is rotated 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state (the state of FIG. 156 (b)), the first cam member 3247 is the first retractable decorative body. The contact portion 3246d of the first cam member 3247 is in contact with the contact portion 3246d of the first cam member 3247 such that the contact portion 3246d slides backward in the middle of the front side of the first cam member 3247 facing the inside of the rhombus. . As a result, the first retractable decorative body 3246A rotates to some extent clockwise around the support pin 3231g from the retracted position against the urging force of the return spring 3249, and the first retractable decorative body 3246b A part protrudes outside the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232. On the other hand, the second cam member 3248 is in a state immediately after the second cam member 3248 comes into contact with the contact portion 3246d of the fourth appearing / decorating decorative body 3246D, and slides backward near the front end of the front side facing the inside of the outer periphery of the rhombus. The contact portion 3246d is in contact so as to move. Thus, the fourth appearing / decorating decorative body 3246D starts rotating clockwise around the support pin 3231g from the retracted position against the urging force of the return spring 3249.

  In a state where the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 is further rotated 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of FIG. 156 (b) (the state of FIG. 156 (c)), the first cam member 3247 has a diamond-shaped shape. The abutment portion 3246d abuts on the front side of the outer circumference, which faces inward, after sliding backward and then turning back and sliding forward near the front end of that side. Accordingly, the first appearing decorative body 3246A is further rotated clockwise around the support pin 3231g against the biasing force of the return spring 3249, and is more than half of the star-shaped appearing decorative part 3246b. Project from the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 to the outside. On the other hand, the contact portion 3246d of the second cam member 3248 is in contact with the second cam member 3248 so as to slide rearward in the middle of the front side facing the inside of the outer periphery of the rhombus. As a result, the fourth appearing decorative body 3246D rotates clockwise around the support pin 3231g to some extent against the biasing force of the return spring 3249, and a part of the star-shaped appearing decorative part 3246b is removed. It protrudes outside the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232.

  Subsequently, in a state where the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 has been further rotated 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of FIG. 156 (c) (the state of FIG. 157 (d)), the first cam member 3247 The abutting portion 3246d is abutted so as to slide rearward in the middle of the outwardly facing front side of the outer periphery of the rhombus. As a result, the first retractable decorative body 3246A further rotates clockwise around the support pin 3231g against the urging force of the return spring 3249, and moves to the appearance stopper 3231i of the upper back movable body base 3231. It is in the state of the abutted appearance position, and almost all of the star-shaped emergence decorative portions 3246b protrude outside the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232. On the other hand, after the second cam member 3248 slides rearward on the front side facing the inside of the diamond-shaped outer periphery, the second cam member 3248 turns back, and the contact portion 3246d abuts so as to slide forward near the front end of that side. I have. Thereby, the fourth emergence decorative body 3246D further rotates clockwise around the support pin 3231g against the urging force of the return spring 3249, and most of the star-shaped emergence decorative part 3246b is placed on the back. It protrudes outside the upper first rotary decoration 3232.

  Further, in the state where the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 is further rotated 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of FIG. 157 (d) (the state of FIG. 157 (e)), the first cam member 3247 The contact portion 3246d is separated rearward from the outer side of the outer periphery of the rhombus. As a result, the first retractable decorative body 3246A is rotated counterclockwise around the support pin 3231g by the urging force of the return spring 3249, and is immersed in contact with the immersion stopper 3231h of the back upper movable body base 3231. In this state, the star-shaped appearing / decorating decorative portion 3246b is located inside the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back. On the other hand, the contact portion 3246d is in contact with the second cam member 3248 so as to slide rearward in the middle of the front side of the diamond-shaped outer periphery facing outward. Accordingly, the fourth emergence decorative body 3246D further rotates clockwise around the support pin 3231g against the urging force of the return spring 3249, and comes into contact with the appearance stopper 3231i of the upper movable main body base 3231. It is in the state of the contacting appearance position, and most of the star-shaped appearing / decorating decorative portions 3246b protrude outside the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232.

  Furthermore, in a state where the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 is further rotated 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of FIG. 157 (e) (the state of FIG. 157 (f)), the first cam member 3247 is It is in contact with the contact part 3246d of the next second appearance decoration body 3246B (disposed diagonally with respect to the fourth appearance decoration body 3246D), and near the front end of the front side facing the inside of the outer periphery of the rhombus. The contact portion 3246d is in contact so as to slide rearward in FIG. As a result, the second retractable decorative body 3246B starts rotating clockwise around the support pin 3231g from the retracted position against the urging force of the return spring 3249. On the other hand, in the second cam member 3248, the abutment portion 3246d of the fourth appearing and decorating body 3246D is separated rearward from the outer side of the outer periphery of the rhombus, and the fourth appearing and decorating body 3246D and the fifth appearing and decorating body 3246E are arranged. Are located near the middle between the contact portions 3246d. As a result, the fourth retractable decorative body 3246D is rotated counterclockwise around the support pin 3231g by the urging force of the return spring 3249, and is immersed in contact with the immersion stopper 3231h of the upper back movable main body base 3231. It is in the position state, and the star-shaped emergence decoration part 3246b is located inside the back upper first rotating decoration body 3232.

  by the way, The upper movable body unit 3230 is FIG. 155, As shown in FIGS. 158 and 159, On the back upper decorative board 3234, Because it has a plurality of first LEDs 3234a that irradiate light forward, By causing the plurality of first LEDs 3234a to emit light as appropriate, The back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 can be illuminated. When rotating the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233, When the first LED 3234a of the back upper decorative substrate 3234 is appropriately made to emit light, The degree of overlap between the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233, By the opaque part of the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233, It is possible to show the player a glittering light-emitting decoration.

  In addition, the upper back decorative substrate 3234 is configured to irradiate a plurality of second radially outward light around the first rotation support hole 3231d in the vicinity of each support pin 3231g of the upper back movable body base 3231. Since the LED 3234b is provided, as shown in FIG. 158, the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction, and the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 move the back of the immersion position. When the upper and lower decoration 3246 is moved to the appearance position, the second LED 3234b corresponding to the upper and lower decoration 3246 is caused to emit light, so that the upper and lower decoration 3246 (emergence decoration 3246b) at the appearance position. Can be decorated with light.

  More specifically, when the second LED 3234b of the corresponding upper back decoration board 3234 is caused to emit light to the upper back decoration body 3246 at the appearance position, a part of the light diffused from the second LED 3234b is made to appear. At the rear side of the portion 3246b, a plurality of ridges having a triangular cross section can be reflected and refracted forward by a lens portion 3246e arranged concentrically, and light that has entered the interior of the embossed decoration portion 3246b is irregularly reflected inside. After that, a part is radiated forward, and the star-shaped emergence decoration part 3246b can be light-emission-decorated (see FIGS. 158 (b) and 159). Accordingly, the embossed decoration portion 3246b of the back upper emerged decorative body 3246 positioned outside the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 (back upper decorative substrate 3234) can be light-emitting decorated. The appearance decoration part 3246b in which the 3234 is not arranged is illuminated and decorated, so that the player can be wondered, the player can be entertained, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  As described above, according to the back upper movable rendering unit 3200, the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotary decorative body 3233 are moved by the back raising and lowering drive motor 3213 between the raised position and the lowered position. By moving the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 to the lowering position which is the center of the game area 5a, the interest of the player can be changed. The body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 can be strongly attracted.

  Further, in a state where the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 are in the lowered position, the back upper rotating decorative body 3232 is moved in the counterclockwise direction in front view by the back upper rotating drive motor 3235. When rotated, the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 arranged on the front side of the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 rotates counterclockwise around the first shaft portion 3232a while rotating in the counterclockwise direction. In addition to being able to revolve in the direction, a plurality of back upper appearance decoration bodies 3246 (emergence decoration parts 3246b) arranged on the rear side of the upper back first rotation decoration body 3232 are different from each other at different timings. 3232.

  More specifically, when the back upper rotary decoration body 3232 is rotated by the back upper rotation drive motor 3235, the back upper second rotary decoration body 3233 rotates on the front side of the rotating back upper first rotary decoration body 3232. Because of the revolving motion, the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 allow the player to see the motion of swirling feeling. In addition, when the back upper rotation decoration body 3232 is rotated by the back upper rotation drive motor 3235, the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 rotate together with the back upper first rotation decoration body 3232, and the first cam member 3248 rotates. Since the distance from the center of rotation of the outer peripheral surface of each of the 3247 and the second cam member 3248 to which the abutting portion 3246d of the back and forth decorative body 3246 abuts changes, the first cam member 3247 and the The contact portion 3246d is guided in a direction away from the center of rotation by the second cam member 3248, so that the back upper and lower decorative body 3246 is opposed to the base portion 3246a via the contact portion 3246d against the urging force of the return spring 3249. Can be moved to the appearance position outside the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back side in front view, and it is rotating. It can show the movements as above the first rotary decorations plurality of back on infested ornamental body outside the 3232 3246 (retractable decorative portion 3246B) infested with Pyokopyoko the player.

  Further, when the second LED 3234b of the back upper decorative substrate 3234 emits light in a state where the halo decorative portion 3246b of the back upper halo decorative body 3246 is positioned outside the first upper rotatable decorative body 3232, the light is oblique. By irradiating the lens portion 3246e of the back and forth decorative body 3246 from behind, light incident from the lens portion 3246e is diffusely radiated and reflected forward inside the decorative portion 3246b, and is partially radiated forward. When viewed from the player's side, the appearing / retreating decorative portion 3246b protruding to the outside of the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 appears to be shining, and the appearing / retreating decorative portion 3246b can be illuminated and decorated. The appearance of the appearing / decorating decorative body 3246 (appearing / decorating decorative portion 3246b) can be easily noticed. On the other hand, when the first LED 3234a of the back upper decoration substrate 3234 emits light, the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 moving in a swirling feeling can be made to emit light.

  As a result, it is possible to give the player a movable effect that feels like swirling and the stars scattering, and it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and to have something good for the player It is possible to make the user think that there is a chance, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the first LED 3234a and the second LED 3234b of the back upper decoration substrate 3234 emit light, the appearing / decorating decoration portion 3246b is illuminated by the brilliant swirling of the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 and the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232. The effect (movable effect and luminous effect) that makes the player feel like jumping out can be shown to the player, so that the player can see the effects of the movements of the plurality of decorative bodies and the light, and the effect is monotonous. Can prevent the player from getting tired of the game, and can give a strong impact to the player. Can be changed to a certainty, and the player can be greatly enjoyed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  As described above, according to the back upper movable rendering unit 3200, in the normal state, the back of the upper upper movable rendering unit 3200 is located at the ascending position on the upper right side of the main rendering display device 1600 near the periphery of the front-view game area 5a. A back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 rotatably attached to a back upper movable body base 3231 of the upper movable body unit 3230 is arranged in a state where its rotation is stopped. In this state, since the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 is arranged in front of the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232, the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 and the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 are separated. , And a plurality of (five) upper and lower back-and-forth decorative bodies 3246 are in the immersed position immediately behind the back-upper first rotary decorative body 3232 by the biasing force of the return spring 3249. Of the back upper and lower decorative body 3246 is blocked by the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and cannot be seen, and only the decoration by the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 and the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 is clearly shown. I can show you. In this state, when the first LED 3234a of the upper back decoration board 3234 emits light, a plurality of back upper and lower decorative bodies 3246, a back upper first rotating decorative body 3232, and a back upper first decoration 3246 located on the front side of the first LED 3234a. Since the two rotation decorations 3233 each have translucency, the light from the first LED 3234a can be radiated to the player side through the two rotation decorations 3233, and the second rotation decoration on the back seen from the player side. The body 3233 and the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 can be illuminated. Accordingly, the player can enjoy the decoration of the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 and the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232, and also decorates the periphery of the game area 5a to form the inside of the game area 5a ( The appearance of the pachinko machine 1) can be improved.

  Further, the back upper movable main body base 3231 to which the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232, the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233, and the plurality of back upper appearing / decorating decorative bodies 3246 are attached is mounted on the back of the back raising / lowering unit 3210. When moved from the ascending position to the descending position by the elevating drive motor 3213, the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 is located at the center of the game area 5a. The second rotating decorative body 3233 can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be attracted to the first upper rotating decorative body 3232 and the second upper rotating decorative body 3233. It is possible to make the user think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the first upper rotating decoration 3232 is rotated by the upper rotation driving motor 3235 and the first LED 3234a and the second LED 3234b of the upper decoration substrate 3234 emit light, the second upper rotating decoration 3233 and the second upper rotating decoration 3233 are rotated. An appearance (movable) in which the embossed decoration part 3246b is shining out from the brilliant swirl caused by the upper first rotating decorative body 3232, or the hammering decorative body 3426b is sucked shining into the brilliant swirl. Effects and luminous effects) can be shown to the player. As described above, when an effect is performed using the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233, the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232, the plurality of back upper appearing / decorating decorative bodies 3246, and the back upper decorative board 3234, in the conventional pachinko machine, It is possible to show the player the effects of the movements and lights of a plurality of decorative objects that cannot be seen, prevent the effects from becoming monotonous, and make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to the player A strong impact can be given, and a player's expectation of a game (the occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage) can be changed to a certainty. Can be done.

  In addition, a plurality of back upper appearance decorations 3246 (appearance decorations 3246b) appear at different timings outside the back upper first rotary decoration 3232 and are luminous decorated, so that a plurality of luminous decorated back upper appearances. The decoration 3246 brightens the area around the back upper first rotating decoration 3232, so that the player can be surely noticed that a plurality of back upper appearance decorations 3246 have appeared. In addition to being able to play reliably, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's sense of expectation for the game can be increased, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, since the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 can be illuminated and decorated, the first LED 3234a allows the back upper appearing / retracting decorative body 3246 to be in the immersion position. By illuminating the first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233, the player can make the player pay attention to the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233. In this state, the back upper rotating decoration body 3232 is rotated by the back upper rotation drive motor 3235 to make the back upper appearing / decorating decorative body 3246 appear, and the second LED 3234b emits the appearing / projecting decorative part 3246b of the back upper appearing / decorating decorative body 3246. By decorating, it is possible to surely show the appearance of the back and forth decorative body 3246 to the player, and to surely exert the above-described effects. It is possible.

  In addition, as described above, since the plurality of back upper inset decorative bodies 3246 that appear outside the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 can be light-emitting decorated, the back upper inset decorative bodies 3246 (inset decorative parts) that have appeared can be used. When the decoration 3246b) is illuminated, the back-upside-out decorative body 3246 performs luminous decoration despite the fact that the decorative board provided with the LED is not provided on the rear side of the back-upside-out decorative body 3246. , And the player's interest can be attracted to the back-and-forth appearing decorative body 3246 to enjoy the light-emitting decoration.

  Further, light from the second LED 3234b of the back upper decorative substrate 3234 attached to the back upper movable main body base 3231 is transmitted to the lens portion 3246e on the rear surface of the appearing and retracting decorative portion 3246b protruding outside the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232. Illuminating the decoration part 3246b, so that only the decoration body 3246 on the back is moved, so that the decoration substrate provided with the LED on the rear side of the decoration body 3246 on the back. Compared to the case of attaching the back side, the moving weight can be reduced, and the moving speed (appearing speed) of the back-side up / down decorative body 3246 can be relatively increased, so that the back-side up / down decorative body 3246 can be provided to the player. The movement (movable effect) of the decorative body 3246 can be enjoyed. In addition, since the upper back decoration board 3234 is not attached to the moving upper back decoration board 3246, even if the upper back decoration board 3246 is moved, the wiring of the back decoration board 3234 does not repeatedly bend and is not fatigued. In addition, disconnection can be prevented, and the back and forth decorative body 3246 can be reliably illuminated and decorated, and the disconnection can prevent the game from being interrupted and giving the player discomfort, It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  Further, when the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 is rotated, the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 revolves while rotating on the front side of the rotating back upper first rotating decorative body 3232, and the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 rotates. Since the illuminated decorative decoration part 3246b of the plurality of back and forth decorative decorations 3246 protrudes and emerges outside the rotary decoration 3232, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. In addition to this, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest. In addition, since the above-described operation and effect are achieved, the back upper second rotary decorative body 3233, the back upper, which can be suitably used in a gaming machine in which an effect indicating a special lottery result is executed, such as a pachinko machine, is executed. It is possible to provide an effect unit (an upper movable effect unit 3200) provided with the first rotary decorative body 3232, the plurality of back upper and lower decorative bodies 3246, and the upper back decorative substrate 3234.

  In addition, since the inward / outward decorative portion 3246b of the back and forth decorative body 3246 is made to protrude and retract by the rotation (revolution) of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248, in order to make the upper and lower back and forth decorative body 3246 protrude and protrude. It is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the first upper rotating decoration body 3232 and a driving means for rotating the back upper first rotating body 3232, and it is possible to secure a space corresponding to the driving means. The rotating decorative body 3232 and the back and forth decorative body 3246 can be enlarged, and the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back and above visible decorative body 3246 are conspicuous so that the effect can be sufficiently exhibited. Can be. Further, since it is not necessary to provide a driving means for driving the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232, the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233, and the back upper appearing / decorating decorative body 3246, respectively, the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 is not required. In addition, the load of control can be reduced in the movable effect using the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 and the back upper appearing / decorating decorative body 3246, and it is possible to prevent the overload and surely enjoy the movable effect.

  Furthermore, since the emergence timings of the embossed decoration portions 3246b of the plurality of back upper eaves decorative bodies 3246 are made different depending on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248, respectively, It is possible to reduce the monotonous movement by changing the movement of the 3232 and the plurality of appearing and garnishing decoration portions 3246b, and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the back upper and lower decorative body 3246 is urged toward the retracted position by the return spring 3249, the outer peripheral surfaces of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are urged by the urging force of the return spring 3249. The contact portion 3246d of the up-and-down decoration 3246d can be made to be in contact with the surface, and the configuration can be simplified as compared with the case where the guide portion for guiding the contact portion 3246d is a groove or a ridge. It is possible to reduce the increase in the cost required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 and to reduce the space required for the mechanism for the emergence of the decorative member 3246 on the back to facilitate securing a space. The back upper first rotating decoration 3232 and the back upper appearing / decorating decoration 3246 can be enlarged to more easily attract the player's interest.

  In addition, by rotating the back and forth decorative body 3246 around the base 3246a, the haunting decorative part 3246b is made to protrude and disappear, and since the haunting decorative part 3246b protrudes while drawing a locus of an arc, Since the visible position of the appearing / decorating decorative portion 3246b appearing outside the one-turn decorative body 3232 is changed, the trajectory of light extending in an arc by the appearing / decorating decorative portion 3246b which is illuminated and decorated can be shown to the player, The movement of the back upper appearing / decorating decorative body 3246 can be noticed to make the player notice the movement easily, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. A sense of unity can be imparted to the movement of the decorative portion 3246b, and dynamic movement between the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the plurality of appearing and disappearing decorative portions 3246b is achieved. With the movable effect can be shown to the player who can give a strong impact to the player, to delight the player can be achieved reliably effects described above.

  Furthermore, since the haunting decorative portion 3246b of the back-upside-out appearing decorative body 3246 is made to protrude and emerge by rotating, compared to the case where the back-upside-out appearing decorative body 3246 is slid, it is more likely to appear and disappear (slid). Such resistance can be reduced. Therefore, when the back upper rotation decoration body 3232 is rotated by the driving of the back upper rotation drive motor 3235, the protrusion decoration part 3246b of the back upper emergence decoration body 3246 can be reliably caused to protrude and retract, and the effect of the movable effect is produced. Can be reliably exhibited. In addition, since the occurrence of a problem in which the back-upside-out appearing decorative body 3246 does not move due to the resistance (sliding resistance) can be reduced, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the problem can be prevented, and the interruption of the game causes the player to stop. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, since the moving range of the decorative body 3246 that appears and retracts on the rear side can be regulated by the immersion stopper 3231h and the appearance stopper 3231i provided on the movable body base 3231 on the rear side, the decorative body 3246 that appears and retracts on the rear side can be quickly moved in and out. Also, it does not move beyond the immersion position or the appearance position, and it is possible to surely move the back upper and lower decorative body 3246 between the immersion position and the appearance position.

  Furthermore, when the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotary decorative body 3233 are respectively rotated, since the respective outer peripheries are formed in a non-circular, deformed polygonal shape, the Can be clearly recognized as being rotated, and the player can pay attention to the rotation (movable effect) of the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233. In addition, when the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotary decorative body 3233 are rotated, their respective axes (first shaft portions 3232a and second shaft portions 3233a) are eccentric to each other. Therefore, it can be seen to the player that they are spinning while rattling, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-9d. Behind the scenes movable unit]
Next, the rear movable effect unit 3300 in the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 160 to 168. FIG. 160 is a front view of the back rear movable effect unit in the back unit, FIG. 161 is a perspective view of the back rear movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 162 is a back rear movable effect unit of the back unit. It is the perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear movable production unit, which is disassembled into a fixed unit side and a turning table side, as viewed from the front. FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled device viewed from behind. FIG. 165 is a perspective view of the turning table side of the back rear movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 166 is a perspective view of the turning table side of the rear rear movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 167 is an exploded perspective view of the turning table side of the back rear movable effecting unit for each main configuration viewed from the front, and FIG. 168 is an exploded view of the turning table side of the rear rear movable effect unit for each main configuration. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the swash plate seen from behind.

  The back rear movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the front side of the rear wall in the back box 3010. The back rear movable rendering unit 3300 includes a back rear central movable rendering unit 3350 attached to the back box 3010, and a back rear left movable rendering unit 3400 mounted on the swivel table 3380 of the rear rear central movable rendering unit 3350 with a left and right separation. A back rear right movable rendering unit 3500, a back rear upper movable rendering unit 3600 attached above the rear left movable rendering unit 3400 and the rear right movable rendering unit 3500 in the swivel table 3380 of the rear central movable rendering unit 3350, A rear rear lower movable effect unit 3700 attached to the lower side of the rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the rear rear right movable effect unit 3500 of the turning table 3380 of the rear rear center movable effect unit 3350. The back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 includes a sub effect display device 3640 having a display screen smaller than the display screen of the main effect display device 1600.

[5-9e. Ura-go center movable production unit]
Next, the rear center movable effect unit 3350 in the rear movable effect unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 160 to 172. FIG. 169 is an explanatory view showing the turning configuration of the turning table in the back rear center movable effect unit in the front view of the back rear movable effect unit. The back rear center movable rendering unit 3350 is attached to the front side of the rear wall in the back box 3010, and the display screen of the main rendering display device 1600 attached to the back side of the back box 3010 passes through the frame from the front. It is formed in a frame shape so that it can be visually recognized. The back rear center movable effecting unit 3350 is composed of a fixed unit 3360 mounted in the back box 3010 and an annular rotating table mounted on the front side of the fixed unit 3360 so as to be rotatable around a longitudinally extending axis. 3380. The back rear center movable rendering unit 3350 has a back rear left movable rendering unit 3400, a back rear right movable rendering unit 3500, a back rear upper movable rendering unit 3600, and a back rear lower movable rendering unit 3700 attached to a turning table 3380. Thus, they can be turned around an axis extending back and forth around the center of the game area 5a (main effect display device 1600).

  As shown in FIGS. 163 and 164 and the like, the fixed side unit 3360 of the back rear center movable effecting unit 3350 has an annular table accommodation portion 3361a for accommodating the swivel table 3380 from the front and a table accommodation portion. A unit base 3361 having a square opening 3361b penetrating back and forth inside the 3361a, and a forward movement of the swivel table 3380 attached to the unit base 3361 and accommodated in the table accommodating portion 3361a. A plurality of regulating table supporters 3362 and a plurality of columnar guides which are mounted in the circumferential direction along the outer periphery of the table accommodating portion 3361a and protrude forward from the front end of the table accommodating portion 3361a. Pin 3363 and rotatable with respect to each guide pin 3363 A plurality of guide bushes 3364 which are inserted and the outer peripheral surface of which can come into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the swivel table 3380 which is stored in the table storage portion 3361a, and which can be rotated outside the lower end of the table storage portion 3361a in the unit base 3361. And a pair of guide rollers 3365 that are attached and the outer peripheral surface of the swivel table 3380 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface.

  Further, a plurality of fixed side units 3360 are attached to the unit base 3361, and a plurality (three in this case) of rotation detection sensors 3366 for detecting the rotation position of the rotation table 3380, and a table housing portion on the front surface of the unit base 3361. It is attached to the outside of the 3361a, and the first effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive board 3033, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400, the back rear right movable effect unit 3500, the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600, and the back rear It includes a drive motor and a decorative board provided in the lower movable effect unit 3700, and three table base relay boards 3367 that relay the connection with the sub effect display device 3640.

  Further, the fixed-side unit 3360 includes a rear-side turning drive motor 3370 mounted at the lower left corner in front view of the front surface of the unit base 3361, and a spur gear-shaped drive mounted on the rotation shaft of the rear-side turning drive motor 3370. It has a gear 3371, a large-diameter spur gear-shaped input gear 3372a meshing with the drive gear 3371, and a spur gear-shaped output gear 3372b that rotates integrally with the input gear 3372a and has a smaller diameter than the input gear 3372a. , A turning gear 3372 rotatably attached to the unit base 3361, and an output gear 3372b of the turning gear 3372 meshed with the turning gear 3372, and the turning table 3380 accommodated in the table accommodating portion 3361a of the unit base 3361. Meshing with the revolving gear 3384, it can rotate on the unit base 3361 And in that the spur gear-like pivot pinion gear 3373 that is attached to, and a (see Figure 169, etc.).

  The unit base 3361 of the fixed unit 3360 is formed in a quadrilateral shape corresponding to the inside of the back box 3010, and is provided with an annular table accommodating portion 3361a so as to constitute the outer shape and contact four sides. I have. The table accommodating portion 3361a includes a rear wall portion formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width on the front surface of the general surface of the unit base 3361, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion protruding forward from the outer periphery of the rear wall portion. ing. The table accommodating portion 3361a can accommodate the turning table 3380 inside the peripheral wall portion. The opening 3361b of the unit base 3361 is formed in a size corresponding to the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. As shown in FIG. 163 and the like, the unit base 3361 has a relief-shaped three-dimensional decoration formed on the front surface inside the table accommodating portion 3361a.

  The table supporters 3362 are provided on the upper and lower sides with respect to the vertically extending axis passing through the center of the annular table accommodating portion 3361a in front view, and are also provided two on each of the left and right sides. ing. In other words, six table supporters 3362 are provided, and are arranged near the vertexes of the hexagon in contact with the table accommodating portion 3361a.

  The guide pins 3363 protrude forward from the front end of the peripheral wall portion of the annular table housing portion 3361a, and are provided in plurality (eight in this case) along the outer periphery of the table housing portion. The plurality of guide pins 3363 are arranged symmetrically with respect to an vertically extending axis passing through the center (center of rotation) of the table accommodating portion 3361a. The four guide pins 3363 arranged on the right side of the vertically extending axis passing through the center of rotation turn clockwise from the upper vertex (upper end) of the table accommodating portion 3361a by 35 degrees, 60 degrees, 120 degrees, 142 degrees, respectively. More specifically, the guide pin 3363 located at a 35-degree clockwise direction from the upper end of the table accommodating portion 3361a is separated from the adjacent guide pin 3363 at a 25-degree angle clockwise. The adjacent guide pins in the counterclockwise direction are separated at an angle of 70 degrees. In addition, the guide pin 3363 at a position at an angle of 60 degrees clockwise from the upper end of the table accommodating portion 3361a is separated from the guide pin 3363 that is adjacent in the clockwise direction at an angle of 60 degrees. Guide pins adjacent in a clockwise direction are separated at an angle of 25 degrees. Further, the guide pin 3363 at a position 120 degrees clockwise from the upper end of the table accommodating portion 3361a is separated from the guide pin 3363 adjacent in the clockwise direction at an angle of 22 degrees. Guide pins adjacent in a clockwise direction are separated at an angle of 60 degrees. Also, the guide pin 3363 at a position 142 degrees clockwise from the upper end of the table accommodating portion 3361a is separated from the guide pin 3363 adjacent in the clockwise direction at an angle of 76 degrees, and Guide pins that are adjacent in a clockwise direction are separated at an angle of 22 degrees.

  In other words, the two uppermost guide pins 3363 on the left and right sides are separated from each other at an interval of 70 degrees in the turning direction. Further, the two guide pins 3363 disposed closest to the upper and lower sides with respect to the axis extending horizontally passing through the center of rotation are separated from each other by an angle of 60 degrees in the direction of rotation. Further, the two lowermost guide pins 3363 on both the left and right sides are separated from each other at an interval of 76 degrees in the turning direction. The two upper oblique guide pins 3363 on the left and right sides are separated by an angle of 25 degrees in the turning direction, and the two lower oblique guide pins 3363 on the left and right sides are separated by an angle of 22 degrees in the turning direction. I have.

  These guide pins 3363 are formed so as to come into contact with the sides of the slide frame 3630 when the slide frame 3630 of the back and upper movable effect unit 3600 described later is in the retracted position, and the sub-pin attached to the slide frame 3630 The movement of the effect display device 3640 in the turning direction can be restricted. If the angle between the two adjacent guide pins 3363 is 60 degrees or more, the slide frame 3630 of the back and upper movable effect unit 3600 can be located between the two guide pins 3363. When the interval between the two guide pins 3363 is 60 degrees, the range of the swivel angle of the slide frame 3630 (sub-effect display device 3640) located therebetween is 0 degrees, and the interval between the two guide pins 3363 is 70 degrees. In the case of degrees, the range of the turning angle of the slide frame 3630 (sub-effect display device 3640) located therebetween is ± 5 degrees, and furthermore, when the interval between the two guide pins 3363 is 76 degrees, the range is The range of the turning angle of the located slide frame 3630 (sub-effect display device 3640) is ± 8 degrees.

  On the other hand, when the angle of the interval between two adjacent guide pins 3363 is smaller than 60 degrees, the outer side of the slide frame 3630 of the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 abuts on the guide pins 3363, and the slide frame 3630 ( The movement to the retreat position of the sub effect display device 3640) can be restricted. Therefore, by the plurality of guide pins 3363, the rear upper movable effect unit is positioned directly above the turning center (first turning position), at a position immediately to the right of the turning center (second turning position), and immediately below the turning center. Only at the position (third turning position), the slide frame 3630 (sub-effect display device 3640) is restricted so that it can move to the retreat position, and the range of the turning angle in the turning direction at each position is restricted. can do.

  The pair of guide rollers 3365 are provided on both the left and right sides of the table supporter 3362 disposed immediately below the center of rotation. The guide roller 3365 is a ball bearing.

  The turning detection sensor 3366 detects the turning position of the turning table 3380 by detecting the detection piece 3385 of the turning table 3380. The turning detection sensor 3366 includes a first turning detection sensor 3366a that detects that the turning table 3380 is located at the first turning position, and a second turning detection sensor 3366 that detects that the turning table 3380 is located at the second turning position. It comprises a turning detection sensor 3366b and a third turning detection sensor 3366c that detects that the turning table 3380 is located at the third turning position.

  The turning table 3380 of the back rear central movable rendering unit 3350 has a shallow dish-shaped main body portion 3381 whose outer periphery is circular and large enough to be accommodated in the table accommodating portion 3361a of the unit base 3361, and a main body portion 3381. A through-hole 3382 that penetrates the bottom wall back and forth, an annular flange portion 3383 that projects outwardly from the front end of the main body portion 3381 in a flat plate shape, and has an outer diameter larger than the table housing portion 3361a. A turning gear 3384 in which gear teeth protruding forward from the front surface of the flange portion 3383 and facing outward in the radial direction are arranged in an arc shape, and a turning gear sensor 3366 projecting outward from the flange portion 3383 and detected by the turning detection sensor 3366. And a flat detection piece 3385 to be formed.

  The swivel table 3380 is formed in an annular shape by a main body portion 3381, a through hole 3382, and a flange portion 3383, and the rear side of the flange portion 3383 is housed in the table housing portion 3361a of the unit base 3361. The turning table 3380 is configured such that the outer peripheral surface of the flange portion 3383 comes into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the guide bush 3364 fitted into the guide pin 3363 and the outer peripheral surface of the guide roller 3365, respectively. To be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth. The swivel table 3380 has a table supporter 3362 slidably in contact with the front surface of the flange portion 3383, and the front end of the table housing portion 3361a (peripheral wall portion) is slidable on the rear surface of the flange portion 3383. It comes into contact. Thereby, the movement of the turning table 3380 in the front-rear direction with respect to the fixed unit 3360 is restricted.

  The swivel gear 3384 of the swivel table 3380 rotates clockwise from an angle of about 30 degrees clockwise from the upper apex with respect to an axis extending vertically passing through the center of the annular swivel table 3380. It is formed so as to extend in an arc shape up to a position rotated by about 280 degrees in the direction. When assembled to the rear center movable effect unit 3350, the turning pinion gear 3373 meshes with the turning gear 3384 from the outside, and turns by the back turning drive motor 3370 via the drive gear 3371 and the turning speed change gear 3372. When the pinion gear 3373 is rotated, the turning table 3380 can be rotated via the turning gear 3384.

  Further, the swivel table 3380 is provided symmetrically with respect to the vertically extending axis passing through the center of swivel, at the upper part of the front surface of the main body 3381 above the through hole 3382, and extends linearly up and down. A pair of fixed-side rack gears 3386 and a plurality of guide bosses 387 projecting forward in a cylindrical shape between the pair of fixed-side rack gears 3386 on the front surface of the main body 3381 are provided. The pair of fixed-side rack gears 3386 mesh with a slide gear 3620 attached to a slide plate 3610 of the back and upper movable effect unit 3600 described later, and are attached to a slide frame 3630 via the slide plate 3610. This is used for moving the effect display device 3640 between the retracted position and the protruding position. Further, a plurality (four) of the guide bosses 3387 are provided symmetrically with respect to an axis extending vertically passing through the center of rotation and extending vertically and spaced apart from each other. The plurality of guide bosses 3387 are for movably attaching a slide plate 3610 of the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 described later.

[5-9e-1. Direction by the back center central movable production unit]
Next, an effect using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 to 172. FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the turning of the turning table in the counterclockwise direction in the rear center movable effect unit. FIG. 171 is an explanatory view schematically showing the clockwise turning of the turning table in the back rear center movable effecting unit. FIG. 172 schematically shows the clockwise turning of the turning table following FIG. FIG.

  In the back rear center movable effect unit 3350, in a normal state, the detection piece 3385 of the turning table 3380 is detected by the first turning detection sensor 3366a attached to the upper left of the three turning detection sensors 3366 in front view. (See FIGS. 170 (a) and 171 (a)). That is, the turning table 3380 is in the first turning position. In this normal state, when the turning pinion gear 3373 is rotated clockwise in front view by the back turning driving motor 3370 via the driving gear 3371 and the turning transmission gear 3372, the turning table 3380 rotates counterclockwise. It can be rotated in the direction up to a rotation angle of 80 degrees (see FIG. 170 (b)).

  On the other hand, when the turning pinion gear 3373 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction from the front by the back turning driving motor 3370 from the normal state, the turning table 3380 can be rotated in the clockwise direction. By rotating the swivel table 3380 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state, the swivel table 3380 can be brought into the second swivel position (see FIG. 171 (b)). In the state of the second turning position, the detection piece 3385 of the turning table 3380 is detected by the second turning detection sensor 3366b arranged at the upper right in front view.

  When the turning table 3380 is further rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the second turning position, the turning table 3380 can be brought into the third turning position (see FIG. 172 (c)). In the state of the third turning position, the detection piece 3385 of the turning table 3380 is detected by the third turning detection sensor 3366c disposed at the lower right in front view. This turning table 3380 can be further rotated clockwise by 10 degrees from the state of the third turning position (see FIG. 172 (d)).

  As described above, according to the back rear center movable rendering unit 3350, the back rear left movable rendering unit 3400, the back rear right movable rendering unit 3500, the back rear upper movable rendering unit 3600, and the back rear mounted on the turning table 3380. The lower movable effect unit 3700 is turned around a turning center (the center of the main effect display device 1600) within a predetermined angle range (80 degrees in a counterclockwise direction to 190 degrees in a clockwise direction). Can be done.

[5-9f. Overall configuration of the back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right movable production unit]
Next, the rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the rear right movable effect unit 3500 in the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 173 to 176. FIG. 173 is a perspective view of the back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right movable production unit in the back unit as viewed from the front. FIG. 174 shows the back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right movable production unit of the back unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 175 is an exploded view of the back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right movable production unit into the back rear left movable decoration unit, the back rear right movable decoration unit, the back rear left slide unit, and the back rear right slide unit. FIG. 176 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 176 shows the back left left movable production unit and the back rear right movable production unit; It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled into the back rear right slide unit and was seen from behind.

  The back rear left movable rendering unit 3400 and the back rear right movable rendering unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 are mounted on the front surface of the turning table 3380 of the rear center movable rendering unit 3350 mounted in the back box 3010. The back rear left movable rendering unit 3400 and the back rear right movable rendering unit 3500 include a back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and a back rear including a plurality of rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and a rear right rotating decorative body 3510, respectively. The right movable decorative body unit 3501 and the back rear central movable rendering unit 3350 are attached to the front surfaces of the turning table 3380, respectively. The back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 are moved away from the center of rotation. A rear left slide unit 3460 and a rear right slide unit 3560 that move each between a separated position and an approach position approaching the turning center.

  The back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back right movable decorative body unit 3501 of the back rear left movable rendering unit 3400 and the back rear right movable rendering unit 3500 are parallel to the surface of the game area 5a (the surface of the panel board 1110). It is provided with a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and a back right rotating decorative body 3510 rotatable around an axis along the surface. The rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative unit 3501 of the rear left movable rendering unit 3400 and the rear right movable rendering unit 3500 are a rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and a rear right rotating decorative body 3510. By rotating, it is possible to change the decoration by changing the part of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 that is visible from the player side (front side).

  In addition, the rear left slide unit 3460 and the rear right slide unit 3560 of the rear left movable production unit 3400 and the rear right movable production unit 3500 have an axis extending vertically passing through the center of rotation on the front surface of the turntable 3380. It is mounted symmetrically at the boundary. The rear left slide unit 3460 and the rear right slide unit 3560 move the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative unit 3501 away from the center of the rotary table 3380 (the center of rotation), and the periphery of the rotary table 3380. It can be slid linearly between a separation position located in the vicinity and an approach position approaching the center of the turntable 3380.

  The back rear left movable production unit 3400 and the back rear right movable production unit 3500 rotate together with the swivel table 3380 because the rear left slide unit 3460 and the rear right slide unit 3560 are attached to the swivel table 3380. The back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 can rotate around the center of rotation (centering on the center of the main effect display device 1600).

[5-9f-1. Back rear left movable decorative unit]
The back left movable decorative body unit 3401 in the back left movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 177 to 139. 177 is a front view of the rear left movable decorative unit and the rear right movable decorative unit in the rear unit and the rear right movable directing unit in the rear unit, and FIG. 178 is a rear left movable decorative unit in the rear unit. FIG. 179 is a perspective view of the back rear left movable decorative body unit and the back rear right movable decorative body unit in the back rear right movable rendering unit when viewed from the front. FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the back back left movable decorative body unit and the back back right movable decorative body unit from the back. FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left movable decorative body unit and the back rear right movable decorative body unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 181 is a back rear left movable decorative unit and a back rear right movable decorative body unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled device viewed from behind. FIG. 182 is an exploded perspective view of the back left rotating decorative body, the back right rotating decorative body, and the back right rotating decorative body of the back rear right movable decorative body unit and the back rear right movable decorative body unit, and viewed from the front. FIG. 183 is an exploded perspective view of the rear left rotating decorative body, the rear right rotating decorative body, and the rear right rotating decorative body of the back rear left movable decorative body unit and the back rear right movable decorative body unit, and the rotation connecting mechanism viewed from behind. FIG. FIG. 184 (a) is a perspective view of the rotation connection mechanism in an assembled state, and FIG. 184 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the rotation connection mechanism. FIG. 185 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing, from the left side, movable members of the back left movable decorative body unit in the back left movable effect unit, and FIG. 185 (b) is a back rear left movable decoration in the back left movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable member of a body unit from the front. FIG. 186 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back left rotating decorative body in the back left movable decorative body unit of the back left movable effect unit.

  As shown, the back left movable decorative body unit 3401 of the back left movable effect unit 3400 includes a plurality of (four in this case) back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 provided with a predetermined decoration. A plurality of back left rotation decorations 3410 are, from below, a first back left rotation decoration 3410A, a second back left rotation decoration 3410B, a third back left rotation decoration 3410C, and a fourth back left decoration. It is a left rotation decorative body 3410D. Each of the back left rotation decorative bodies 3410 is formed in substantially the same shape.

  The back left rotating decorative body 3410 bulges in a semi-cylindrical shape, and extends in a disk shape obliquely from the end of the first decorative part 3411a and the first decorative part 3411a that simulates the body part of the spotlight. A decorative body 3411b having a second decorative portion 3411b imitating a lens portion of the above, and a third decorative portion 3411c extending flat and having predetermined characters on the opposite side of the first decorative portion 3411a; And a shaft portion 3412 protruding from each of two side surfaces intersecting the end of the second decoration portion 3411b in the decoration body 3411.

  The decorative body 3411 of the back-left rotating decorative body 3410 is formed of a transparent member, and is partially decorated with metallic luster. The decorative body 3411 is formed so that the second decorative portion 3411b can be visually recognized in an inclined state when the first decorative portion 3411a faces the front. Although not shown, the third decorative portion 3411c of the decorative body main body 3411 is provided with one character decoration by the four back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 so as to be one word.

  The four back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 have respective shaft portions 3412 having a predetermined radius such that the respective second decorative portions 3411b face the center with the respective first decorative portions 3411a facing the front. They are arranged along an arc.

  The back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 is attached to a flat back left base 3420 extending in an arc shape with a predetermined width, and is attached to the front side of the back rear left base 3420, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front. And a transparent back left base cover 3422 attached to the back back left base 3420 so as to cover the front side of the back back left decorative substrate 3421.

  The back rear left base 3420 is slidably inserted into a slide mounting portion 3420a that is slidably mounted on the upper portion by a slide shaft 3462 of the back rear left slide unit 3460 and a slide guide 3463 of the back rear left slide unit 3460 at the lower portion. And a pair of elongated slide slits 3420c which are formed vertically symmetrically at the center in the vertical direction near the left end in front view, penetrate back and forth, and extend vertically. And a detection piece 3420d that protrudes upward from the upper part in a flat plate shape and is detected by the slide detection sensor 3474 of the rear left rear slide unit 3460. The sliding pins 3465c of the pair of slide arms 3465 of the rear left rear slide unit 3460 are slidably inserted into the pair of slide slits 3420c of the rear rear left base 3420, respectively.

  The back rear left decorative board 3421 is mounted so that four LEDs correspond to one back left rotating decorative body 3410, and the four LEDs control the shaft part 3412 of the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410. In between, two are each arranged. In other words, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back left back decoration board 3421 are arranged inside and outside the arc where the four back left rotation decoration bodies 3410 are arranged in a row. The LED on the back rear left decorative substrate 3421 is a full-color LED.

  Also, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 moves the rear side of the upper shaft part 3412 of the first back rear left rotating decorative body 3410A and the lower shaft part 3412 of the second back rear left rotating decorative body 3410B, respectively. The lower bearing base 3423, which is rotatably supported and attached to the front of the rear left back cover 3422, the upper shaft portion 3412 of the second rear left rotation decorative body 3410B, and the third rear left rotary decorative body 3410C. A bearing base 3424 which rotatably supports the rear side of the lower shaft portion 3412 and is mounted on the front surface of the rear left base cover 3422, and an upper shaft portion 3412 of the third rear left rotation decorative body 3410C. And a bearing base 3425 that rotatably supports the respective rear sides of the lower shaft portions 3412 on the lower side of the fourth back rear rotation decorative body 3410D and is attached to the front surface of the back rear left base cover 3422. There.

  Further, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 rotatably supports the lower shaft portion 3412 of the first back rear left rotating decorative body 3410A, and is attached to the front surface of the back rear left base cover 3422 to be attached to the front surface. The front side of the first bearing cover 3426 to which the decoration is applied, and the upper shaft portion 3412 of the first back left rotation decorative body 3410A and the lower shaft portion 3412 of the second back rear left rotary decoration body 3410B. The second bearing cover 3427 attached rotatably and attached to the front surface of the lower bearing base 3423 and decorated on the front surface, the upper shaft portion 3412 of the second back rear left rotating decorative body 3410B and the second bearing cover A third shaft which rotatably supports the front side of each of the lower shaft portions 3412 on the lower back of the three-rotation decorative body 3410C and is attached to the front surface of the bearing stand 3424 and decorated on the front surface. The cover 3428 rotatably supports the front sides of the upper shaft portion 3412 of the third back rear left rotating decorative body 3410C and the lower shaft portion 3412 of the fourth back rear left rotating decorative body 3410D, and also includes a bearing stand. A fourth bearing cover 3429 mounted on the front surface of the upper 3425 and decorated on the front surface, and rotatably supports the upper shaft portion 3412 of the fourth back rear left rotating decorative body 3410D and the back rear left base. A fifth bearing cover 3430 attached to the front surface of the cover 3422 and decorated on the front surface.

  Further, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 is mounted on the front side of the back rear left base cover 3422 at the rear side of the first bearing cover 3426, and the rotation axis is the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear left base cover 3422. The rear left drive motor 3431 protruding between the rear left drive motor 3431, a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3432 attached to the rotating shaft of the rear rear left drive motor 3431, and the rear rear left base 3420 meshed with the drive gear 3432 , A spur gear-shaped relay gear 3433 rotatably mounted on the drive rack gear, a vertically extending drive rack gear 3434a meshing with the relay gear 3433, a lower work rack gear 3434b vertically extending above the drive rack gear 3434a, and An upper working rack gear 3434c extending vertically above the lower working rack gear 3434b; 3434b and actuating the rack gear on the 3434c is provided with a back left rear drive rack 3434 mounted slidably up and down by the back left rear base cover 3422 so as to be positioned on the front side of the back left rear base cover 3422.

  Further, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 includes a driven gear portion 3435a meshing with the lower working rack gear 3434b of the back rear left drive rack 3434, a cylindrical body portion 3435b protruding forward from the driven gear portion 3435a, And a transmission gear member having a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3435c formed at the front end of the body portion 3435b, and rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the front surface of the back rear left base cover 3422. A driven gear portion 3436a meshing with the lower 3435, the upper working rack gear 3434c of the rear rear left drive rack 3434, a cylindrical body 3436b protruding forward from the driven gear portion 3436a, and a front end of the body 3436b. And a transmission gear portion 3436c in the form of a bevel gear. A transmission gear member 3436 rotatably mounted around a rearwardly extending shaft, an upper shaft portion 3412 of the first back left rotating decorative body 3410A and an upper shaft portion of the third back left rotating decorative body 3410C. A bevel gear-shaped rotating gear 3437 is attached to the transmission gear member 3412 so as to be integrally rotatable and meshes with the transmission gear portion 3435c of the lower transmission gear member 3435 and the transmission gear portion 3436c of the upper transmission gear member 3436, respectively. , Is provided.

  Further, the rear left rear decorative body unit 3401 has a gear portion 3438a extending in an arc shape meshing with the drive gear 3432, and a detection piece 3438b extending in a fan shape at a position different from the gear portion 3438a. A detection gear member 3438 rotatably attached to the front surface of the rear left base 3420 and a rear left rotation attached to the front surface of the rear left base 3420 so as to detect the detection piece 3438b of the detection gear member 3438. And a detection sensor 3439.

  The rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 includes an upper shaft portion 3412 of the first rear left rotational decorative body 3410A, a lower shaft portion 3412 of the second rear left rotational decorative body 3410B, and a third A rotation connection mechanism 3450 is provided for connecting the upper shaft 3412 of the rear left back decoration 3410C and the lower shaft 3412 of the fourth rear left rotation decoration 3410D so as to be able to transmit rotation. . The rotation connection mechanism 3450 includes two (one pair) arm portions 3451 protruding from the tip of the shaft portion 3412, and a cross-shaped spider 3452 inserted between the arm portions 3451.

  The rotary connection mechanism 3450 will be described in detail. The two arm portions 3451 protrude from the end of the shaft portion 3412 at the same clearance in the circumferential direction on the circumference of the shaft portion 3412 which is separated from the center. Is formed narrower than the gap. Further, the spider 3452 has four arm portions 3451 in a state where one arm portion 3451 of the other shaft portion 3412 is inserted one by one into each gap of the two arm portions 3451 on one shaft portion 3412. It has four cylindrical rod-shaped transmission portions 3452a projecting from the enclosed inside to each space between the arm portions 3451.

  In the assembled state, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 has four back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 vertically arranged in a front view, and a second back rear left rotating decorative body 3410B and a second rear rear rotating decorative body 3410B. The respective shaft portions 3412 are arranged along a horizontal line passing between the three back and rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410C and an arc having a center to the right thereof. In addition, the respective shaft portions 3412 of the four back left rotation decorative bodies 3410 are arranged at the same position in the front-rear direction. That is, the respective shaft portions 3412 are arranged on the same plane parallel to the surface of the game area 5a. Further, in the assembled state, the four back left rotation decorative bodies 3410 are attached so as not to be movable in the direction in which the shaft portions 3412 extend.

  In addition, in a state where it is assembled to the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401, the transmission gear portion 3435c of the lower transmission gear member 3435 and the transmission gear portion 3436c of the upper transmission gear member 3436 respectively connect the lower bearing table 3423 and the upper bearing table 3425 to each other. Each penetrates and is exposed forward. In front of the transmission gear portion 3435c and the transmission gear portion 3436c of the transmission gear member lower portion 3435 and the transmission gear member upper portion 3436, the shaft portions 3412 of the two adjacent rear-rear left rotation decorative bodies 3410 are connected to each other by the rotation coupling mechanism 3450. Are linked to each other.

  Further, in a state where the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 is assembled, the front side of the back rear left drive motor 3431 is covered with the first bearing cover 3426, and the two rotary connection mechanisms 3450 are connected to the second bearing cover 3427 and the second bearing cover 3427. Each is covered with a four-bearing cover 3429 to improve the appearance of the rear rear left movable rendering unit 3400.

  Subsequently, the operation of the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 185 and 186. In the normal state, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 of the back rear left movable rendering unit 3400 has four back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 moving the first decorative part 3411a of the decorative body main body 3411 forward (front). It is in the state of being turned (the state of the first production position). In this state, as shown in FIGS. 185 and 186 (a), the rear left driving rack 3434 that slides up and down is located at the lower moving end. The relay gear 3433 meshes near the upper end of the drive rack gear 3434a of the rear rear left drive rack 3434, and the driven gear portion 3435a of the transmission gear member lower 3435 and The driven gear portions 3436a of the upper transmission gear member 3436 mesh with each other. The back left rotation detection sensor 3439 detects the detection piece 3438b of the detection gear member 3438.

  From this normal state, when the relay gear 3433 is rotated clockwise in front view by the rear left drive motor 3431 via the drive gear 3432, the drive rack gear 3434a meshing with the relay gear 3433 causes the rear The left drive rack 3434 will slide upward. When the rear left drive rack 3434 slides upward, the driven gear portion 3435a of the lower transmission gear member 3435 and the driven gear portion 3436a of the upper transmission gear member 3436 mesh with the lower operation rack gear 3434b and the upper operation rack gear 3434c, respectively. , The lower transmission gear member 3435 and the upper transmission gear member 3436 rotate in the counterclockwise direction at the same speed.

  When the lower transmission gear member 3435 and the upper transmission gear member 3436 rotate in the counterclockwise direction, respectively, the respective transmission gear portions 3435c and the respective rotation gears 3437 meshing with the transmission gear portion 3436c are counterclockwise in bottom view. It will rotate in the surrounding direction. Accordingly, the first back left rotating decorative body 3410A and the third back left rotating decorative body 3410C are moved forward through the shaft 3412 to which the rotating gear 3437 is attached, and the disc-shaped second decorative part 3411b is moved forward. It will rotate about each shaft 3412 so as to move.

  The upper shaft portion 3412 of the first back left rotation decorative body 3410A is connected to the lower shaft portion 3412 of the second back rear left rotary decoration body 3410B by a rotation connection mechanism 3450 so that rotation can be transmitted. Since the upper shaft portion 3412 of the third back rear left rotating decorative body 3410C is connected to the lower shaft portion 3412 of the fourth back rear left rotating decorative body 3410D by the rotation connecting mechanism 3450 so that rotation can be transmitted, Each rotation of the first back left rotation decorative body 3410A and the third back left rotation decoration 3410C is performed via the respective rotation coupling mechanism 3450, and the second back left rotation decoration 3410B and the fourth back left rotation. The second back left rotating decorative body 3410B and the fourth back left rotating decorative body 3410D are transmitted to the decorative body 3410D, and the first back rear left rotating decorative body 3410A and the third back left rotating decorative body 3410C Flip substantially so that the simultaneously rotated in the direction.

  The rotation transmission by the rotation connection mechanism 3450 will be described in detail. When the shaft portion 3412 on the first back left rotating decorative body 3410A and the third back left rotating decorative body 3410C side is rotated via the rotating gear 3437, the leading end thereof is rotated. The transmitting portion 3452a of the spider 3452 abuts on the side surface of the arm portion 3451, and the transmitting portion 3452a is further provided at the tip of the shaft portion 3412 on the second rear left rotating decorative body 3410B and the fourth rear left rotating decorative body 3410D side. By contacting the side surface of the arm portion 3451, the shaft portion 3412 on the second rear left rotation decorative body 3410B and the fourth rear left rotary decorative body 3410D rotates.

  At this time, the shaft portion 3412 on the first back rear left rotating decorative body 3410A and the third back left rotating decorative body 3410C side, and the second back rear left rotating decorative body 3410B and the fourth back rear left rotating decorative body 3410D side Are different from each other in the direction in which they extend, so that the plane passing through the center of the four transmitting portions 3452a of the cross-shaped spider 3452 is the center axis of the two shafts 3412 in different extending directions. The four transmitting portions 3452a relatively slide in the direction in which the arm portions 3451 extend between the arm portions 3451 so as to maintain a state of being coincident with the plane including the bisector of the corner of Becomes Thereby, the rotation of the shaft portion 3412 on the side of the first back left rotating decorative body 3410A and the third back left rotating decorative body 3410C is smoothly transmitted, so that the second back left rotating decorative body 3410B and the fourth back left decorative decoration 3410B The shaft portion 3412 on the left rotation decorative body 3410D side can be rotated.

  As described above, the first rear-left rear decorative ornament 3410A, the second rear-left rear decorative ornament 3410B, and the third rear-left rear decorative ornament 3410C are formed by the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 capable of transmitting the rotation. Since the four back-left rotating decorative bodies 3410D are connected to each other, the four back-left rotating decorative bodies 3410 can be simultaneously rotated in the same direction at the same speed by driving the back-left driving motor 3431.

  When the rear left driving motor 3431 rotates the relay gear 3433 clockwise in front view to slide the rear left driving rack 3434 upward, the gear portion 3438a meshed with the driving gear 3432 is rotated. Through this, the detection gear member 3438 rotates clockwise in front view.

  Then, when the detection gear member 3438 rotates clockwise in front view and the detection piece 3438b is not detected by the rear left rotation detection sensor 3439, the drive of the rear left drive motor 3431 is stopped. And the four back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 are stopped in a state where each second decorative part 3411b is directed forward (front) (a state of the second production position rotated by about 62 degrees from the normal state). (See FIG. 186 (b)). In this state, the disc-shaped second decorative portion 3411b imitating a spotlight lens is in a state facing forward, so that four round decorations are arranged side by side, and decoration different from the normal state is performed. This can be shown to the player (see FIG. 189 (b)).

  On the other hand, when the rear left driving rack 3434 is slid to the upper moving end by the rear left driving motor 3431 via the driving gear 3432 and the relay gear 3433, the four rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 become respective normal. With respect to the state (3), the state is rotated (reversed) by about 180 degrees around the respective shaft portions 3412 (the state of the third effect position) (see FIG. 186 (c)). In this state, the third decorative portion 3411c on which the character decoration has been applied faces forward (front), and the phrase formed by the decoration of the four characters can suggest the arrival of a chance to the player. At the same time, a decoration different from the normal state can be shown to the player (see FIG. 189 (c)).

  When returning the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 to a normal state, the back left driving motor 3431 can be returned to the normal state by rotating the back left driving motor 3431 in the opposite direction to the above.

  As described above, the back left movable decorative body unit 3401 moves the four back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 by the back left driving motor 3431 within the respective angle ranges of about 180 degrees inverting from the normal state. It can be simultaneously rotated about the part 3412 in the same direction. Thus, the decoration facing forward can be variously changed (changed). In addition, by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear left decorative substrate 3421, the four back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 are independently light-emitting decorated in various colors and brightness. be able to.

[5-9f-2. Back right movable decorative body unit]
The back right movable decoration unit 3501 in the back right movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 177 to 184, 187, and 188. FIG. 187 (a) is an explanatory view showing, from the front, the movable members of the back right movable decorative unit in the back right movable production unit, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable member of a unit from the right side. FIG. 188 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back right rotating decorative body in the back right movable decorative body unit of the back right movable rendering unit.

  As shown, the back right movable decorative body unit 3501 of the back right movable effect unit 3500 includes a plurality (four in this case) of back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 provided with a predetermined decoration. The plurality of back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are, from below, a first back right rotating decorative body 3510A, a second back right rotating decorative body 3510B, a third back right rotating decorative body 3510C, and a fourth back right decorative body. It is a right rotation decorative body 3510D. Each of the back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 is formed in substantially the same shape.

  The back right rotating decorative body 3510 bulges in a semi-cylindrical shape, and extends in a disk shape obliquely from the end of the first decorative part 3511a and the first decorative part 3511a that simulates the body part of the spotlight. A decorative body 3511 having a second decorative portion 3511b imitating a lens portion of the above, and a third decorative portion 3511c extending flat and having predetermined characters on the opposite side of the first decorative portion 3511a; And a shaft portion 3512 protruding from each of two side surfaces intersecting with an end of the second decorative portion 3511b in the decorative body main body 3511.

  The decorative body 3511 of the back-right rotating decorative body 3510 is formed of a transparent member, and is partially decorated with metallic luster. The decorative body 3511 is formed so that the second decorative portion 3511b can be viewed obliquely when the first decorative portion 3511a faces the front. Although not shown, the third decorative portion 3511c of the decorative body main body 3511 is provided with one character decoration by the four back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 so as to be one word.

  The four back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are such that each shaft 3512 has a predetermined radius such that each second decorative part 3511b faces the center with each first decorative part 3511a facing the front. They are arranged along an arc.

  The rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 is attached to the front of the rear right base 3520 in a flat plate shape extending in a circular arc with a predetermined width, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the rear right base 3520. And a transparent rear right base cover 3522 attached to the rear right base 3520 so as to cover the front side of the rear right decorative substrate 3521.

  The rear right base 3520 is slidably inserted into a slide mounting portion 3520a which is slidably mounted by a slide shaft 3562 of a rear right slide unit 3560 at an upper portion and a slide guide 3563 of a rear right slide unit 3560 at a lower portion. A cylindrical slide pin 3520b, and a pair of elongated slide slits 3520c that are vertically symmetrically formed near the left end in front view and are vertically symmetrical, penetrate back and forth, and extend vertically. And a detection piece 3520d that protrudes upward from the top in a flat plate shape and is detected by the slide detection sensor 3574 of the rear right slide unit 3560. The slide pins 3565c of the pair of slide arms 3565 of the rear right slide unit 3560 are slidably inserted into the pair of slide slits 3520c of the rear right base 3520.

  The back right decoration board 3521 is mounted so that four LEDs correspond to one back right rotation decoration 3510, and the four LEDs mount the shaft 3512 of the back right rotation decoration 3510. In between, two are each arranged. That is, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back right decoration board 3521 are arranged inside and outside the arc where the four back right rotation decorations 3510 are arranged in a row. Note that the LEDs on the back rear right decorative board 3521 are full-color LEDs.

  In addition, the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 moves the rear side of the upper shaft 3512 of the first back right rotating decorative body 3510A and the lower shaft 3512 of the second rear right rotating decorative body 3510B. The lower bearing base 3523 rotatably supported and attached to the front of the rear right base cover 3522, the upper shaft portion 3512 of the second rear right rotation ornament 3510B, and the third rear right rotation ornament 3510C. A bearing stand 3524 rotatably supporting the rear side of the lower shaft portion 3512 and attached to the front surface of the rear right base cover 3522, and an upper shaft portion 3512 of the third rear right rotation decorative body 3510C. And a bearing base 3525 rotatably supporting the respective rear sides of the lower shaft portions 3512 of the fourth rear right rotation decorative body 3510D and attached to the front surface of the rear right base cover 3522. There.

  In addition, the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 rotatably supports the lower shaft portion 3512 of the first rear right rotating decorative body 3510A, and is attached to the front surface of the rear right base cover 3522, and is attached to the front surface. The front side of each of the first bearing cover 3526 to which the decoration is applied, the upper shaft portion 3512 of the first back right rotating decorative body 3510A, and the lower shaft portion 3512 of the second back right rotating decorative body 3510B. The second bearing cover 3527 which is rotatably supported and attached to the front surface of the lower bearing base 3523 and has a decoration on the front surface, the upper shaft portion 3512 of the second back rear right rotation decoration body 3510B and the second A third shaft, which rotatably supports the front side of each lower shaft portion 3512 of the three back rear right rotation decorative body 3510C, is attached to the front surface of the bearing stand 3524, and is decorated on the front surface. The cover 3528 rotatably supports the front sides of the upper shaft portion 3512 of the third back right rotating decorative body 3510C and the lower shaft portion 3512 of the fourth back right rotating decorative body 3510D, and also includes a bearing stand. A fourth bearing cover 3529 attached to the front surface of the upper 3525 and decorated on the front surface, and rotatably supports the upper shaft portion 3512 of the fourth back rear right rotating decorative body 3510D and the back rear right base. A fifth bearing cover 3530 attached to the front surface of the cover 3522 and decorated on the front surface.

  Further, the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 is attached to the front side of the back rear right base cover 3522 behind the first bearing cover 3526, and the rotating shafts are connected to the back rear right base 3520 and the back rear right base cover 3522. The rear right drive motor 3531 protruding between the rear rear right drive motor 3531, a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3532 attached to the rotating shaft of the rear rear right drive motor 3531, and the rear right base 3520 meshed with the drive gear 3532. A spur gear-shaped relay gear 3533 rotatably mounted on the drive rack gear 3534a, a vertically extending drive rack gear 3534a meshing with the relay gear 3533, an operating rack gear lower 3534b vertically extending above the drive rack gear 3534a, and An upper working rack gear 3534c extending vertically above the lower working rack gear 3534b; 3534b and actuating the rack gear on the 3534c is provided with a back right rear drive rack 3534 mounted slidably up and down by the back right after the base cover 3522 so as to be positioned on the front side of the back right after the base cover 3522.

  Further, the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 has a driven gear portion 3535a meshing with the lower operating rack gear 3534b of the rear right drive rack 3534, a cylindrical body 3535b projecting forward from the driven gear portion 3535a, And a transmission gear member having a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3535c formed at the front end of the body portion 3535b, and rotatably mounted on an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the front surface of the rear right base cover 3522. A lower gear 3536a meshing with a lower 3535, an upper working rack gear 3534c of the rear right drive rack 3534, a cylindrical body 3536b protruding forward from the driven gear 3536a, and a front end of the body 3536b. And a transmission gear portion 3536c in the form of a bevel gear. A transmission gear member 3536 rotatably mounted around a rearwardly extending shaft, an upper shaft portion 3512 of a first back right rotating decorative body 3510A, and an upper shaft portion of a third rear right rotating decorative body 3510C. A bevel gear-shaped rotating gear 3537 which is attached to the transmission gear member 3512 so as to be integrally rotatable and meshes with the transmission gear portion 3535c of the lower transmission gear member 3535 and the transmission gear portion 3536c of the upper transmission gear member 3536; , Is provided.

  Further, the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 has a gear portion 3538a extending in an arc shape that meshes with the drive gear 3532, and a detection piece 3538b extending in a fan shape at a position different from the gear portion 3538a. A detection gear member 3538 rotatably mounted on the front surface of the rear right base 3520 and a rear right rotation mounted on the front surface of the rear right base 3520 so as to detect the detection piece 3538b of the detection gear member 3538. And a detection sensor 3539.

  The rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 includes an upper shaft 3512 of the first rear right rotating decorative body 3510A, a lower shaft 3512 of the second rear right rotating decorative body 3510B, and a third rear right rotating decorative body 3510B. There is provided a rotation connection mechanism 3450 that connects the upper shaft portion 3512 of the rear right back decoration body 3510C and the lower shaft portion 3512 of the fourth rear right rotation decoration body 3510D so that rotation can be transmitted. . The rotation connection mechanism 3450 has the same configuration as the rotation connection mechanism 3450 of the back rear left movable rendering unit 3400, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the assembled state, the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 has four rear right rotational decorative bodies 3510 vertically arranged in a front view and a second rear right rotational decorative body 3510B in the front view. The respective shaft portions 3512 are arranged along a horizontal line passing between the three back and rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510C and an arc having a center to the left thereof. Also, the respective shaft portions 3512 of the four back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are arranged at the same position in the front-rear direction. That is, each shaft portion 3512 is arranged on the same plane parallel to the surface of the game area 5a. Furthermore, in the assembled state, the four back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are attached so as not to move in the direction in which the shaft portions 3512 extend.

  In addition, in a state where it is assembled to the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501, the transmission gear portion 3535c of the lower transmission gear member 3535 and the transmission gear portion 3536c of the upper transmission gear member 3536 connect the lower bearing base 3523 and the upper bearing table 3525, respectively. Each penetrates and is exposed forward. In front of the transmission gear portion 3535c and the transmission gear portion 3536c of the lower transmission gear member 3535 and the upper transmission gear member 3536, the shaft portions 3512 of the two adjacent rear right rotation decorative bodies 3510 are connected to each other by the rotation coupling mechanism 3450. Are linked to each other.

  Further, in a state where the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 is assembled, the front side of the back rear right drive motor 3531 is covered with the first bearing cover 3526, and the two rotation connection mechanisms 3450 are connected to the second bearing cover 3527 and the second rear cover cover 3527. Each is covered with a four-bearing cover 3529 to improve the appearance of the rear right movable effect unit 3500.

  Next, the operation of the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 187 and 188 and the like. In a normal state, the back right movable decorative body unit 3501 of the back right movable production unit 3500 is configured such that four back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 move the first decorative portion 3511a of the decorative body main body 3511 forward (front). It is in the state of being turned (the state of the first production position). In this state, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 188 (a), the rear right drive rack 3534 that slides up and down is located at the lower moving end. The relay gear 3533 meshes near the upper end of the drive rack gear 3534a of the rear right drive rack 3534, and the driven gear 3535a of the lower transmission gear member 3535 and the upper end of the lower work rack gear 3534b and upper work gear 3534c. The driven gear portions 3536a of the upper transmission gear member 3536 mesh with each other. In addition, the rear right rotation detection sensor 3539 detects the detection piece 3538b of the detection gear member 3538.

  When the relay gear 3533 is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the rear right drive motor 3531 via the drive gear 3532 from this normal state, the drive rack gear 3534a meshing with the relay gear 3533 causes the rear gear 3533a to rotate. The rear right drive rack 3534 slides upward. When the rear right drive rack 3534 slides upward, the driven gear portion 3535a of the lower transmission gear member 3535 and the driven gear portion 3536a of the upper transmission gear member 3536 meshing with the lower operation rack gear 3534b and the upper operation rack gear 3534c, respectively. , The lower transmission gear member 3535 and the upper transmission gear member 3536 rotate in the clockwise direction at the same speed.

  When the lower transmission gear member 3535 and the upper transmission gear member 3536 rotate clockwise, respectively, the respective transmission gear portions 3535c and the respective rotation gears 3537 meshing with the transmission gear portion 3536c rotate clockwise in bottom view. It will rotate in the direction. Thus, the first back right rotating decorative body 3510A and the third back right rotating decorative body 3510C are moved forward through the shaft 3512 to which the rotating gear 3537 is attached, and the disk-shaped second decorative part 3511b is moved forward. It will rotate around each shaft 3512 so as to move.

  The upper shaft portion 3512 of the first back right rotating decorative body 3510A is connected to the lower shaft portion 3512 of the second back right rotating decorative body 3510B by a rotation connecting mechanism 3450 so that rotation can be transmitted. Since the upper shaft portion 3512 of the third back right rotating decorative body 3510C is connected to the lower shaft portion 3512 of the fourth back right rotating decorative body 3510D by the rotation connection mechanism 3450 so that rotation can be transmitted, Each rotation of the first back right rotating decorative body 3510A and the third back right rotating decorative body 3510C is performed via the respective rotation coupling mechanism 3450, the second back right rotating decorative body 3510B and the fourth back right rotating right. The second back right rotating decorative body 3510B and the fourth back right rotating decorative body 3510D are transmitted to the decorative body 3510D, and are connected to the first back right rotating decorative body 3510A and the third back right rotating decorative body 3510C. Flip substantially so that the simultaneously rotated in the direction.

  The rotation transmission by the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 will be described in detail. When the shaft 3512 on the first back right rotating decorative body 3510A and the third back right rotating decorative body 3510C is rotated via the rotating gear 3537, the leading end thereof is rotated. The transmitting portion 3452a of the spider 3452 abuts on the side surface of the arm portion 3451, and the transmitting portion 3452a is further attached to the tip of the shaft 3512 on the second rear right rotating decorative body 3510B and the fourth rear right rotating decorative body 3510D. By contacting the side surface of the arm portion 3451, the shaft portion 3512 on the side of the second back right rotating decorative body 3510B and the fourth back right rotating decorative body 3510D rotates.

  At this time, the shaft portion 3512 on the side of the first back right rotating decorative body 3510A and the third back right rotating decorative body 3510C, and the side of the second back right rotating decorative body 3510B and the fourth back right rotating decorative body 3510D Are different from each other in the directions in which they extend, so that a plane passing through the center of the four transmitting portions 3452a of the cross-shaped spider 3452 is the center axis of the two shafts 3512 in different extending directions. The four transmitting portions 3452a relatively slide in the direction in which the arm portions 3451 extend between the arm portions 3451 so as to maintain a state of being coincident with the plane including the bisector of the corner of Becomes Accordingly, the rotation of the shaft portion 3512 on the first back right rotating decoration body 3510A and the third back right rotation decoration 3510C side is smoothly transmitted, and the second back right rotation decoration 3510B and the fourth back right rotating decoration body 3510C. The shaft portion 3512 on the right rotation decorative body 3510D side can be rotated.

  As described above, the first back-and-rear right rotating decorative body 3510A, the second back-and-right rotating decorative body 3510B, and the third back-and-right rotating decorative body 3510C and the third rear right-rotating decorative body 3510C are rotated by the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 capable of transmitting rotation. Since the four back right rotating decorative bodies 3510D are connected to each other, the four back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 can be simultaneously rotated in the same direction at the same speed by driving the rear right driving motor 3531.

  When the relay gear 3533 is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the rear right drive motor 3531 in order to slide the rear right drive rack 3534 upward, the gear portion 3538a meshing with the drive gear 3532 is rotated. , The detection gear member 3538 rotates counterclockwise in front view.

  When the detection gear member 3538 rotates counterclockwise in front view and the detection piece 3538b is not detected by the rear right rotation detection sensor 3539, the drive of the rear right drive motor 3531 is stopped. When this is done, the four back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 stop in a state where the respective second decorative portions 3511b are directed forward (front) (the state of the second production position rotated by about 62 degrees from the normal state). (See FIG. 188 (b)). In this state, since the disk-shaped second decorative portion 3511b imitating a spotlight lens is in a state facing forward, four round decorations are arranged side by side, and decoration different from the normal state is performed. This can be shown to the player (see FIG. 189 (b)).

  On the other hand, when the rear right drive rack 3534 is slid to the upper moving end by the rear right drive motor 3531 via the drive gear 3532 and the relay gear 3533, the four rear right rotation decorative bodies 3510 are respectively in the normal state. In this state, the state is rotated (reversed) by about 180 degrees around each of the shaft portions 3512 (the state of the third effect position) (see FIG. 188 (c)). In this state, the third decorative portion 3511c on which the character decoration has been applied faces forward (front), and the phrase formed by the decoration of the four characters can suggest the arrival of a chance to the player. At the same time, a decoration different from the normal state can be shown to the player (see FIG. 189 (c)).

  When returning the plurality of back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 to the normal state, the back right driving motor 3531 can be returned to the normal state by rotating the back right driving motor 3531 in the opposite direction to the above.

  As described above, the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 moves the four rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 by the rear right driving motor 3531 in the respective angle ranges of about 180 degrees inverting from the normal state. It can be rotated about the part 3512 simultaneously in the same direction. Thus, the decoration facing forward can be variously changed (changed). In addition, by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear right back decoration board 3521, the four rear right rotation decoration bodies 3510 are independently light-emitting decorated in various colors and brightness. be able to.

[5-9f-3. Direction by the back left movable decorative unit and the back right movable decorative unit]
Next, mainly referring to FIG. 189, a movable effect using the back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back right movable decorative body unit 3501 in the back rear left movable rendering unit 3400 and the back rear right movable rendering unit 3500 will be mainly described. Will be explained. FIG. 189 (a) shows the rear left rotating decorative body and the rear right rotating decorative body in the rear left movable decorative body unit and the rear right movable decorative unit of the rear left movable producing unit and the rear right movable producing unit. It is a front view showing in the state of the normal first production position, (b) is a front view showing a state in which the back left rotating decorative body and the back right rotating decorative body are rotated to the second production position, c) is a front view showing the back left rotating decorative body and the back right rotating decorative body rotated to the third effect position.

  The back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back right movable decorative body unit 3501 of the back rear left movable rendering unit 3400 and the back right movable rendering unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 are disposed apart from each other in the left and right directions. The main effect display device 1600 faces forward from between (see FIG. 135 etc.). In the normal state, the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 are provided with four rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 respectively provided in them, as shown in FIG. 189 (a). And the back back right rotation decorative body 3510 is in the state of the first rendering position in which the first decorative portion 3411a and the first decorative portion 3511a are directed forward. In this state, on the back rear left decorative substrate 3421 and the back rear right decorative substrate 3521, the four LEDs corresponding to the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are made to emit light, whereby The whole of the rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 can be illuminated with various colors.

  From this normal state, the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 are moved by the back left driving motor 3431 and the back right driving motor 3531 in a direction in which their respective inner ends face forward. When rotated about 62 degrees around the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512, the disk-shaped second decoration portion 3411b and the second decoration portion 3511b of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 move forward. It is in the state of the second production position facing. In this state, the player can see the decoration in which four round second decoration portions 3411b and 3511b are arranged on the circumference. In this state of the second production position, when the LED inside the back left back decoration board 3421 and the back back right decoration board 3521 is made to emit light, the disc-shaped back back left rotation decoration 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration 3510 are formed. The second decorative portion 3411b and the second decorative portion 3511b can be illuminated and decorated, so that the player can see a luminous effect in which light is emitted from a spotlight.

  From the state of the second production position, the back left rotating decoration 3410 and the back right rotating decoration 3510 are moved by the back left driving motor 3431 and the back right driving motor 3531 to the respective second decorations facing the front. The portion 3411b and the second decorative portion 3511b are oriented around the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 in a direction facing the outside of the arc in which the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 are arranged. When rotated by 180 degrees (rotated by 180 degrees from the state of the first rendering position), the third decorative portion 3511c on which the character decoration is performed in the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 faces forward. It will be in the state of the third production position. In this state, a phrase formed by the decoration of each of the four characters can be shown to the player, and the phrase can suggest the arrival of a chance by the player. In addition, in the state of the third rendering position, on the back back left decorative board 3421 and the back back right decorative board 3521, four LEDs corresponding to the back back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back back right rotating decorative body 3510 are turned on. By emitting light, the third decorative portion 3411c and the third decorative portion 3511c of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back back right rotating decorative body 3510 can be light-emitting decorated in various colors.

  In the back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back right movable decorative body unit 3501, the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 can be separately rotated. Various effects can be shown to the player by appropriately combining the rotation and the luminous decoration.

  As described above, according to the back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back right movable decorative body unit 3501 of the back rear left movable rendering unit 3400 and the back rear right movable rendering unit 3500, the adjacent back rear left rotating decoration is provided. A plurality of back surfaces in which the shaft portions 3412 and the shaft portions 3512 of the body 3410 and the rear right rotating decoration body 3510 extend in different directions from each other, and the respective shaft portions 3412 and the shaft portions 3512 are arranged on the same plane. It is provided with a rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and a rear right rotating decorative body 3510, and a shaft part 3412 and a shaft part 3512 of the adjacent rear rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are connected to each other from a universal joint. Since the rotation is transmitted from the rotation connection mechanism 3450 to be able to transmit the rotation, the rear left driving motor 3431 and the rear right driving motor 3531 are used to rotate the first rear left rotation decorative body 3410. When the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 of the third back rear left rotating decorative body 3410C, the first back rear right rotating decorative body 3510A, and the third back rear right rotating decorative body 3510C are rotated, via the rotation connecting mechanism 3450. The shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 of the other second back left rotating decorative body 3410B, fourth back left rotating decorative body 3410D, second back right rotating decorative body 3510B, and fourth back right rotating decorative body 3510D. The rotation is transmitted, and a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 can be simultaneously rotated.

  Accordingly, the number of back left drive motors 3431 and back right drive motors 3531 for the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 can be reduced as much as possible. The space required for the left driving motor 3431 and the rear right driving motor 3531 can be made as narrow as possible, and the space required for the plurality of rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the rear right rotating decorative body 3510 is relatively reduced. Can be wider. Therefore, since the space of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 can be widened, the rotation range of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 is increased. To make the movement more enjoyable, or to make the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 larger and more conspicuous, and to make the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decoration Since it is possible to increase the impact when the number of the bodies 3510 is increased and rotated, it is possible to further enhance the effect of a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 due to movement, decoration, and the like. It is possible to entertain the player and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the first back rear left rotating decorative body 3410A and the third back rear left rotating decorative body 3410C and the first back rear right rotating decorative body 3510A and the third back right rotating decorative body 3510C are connected to the rear left driving motor 3431 and the rear. When rotated by the rear right drive motor 3531, a plurality of rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 in which the respective shaft portions 3412 and 3512 extend in different directions via the rotation connecting mechanism 3450 are formed. Since it is possible to rotate simultaneously, it is possible to show the player a movement (movable effect) with a sense of unity even though the movement of the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 is disturbed. It is possible to further enhance the effect of the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510. At this time, since the respective shaft portions 3412 and 3512 in the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are arranged on the same plane, a plurality of The back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 can be easily recognized as belonging to the same group, and a plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies can be recognized. Even if 3510 rotate at the same time, it does not give a sense of incongruity to the player, and makes the movement (movable effect) of a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 rotating simultaneously. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, two (one pair) arm portions 3451 are projected from the respective shaft portions 3412 and the tip of the shaft portion 3512 of the two adjacent rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the rear right rotating decorative body 3510. Since the number of the arm portions 3451 is minimized, the circumferential gap between the arm portions 3451 can be increased as much as possible without increasing the outer diameter of the arm portions 3451. The transmission portion 3452a of the spider 3452 can be made thick enough to have sufficient strength. Therefore, by making the transmission portion 3452a of the spider 3452 as thick as possible, the damage of the spider 3452 can be reduced, and the break during the game interrupts the game and gives the player discomfort. Can be avoided, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, since the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 (universal joint) can be suppressed from increasing in size, the space for the back left rotation decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decorative body 3510 is relatively set. In order to make the movement more enjoyable by increasing the rotation range of the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back It is possible to increase the size of the rear right rotating decorative body 3510 to make it stand out, and to increase the number of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 to increase the impact when rotated. It is possible to further enhance the effect of the movement and decoration of the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510, and to make the player entertain and enjoy the game. It can be suppressed lower.

  Further, since the rotation is transmitted through the spider 3452, the time lag of the rotation transmission due to the expansion and contraction (spring constant) of the rubber and the spring is compared with the case where the rotation is transmitted using a rubber and a spring. Can be eliminated, and a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 can be simultaneously rotated. Therefore, when a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and a back right rotating decorative body 3510 are rotated by the back left driving motor 3431 and the back right driving motor 3531, the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back Since the rear right rotating decorative body 3510 rotates at the same time, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the rear right rotating decorative body 3510 rotate in sequence with a delay, giving an unnatural feeling to the player. It is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incongruity and to enjoy the movement of the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 having a sense of unity to the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. be able to.

  In addition, the transmission unit 3452a of the spider 3452 is connected to the first back left rotating decorative body 3410A, the third back left rotating decorative body 3410C, the first back right rotating decorative body 3510A, and the third back right rotating decorative body 3510C. The side of the arm portion 3451 of the shaft portion 3412 or the shaft portion 3512, the second back left rotating decorative body 3410B, the fourth back left rotating decorative body 3410D, the second back right rotating decorative body 3510B, and the fourth back right right A universal joint (rotation coupling mechanism 3450) that transmits rotation between two shaft portions 3412 and 3512 just by being sandwiched between the shaft portion 3412 of the rotary decorative body 3510D and the side surface of the arm portion 3451 of the shaft portion 3512. Can be assembled, reducing the number of parts and assembling compared to the case where a universal joint or a constant velocity joint is used as a universal joint. Cal effort to be able to or facilitate an increase in costs for the gaming machine can be suppressed.

[5-9f-4. Rear left slide unit]
Next, the back left slide unit 3460 in the back left movable effect unit 3400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 190 to 193. FIG. 190 (a) is a perspective view of the rear left slide unit and the rear right slide unit in the rear left movable production unit and the rear right movable production unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 190 (b) is the rear left movable production. It is the perspective view which looked at the back left slide unit and the back right slide unit from the back in the unit and the back right movable effect unit. FIG. 191 is an exploded perspective view of the rear left rear slide unit and the rear right slide unit when viewed from the front, and FIG. 192 is an exploded rear left slide unit and the rear right slide unit viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 193 is a diagram illustrating the movement of the rear left movable decorative body unit and the rear right movable decorative body unit by the rear left slide unit and the rear right slide unit in the rear left movable effect unit and the rear right movable effect unit. FIG.

  The back left slide unit 3460 of the back left movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the turning table 3380 in the back center moving effect unit 3350, and the back left movable decorative body unit 3401 is moved to the center (turn) of the turning table 3380. This is to linearly move (slide) between the separated position away from the center) and the approached position. As shown, the rear left slide unit 3460 has a frame-shaped rear left unit base 3461 attached to the swivel table 3380, and left and right ends on the upper front surface of the rear left unit base 3461. , And a box-shaped slide guide 3463 that is attached to the lower front part of the rear left rear unit base 3461 and that is open at the top and that extends left and right.

  The back rear left unit base 3461 of the back rear left slide unit 3460 has a left side surface extending from the vicinity of the upper portion to the lower end in an arc shape so as to follow the outer periphery of the turntable 3380, and the upper portion is linearly formed to the right from the lower end. It is formed in a modified C-shape such that it extends to A slide shaft 3462 is attached to an upper linearly extending portion of the back rear left unit base 3461. The back rear left unit base 3461 is formed vertically symmetrically with respect to the height of the leftmost portion of the left side surface formed in an arc shape (height of the center of the arc), and Has a circular through-hole 3461a penetrating through it. The bases 3465a (gears 3465d) of a pair of slide arms 3465 described later are inserted into the two through holes 3461a arranged vertically.

  The slide shaft 3462 is slidably attached to a slide attachment portion 3420a of the back rear left base 3420 in the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401. The slide guide 3463 is slidably inserted with a slide pin 3420b of the back rear left base 3420 in the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401.

  The back rear left slide unit 3460 is attached to the rear side of the back rear left unit base 3461, and projects forward from the front surface of the back rear left unit base 3461 at a position coaxial with the two through holes 3461a. Arm mounting member 3464 having a pair of columnar mounting shafts 3464a, and a pair of mounting shafts 3464a of the arm mounting member 3464, which are rotatably mounted from the front, respectively, and are rotated back and rear left movable decorations. A pair of slide arms 3465 for sliding the body unit 3401 between the separated position and the approach position.

  The slide arm 3465 includes a base 3465a rotatably attached to the attachment shaft 3465a of the arm attachment member 3364, and an arm 3465b extending outward from the front end of the base 3465a along the front surface of the rear left unit base 3461. A sliding pin 3465c protruding forward from the distal end of the arm portion 3465b in a cylindrical shape and slidably inserted into a sliding slit 3420c of the back rear left base 3420 in the back rear movable decorative body unit 3401; And a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3465d formed on the outer periphery of the 3465a. The lower slide arm 3465 of the pair of slide arms 3465 is provided with a pulley 3465e around which the second belt 3471 is wound around the rear end of the base 3465a.

  In addition, the rear left rear slide unit 3460 is mounted below the slide guide 3463 in the lower front part of the rear rear left unit base 3461, and the rotating shaft projects rearward through the rear left unit base 3461. A back rear left slide drive motor 3466, a spur gear shaped drive gear 3467 attached to the rotating shaft of the back rear left slide drive motor 3466, a spur gear driven gear 3468a meshing with the drive gear 3467, A driving pulley 3468 having a driven gear portion 3468a and a pulley portion 3468b that rotates integrally, and being rotatably attached to the rear side of the back rear left unit base 3461; and a driving pulley at the rear side of the back rear left unit base 3461. It is rotatably mounted at an intermediate position between the 3468 and the lower slide arm 3465. Endless annular first belt 3470 wound around a pulley 3469 having two pulleys 3469a arranged side by side, a pulley 3468b of a driving pulley 3468, and a pulley 3469a on the rear side of the relay pulley 3469. And an endless annular second belt 3471 wound around a pulley portion 3469a on the front side of the relay pulley 3469 and a pulley portion 3465e of the lower slide arm 3465.

  The relay pulley 3469 is rotatably attached to the rear left unit base 3461 at a position away from the straight line connecting the pulley portion 3465e of the lower slide arm 3465 and the drive pulley 3468 to the left in front view. Accordingly, the first belt 3470 wound around the driving pulley 3468 and the relay pulley 3469, and the second belt 3471 wound around the relay pulley 3469 and the pulley portion 3465e of the slide arm 3465 have different directions. , And the transmission path of the rotation by the first belt 3470 and the second belt 3471 is bent in a V-shape with the relay pulley 3469 as a boundary. As a result, the first belt 3470 and the second belt 3471 are accommodated in the rear left unit base 3461 formed in a modified C-shape and cannot be seen from the front side.

  Further, the back rear left slide unit 3460 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the back rear left unit base 3461, and is in the form of a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear engaged with a gear portion 3465d of the lower slide arm 3465. The second transmission gear 3473 meshed with the first transmission gear 3472 and the gear portion 3465d of the upper slide arm 3465, and is rotatably attached to the rear side of the rear left unit base 3461. And a slide detection sensor 3474 attached to the upper front of the rear left unit base 3461 to detect the slide position of the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401. The first transmission gear 3472 and the second transmission gear 3473 have the same size. The slide detection sensor 3474 detects the detection piece 3420d of the back left base 3420 in the back left movable decorative body unit 3401.

  Next, the sliding (moving) of the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 by the rear left sliding unit 3460 will be described in detail. The rear left slide unit 3460 in the rear left movable effect unit 3400 is configured such that the slide pin 3420b of the rear left base 3420 in the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 is inserted into the slide guide 3463, and then the slide shaft 3462 is inserted into the slide shaft 3462. Then, the slide mounting portion 3420a of the rear left base 3420 is mounted. At this time, the slide pins 3465c at the tips of the pair of slide arms 3465 arranged vertically are inserted into the slide slits 3420c arranged vertically on the rear left base 3420, respectively. Thereby, the rear left rear slide unit 3460 can move the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 in the left / right direction without swinging in the front / rear direction by the slide shaft 3462 and the slide guide 3463.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (a), the rear left slide unit 3460 has a pair of slide arms 3465 in which the arm 3465b extends horizontally to the left from the base 3465a in a normal state. . In this state, the slide pin 3465c of the slide arm 3465 is closest to the arc-shaped left side surface of the rear left unit base 3461. That is, the slide pins 3465c of the pair of slide arms 3465 are in the state farthest from the center (turning center) of the arc forming the left side surface.

  Since the respective slide pins 3465c of the pair of slide arms 3465 are respectively inserted into the pair of slide slits 3420c of the rear left base 3420, the rear rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 is in a normal state. It is in the state of the farthest position farthest from the turning center. In this normal state, the back left movable decorative body unit 3401 is located in front of the back back left unit base 3461. In the normal state, the slide detection sensor 3474 detects the detection piece 3420d of the back left base 3420 in the back left movable decorative body unit 3401.

  When the drive gear 3467 is rotated clockwise in the front view by the rear left slide drive motor 3466 from this normal state, the driven pulley 3468 is rotated counterclockwise by the driven gear portion 3468a meshing with the drive gear 3467. Will rotate in the direction. When the driving pulley 3468 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the relay pulley 3469 rotates in the counterclockwise direction via the first belt 3470 wound around the pulley portion 3468b of the driving pulley 3468, Further, the pulley portion 3465e of the lower slide arm 3465 rotates in the counterclockwise direction via the second belt 3471 wound around the relay pulley 3469, and the lower slide arm 3465 becomes its own base. It will rotate counterclockwise about the axis of 3465a.

  When the lower slide arm 3465 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the first transmission gear 3472 meshing with the gear portion 3465d of the lower slide arm 3465 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the first transmission gear 3472 rotates in the clockwise direction. The second transmission gear 3473 meshing with the gear 3472 rotates counterclockwise, and the upper slide arm 3465 passes through the gear portion 3465d of the upper slide arm 3465 meshed with the second transmission gear 3473. Will rotate clockwise about the axis of its own base 3465a. Therefore, the lower slide arm 3465 rotates in the counterclockwise direction and the upper slide arm 3465 rotates in the clockwise direction at the same speed in directions opposite to each other at the same time.

  When the pair of slide arms 3465 rotate in directions opposite to each other, each of the slide pins 3465c revolves around a predetermined radius (the radius of the length of the arm portion 3465b) about the axis of its own base 3465a. , The position of each slide pin 3465c in the left-right direction moves rightward. As the slide pin 3465c of the slide arm 3465 revolves, the slide pin 3465c slides in the slide slit 3420c of the rear left base 3420 and presses the rear left base 3420 rightward through the slide slit 3420c. Then, the entire rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 moves (slides) to the right. Then, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 moves rightward until the pair of slide arms 3465 rotates from the normal state by 180 degrees, respectively.

  When the pair of slide arms 3465 rotates 180 degrees from the normal state, the drive of the rear left rear drive motor 3466 stops, and the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 stops moving rightward. In this state, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 is located farthest to the right from the arc-shaped left side surface of the back rear left unit base 3461 (see FIG. 193 (b)). In other words, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 is in a position (approaching position) closest to the center of the arc on the left side of the back rear left unit base 3461 (the center of the turning table 3380). In this approach position, the rear left rear decorative body unit 3401 is located inside the rear left unit base 3461 formed in a modified C shape. In the state of the approach position, the slide detection sensor 3474 is in a non-detection state.

  When the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 at the approach position is moved to the separated position, the rear left slide drive motor 3466 is driven in a direction opposite to the above, so that the rear left movable decorative unit 3401 is driven. Can be moved to the left from the approach position, and thereafter, when the slide detection sensor 3474 detects the detection piece 3420d of the rear left base 3420, the rear rear left slide drive motor 3466 is stopped, thereby moving the rear left rear. The decorative body unit 3401 can be returned to the separated position.

  Also, with the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 moved to the separating position or the approach position, the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 moves the sliding pins 3465c at the tips of the pair of slide arms 3465 in a direction in which they approach each other. By rotating the respective slide arms 3465, the respective slide pins 3465c are brought into contact with the ends of the slide slits 3420c of the rear left base 3420 on the side approaching each other. Thereby, the movement to the right at the separation position and the movement to the left at the approach position are regulated (locked), and the back left movable decorative body unit 3401 cannot slide at the separation position or the approach position. Can be locked.

  In this way, by driving the rear left rear slide drive motor 3466, the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 can be moved between the separation position and the approach position, and stopped at an arbitrary position therebetween. Can be.

  In addition, a pair of slide pins 3465c of a pair of slide arms 3465 inserted into a pair of slide slits 3420c formed at positions vertically symmetric with respect to the center in the up-down direction of the back-left base 3420, so that the back-left is formed. The base 3420 (back and left movable decorative body unit 3401) is moved between the separated position and the approach position. That is, when moving the back left rotating decorative body 3410 (the back left movable decorative body unit 3401) between the approach position and the separation position via the back rear left base 3420, the sliding of the pair of slide arms 3465 is performed. Since the moving pin 3465c applies a force to the central portion of the rear left base 3420 in the longitudinal direction (perpendicular to the moving direction) to move the rear left base 3420, the rotation of the turning table 3380 is achieved. Even if the rear left base 3420 is moved in a state in which the direction of movement of the rear left base 3420 is changed, the force for moving the rear left base 3420 is applied to the rear left base 3420 (back rear left). By acting near the position of the center of gravity of the movable decorative body unit 3401), the back rear left base 3420 can be hardly tilted from a correct posture, and the back rear left base 342 can be prevented. It can be moved smoothly. Therefore, regardless of the orientation of the back rear left base 3420 (the back left movable decorative body unit 3401) due to the rotation of the swivel table 3380, the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear left base 3420 can be smoothly moved without rattling. Since the back left rotating decorative body 3410 can be moved between the approach position and the separation position together, the back left rotating decorative body 3410 can be moved without giving a sense of incongruity to the player, The movement of the back left rotation decorative body 3410 can be enjoyed.

  In addition, the shape of the slide arm 3465 for moving the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 is such that the arm 3465b from the rotation center base 3465a to the slide pin 3465c extends in a bar shape only in one direction from the base 3465a. Since the shape is shaped, the slide arm 3465 can be made as small as possible, the slide arm 3465 can be made less noticeable, and when the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 is moved to the separation position, the slide arm It is possible to prevent a part of the 3465 from unnecessarily protruding from the rear left unit base 3461 to the center side (inside) of the game area 5a, and a part of the slide arm 3465 from the rear left unit base 3461 to the inside. By projecting, the display image of the main effect display device 1600 is interrupted to view the effect image. Appearance of Ku becomes or the game area 5a can be prevented from being deteriorated.

[5-9f-5. Back right slide unit]
Next, the back right slide unit 3560 in the back right movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 190 to 193. The back right slide unit 3560 of the back right moving effect unit 3500 is attached to the turning table 3380 of the back center moving effect unit 3350. It moves (slides) linearly between the separated position away from the center) and the approached position. As shown in the figure, the rear right slide unit 3560 has a frame-shaped rear right unit base 3561 attached to the swivel table 3380, and left and right ends on the upper front surface of the rear right unit base 3561. And a left and right box-shaped slide guide 3563 which is attached to the lower front part of the rear right unit base 3561 and is open at the top.

  The rear right unit base 3561 of the rear right slide unit 3560 has a right side extending from the vicinity of the upper portion to the lower end in an arc shape so as to follow the outer periphery of the swivel table 3380, and the upper portion is linear to the left from the lower end. It is formed in the shape of an inverted letter as if it were extended. A slide shaft 3562 is attached to an upper linearly extending portion of the rear right unit base 3561. The back rear right unit base 3561 is vertically symmetrical with respect to the height of the rightmost side of the right side surface formed in an arc shape (the height of the center of the arc), and is formed vertically. Has a circular through-hole 3561a penetrating through it. The base portions 3565a (gear portions 3565d) of a pair of slide arms 3565 described later are inserted into the two through holes 3561a arranged vertically.

  The slide mounting portion 3520a of the rear right base 3520 of the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 is slidably mounted on the slide shaft 3562. The slide guide 3563 is slidably inserted with a slide pin 3520b of the rear right base 3520 in the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501.

  Also, the rear right rear slide unit 3560 is attached to the rear side of the rear right unit base 3561, and projects forward from the front surface of the rear right unit base 3561 at a position coaxial with the two through holes 3561a. Arm mounting member 3564 having a pair of cylindrical mounting shafts 3564a, and a pair of mounting shafts 3564a of the arm mounting member 3564, which are rotatably mounted from the front, respectively, and are rotated back and right movable decoration. A pair of slide arms 3565 for sliding the body unit 3501 between the separated position and the approach position.

  The slide arm 3565 includes a base 3565a rotatably mounted on the mounting shaft 3564a of the arm mounting member 3564, and an arm 3565b extending outward from the front end of the base 3565a along the front surface of the rear right unit base 3561. A sliding pin 3565c protruding forward from the tip of the arm portion 3565b in a cylindrical shape and slidably inserted into a sliding slit 3520c of the rear right base 3520 in the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501; And a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3565d formed on the outer periphery of 3565a. The lower slide arm 3565 of the pair of slide arms 3565 includes a pulley portion 3565e around which the second belt 3571 is wound around the rear end of the base 3565a.

  In addition, the rear right rear slide unit 3560 is mounted below the slide guide 3563 in the lower front part of the rear right unit base 3561, and the rotation shaft passes through the rear right unit base 3561 and protrudes rearward. A back rear right slide drive motor 3566, a spur gear shaped drive gear 3567 attached to the rotating shaft of the back rear right slide drive motor 3566, a spur gear shaped driven gear portion 3568a meshing with the drive gear 3567, A drive pulley 3568 that has a driven gear portion 3568a and a pulley portion 3568b that rotates integrally, and is rotatably attached to the rear side of the rear right unit base 3561; and a drive pulley at the rear side of the rear right unit base 3561. It is rotatably mounted at an intermediate position between 3568 and the lower slide arm 3565, and And an endless annular first belt 3570 wound around a pulley 3568b of a driving pulley 3568 and a pulley 3569a on the rear side of the relay pulley 3569. And an endless annular second belt 3571 wound around a pulley portion 3569a on the front side of the relay pulley 3569 and a pulley portion 3565e of the lower slide arm 3565.

  The relay pulley 3569 is rotatably attached to the rear right unit base 3561 at a position away from the straight line connecting the pulley portion 3565e of the lower slide arm 3565 and the drive pulley 3568 to the right in front view. Therefore, the first belt 3570 wound around the driving pulley 3568 and the relay pulley 3569, and the second belt 3571 wound around the relay pulley 3569 and the pulley portion 3565e of the slide arm 3565 are in different directions. , And the transmission path of the rotation by the first belt 3570 and the second belt 3571 is bent in a V-shape with the relay pulley 3569 as a boundary. As a result, the first belt 3570 and the second belt 3571 are accommodated in the rear right unit base 3561 formed in the inflection shape and are not visible from the front side.

  Further, the rear right rear slide unit 3560 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the rear right unit base 3561, and is a first transmission gear in the form of a spur gear meshing with a gear portion 3565d of the lower slide arm 3565. The second transmission gear 3573 meshed with the first transmission gear 3572 and the gear portion 3565d of the upper slide arm 3565, and is rotatably attached to the rear side of the rear right unit base 3561. And a slide detection sensor 3574 attached to the front upper part of the rear right unit base 3561 to detect the slide position of the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501. The first transmission gear 3572 and the second transmission gear 3573 have the same size. The slide detection sensor 3574 detects the detection piece 3520d of the rear right base 3520 in the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501.

  Next, the sliding (moving) of the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 by the rear right sliding unit 3560 will be described in detail. The rear right slide unit 3560 in the rear right movable rendering unit 3500 is configured such that the slide pin 3520b of the rear right base 3520 in the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 is inserted into the slide guide 3563, and the slide shaft 3562 is inserted into the slide shaft 3562. Then, the slide mounting portion 3520a of the rear right base 3520 is mounted. At this time, the slide pins 3565c at the tips of a pair of slide arms 3565 arranged vertically are inserted into slide slits 3520c arranged vertically above the rear right base 3520, respectively. Thereby, the rear right rear slide unit 3560 can move the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 in the left-right direction without swinging in the front-rear direction by the slide shaft 3562 and the slide guide 3563.

  In the normal state, the rear right slide unit 3560 has a pair of slide arms 3565 in which the arm 3565b extends horizontally rightward from the base 3565a, as shown in FIG. 193 (a). . In this state, the slide pin 3565c of the slide arm 3565 is closest to the arc-shaped right side surface of the rear right unit base 3561. In other words, the slide pins 3565c of the pair of slide arms 3565 are in the state farthest from the center (the center of rotation) of the arc forming the right side surface.

  Since the respective slide pins 3565c of the pair of slide arms 3565 are respectively inserted into the pair of slide slits 3520c of the rear right base 3520, the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 is in a normal state. It is in the state of the farthest position farthest from the turning center. In this normal state, the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 is located in front of the rear right unit base 3561. In a normal state, the slide detection sensor 3574 detects the detection piece 3520d of the rear right base 3520 in the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501.

  From this normal state, when the drive gear 3567 is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the rear right slide drive motor 3566, the driven pulley 3568 is rotated clockwise by the driven gear portion 3568a meshing with the drive gear 3567. It will rotate in the direction. When the driving pulley 3568 rotates clockwise, the relay pulley 3569 rotates clockwise via the first belt 3570 wound around the pulley portion 3568b of the driving pulley 3568, and further, The pulley portion 3565e of the lower slide arm 3565 rotates clockwise via the second belt 3571 wound around the relay pulley 3569, and the lower slide arm 3565 is rotated by its own base 3565a. It will rotate clockwise around the core.

  When the lower slide arm 3565 rotates clockwise, the first transmission gear 3572 meshing with the gear portion 3565d of the lower slide arm 3565 rotates counterclockwise, and the first transmission gear 3572 rotates counterclockwise. The second transmission gear 3573 meshing with the gear 3572 rotates clockwise, and the upper slide arm 3565 is rotated via the gear portion 3565d of the upper slide arm 3565 meshed with the second transmission gear 3573. It rotates counterclockwise about the axis of its own base 3565a. Accordingly, the lower slide arm 3565 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the upper slide arm 3565 rotates in the counterclockwise direction and in the opposite direction at the same time, and at the same time.

  When the pair of slide arms 3565 rotate in directions opposite to each other, each slide pin 3565c revolves around a center of its own base 3565a at a predetermined radius (the radius of the length of the arm 3565b). The left and right positions of the respective sliding pins 3565c move to the left. As the slide pin 3565c of the slide arm 3565 revolves, the slide pin 3565c slides in the slide slit 3520c of the rear right base 3520 and presses the rear right base 3520 leftward through the slide slit 3520c. Then, the entire rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 moves (slides) to the left. Then, the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 moves to the left until the pair of slide arms 3565 rotates 180 degrees from the normal state.

  When the pair of slide arms 3565 rotates 180 degrees from the normal state, the drive of the rear right drive motor 3566 stops, and the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 stops moving to the left. In this state, the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 is located farthest to the left from the arc-shaped right side surface of the rear right unit base 3561 (see FIG. 193 (b)). In other words, the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 is in a position (approaching position) closest to the center of the circular arc on the right side of the rear right unit base 3561 (the center of the turning table 3380). In this approach position, the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 is located inside the rear right unit base 3561 formed in an inverted letter shape. In the state of the approach position, the slide detection sensor 3574 is in a non-detection state.

  When the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 at the approach position is moved to the separated position, the rear right slide drive motor 3566 is driven in the opposite direction to the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501. Can be moved rightward from the approach position, and then, when the slide detection sensor 3574 detects the detection piece 3520d of the rear right base 3520, the rear right slide drive motor 3566 is stopped, thereby moving the rear right. The decorative body unit 3501 can be returned to the separated position.

  In addition, with the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 moved to the separation position or the approach position, the rear rear right slide drive motor 3566 causes the sliding pins 3565c at the tips of the pair of slide arms 3565 to approach each other. By rotating the respective slide arms 3565, the respective slide pins 3565c are brought into contact with the ends of the slide slits 3520c of the rear right base 3520 on the side approaching each other. As a result, the movement to the left at the separation position and the movement to the right at the approach position are regulated (locked), respectively, and the back right movable decorative body unit 3501 cannot slide at the separation position or the approach position. Can be locked.

  As described above, by driving the rear right slide drive motor 3566, the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 can be moved between the separated position and the approach position, and stopped at an arbitrary position therebetween. Can be.

  In addition, a pair of slide pins 3565c of a pair of slide arms 3565 inserted into a pair of slide slits 3520c formed in a vertically symmetric position with respect to the center of the rear right base 3520 in the up-down direction, and the right and rear of the back. The base 3520 (back right movable decorative body unit 3501) is moved between the separation position and the approach position. That is, when the back right rotating decorative body 3510 (back right movable decorative body unit 3501) is moved between the approach position and the separation position via the back right base 3520, the sliding of the pair of slide arms 3565 is performed. Since the moving pin 3565c applies a force to the central portion of the rear right base 3520 in the longitudinal direction (perpendicular to the moving direction) to move the rear right base 3520, the rotation of the turntable 3380 is enabled. Even if the rear right base 3520 is moved in a state where the direction of movement of the rear right base 3520 is changed, the force for moving the rear right base 3520 is applied to the rear right base 3520 (rear right). By acting near the position of the center of gravity of the movable decorative body unit 3501), the rear right base 3520 can be hardly inclined from the correct posture, and the rear right base 352 can be used. It can be moved smoothly. Therefore, even if the rear right base 3520 (the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501) is in any orientation due to the rotation of the swivel table 3380, the rear right base 3520 and the rear right base 3520 are smoothly moved without rattling. Since the back right rotating decorative body 3510 can be moved between the approach position and the separated position together, the back right rotating decorative body 3510 can be moved without giving a sense of incongruity to the player, The movement of the back left rotation decorative body 3410 can be enjoyed.

  Also, the shape of the slide arm 3565 for moving the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 is such that the arm portion 3565b from the rotation center base 3565a to the slide pin 3565c extends in a bar shape only in one direction from the base 3565a. Since the slide arm 3565 is shaped as small as possible, the slide arm 3565 can be made less noticeable, and when the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 is moved to the separating position, the slide arm It is possible to prevent a part of 3565 from unnecessarily protruding from the rear right unit base 3561 to the center side (inside) of the game area 5a, and a part of the slide arm 3565 from the rear right unit base 3561 to the inside. By projecting, the display image of the main effect display device 1600 is interrupted to view the effect image. Appearance of Ku becomes or the game area 5a can be prevented from being deteriorated.

[5-9f-6. Direction with back left slide unit and back right slide unit]
Next, a description will be given of a movable effect using the rear left slide unit 3460 and the rear right slide unit 3560 in the rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the rear right movable effect unit 3500, mainly with reference to FIG. 194. FIG. 194 (a) is a front view showing the rear left movable decorative body unit and the rear right movable decorative body unit in the rear rear left movable rendering unit and the rear rear right movable rendering unit in a normal separation position, b) moving the rear left movable decorative body unit and the rear right movable decorative body unit to the approach position by the rear left slide unit and the rear right slide unit of the rear left movable production unit and the rear right movable production unit; FIG.

  The back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the vertically extending axis. In the normal state, the rear left movable unit 3400 and the rear right movable unit 3500 are rear left movable by the rear left slide unit 3460 and the rear right slide unit 3560 as shown in FIG. 194 (a). The decorative body unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 are in the separated positions.

  In the normal state, the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 are located at the separated positions by the rear left slide unit 3460 and the rear right slide unit 3560, respectively. The rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 are separated from each other so as to be separated from each other, and the display of the main effect display device 1600 disposed on the rear side therebetween. The screen forms a square space facing the front (see FIG. 135 etc.).

  In this normal state, the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative unit 3501 and the rear left slide unit 3460 and the rear right slide unit 3560 overlap each other in the front-back direction. Through the frame formed by the back rear left unit base 3461 and the back rear right unit base 3561, the effect image of the main effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side is displayed in a favorable state in front (on the player side). ) Can be viewed and enjoyed, and the left and right sides of the main effect display device 1600 can be decorated with the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 to improve the appearance.

  From the normal state, the rear left rear movable drive unit 3401 and the rear right are driven by the rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the rear right slide drive motor 3566 in the rear left slide unit 3460 and the rear right slide unit 3560. When the movable decorative body unit 3501 is moved from the separation position to the approach position, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 are brought close to each other (see FIG. 194 (b)).

  In a state where the back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back right movable decorative body unit 3501 are moved to the approach position, a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 provided respectively are provided. However, on the front surface of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600, the main effect display device 1600 is arranged on a circle having the same radius. The body 3410 and the rear right rotating decorative body 3510 can be attracted.

[5-9 g. Movable production unit behind the back]
Next, the rear upper movable effect unit 3600 in the rear rear effect unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-to-back upper movable effect unit in the rear-to-back movable effect unit for each main configuration and viewed from the front together with the swivel table. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear upper movable production unit in the unit for every main structure, and looked at from the back with the swivel table.

  The back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the upper front part of the turning table 3380 of the rear center movable effect unit 3350 of the rear rear effect unit 3300. The back-to-back upper movable effecting unit 3600 is a flat plate-shaped slide plate 3610 that is vertically movably mounted between a pair of fixed-side rack gears 3386 above the through-hole 3382 on the front surface of the main body 3381 of the turntable 3380. A pair of spur gear-shaped slide gears 3620 which are rotatably mounted near the left and right ends on the rear surface of the slide plate 3610 and respectively mesh with a pair of fixed side rack gears 3386 of the swivel table 3380; The slide frame 3630 includes a pair of vertically movable movable rack gears 3631 which are respectively engaged with the slide gear 3620, and are mounted on the front surface of the slide plate 3610 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. It is attached and displays the effect image And a pair of rear and upper slide drive units mounted on the front of the main body 3381 of the turntable 3380 and outside the pair of fixed side rack gears 3386 to move the slide plate 3610 in the vertical direction. 3650.

  The slide plate 3610 is spaced apart left and right, penetrates back and forth, and extends vertically, and a pair of plate-side guide slits 3611 into which guide bosses 3387 of the swivel table 3380 are slidably inserted. A plurality of (four) guide pins 3612 protruding forward in a columnar shape from positions vertically separated from both sides in the left-right direction of the plate-side guide slits 3611, and up and down in the left-right both sides of the plurality of guide pins 3612 And a flat detection piece 3614 that protrudes leftward from the drive rack gear 3613 on the left side when viewed from the front. The slide plate 3610 is attached to the swivel table 3380 so as to be slidable up and down by inserting the guide boss 3387 of the swivel table 3380 into the plate-side guide slit 3611. The drive rack gear 3613 is formed such that gear teeth protrude forward.

  The slide plate 3610 is bent in a crank shape in a plan view such that a portion of the drive rack gear 3613 projects forward. This slide plate 3610 has a slide gear 3620 extending forward and backward from a part which is partially bent in a crank shape at a rear surface part behind the drive rack gear 3613 which protrudes forward from the inner general surface. It is mounted rotatably around an axis extending in the front-back direction so as to be exposed to the front side (inward) from the part that has been set.

  The slide frame 3630 is formed near the left and right ends on the rear surface. The pair of vertically movable movable rack gears 3631 meshing with the slide gear 3620, and the pair of movable rack gears 3631 extend forward and rearward in the left-right direction. And a frame-side guide slit 3632 into which the guide pin 3612 of the slide plate 3610 is slidably inserted. The slide frame 3630 is formed in a box shape for accommodating the sub-effect display device 3640, and an opening 3633 in which the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3640 faces forward, and a transparent decoration of the outer periphery of the opening 3633. It has a rear upper frame-shaped decorative body 3634 having lightness, and a rear upper decorative board 3635 disposed on the back side of the rear upper frame shaped decorative body 3634 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing.

  The pair of movable rack gears 3631 of the slide frame 3630 are formed such that the gear teeth protrude outward in the left-right direction. The pair of movable rack gears 3631 are formed so as to face the fixed rack gear 3386 of the swivel table 3380 in the assembled state, and mesh with a portion of the slide gear 3620 exposed on the front side of the slide plate 3610. I do. The slide frame 3630 is attached to the slide plate 3610 so as to be slidable up and down by inserting the guide pins 3612 of the slide plate 3610 into the frame side guide slits 3632.

  The sub effect display device 3640 is a 7-inch full color liquid crystal display device having a smaller display screen than the main effect display device 1600.

  The back and upper slide drive unit 3650 includes a motor bracket 3651 attached to the left and right outer sides of a pair of fixed rack gears 3386 on the front surface of the main body 3381 of the turning table 3380, and a laterally outward facing side of the motor bracket 3651. A rear-rear upper drive motor 3652 having a rotation shaft extending in the left-right direction and extending inward through the motor bracket 3651 and a slide plate 3610 mounted on the rotation shaft of the rear-rear upper drive motor 3652 And a motor cover 3654 attached to the front surface of the swivel table 3380 so as to cover the front side of the motor bracket 3651 and the back and upper drive motor 3652.

  Further, of the pair of rear rear upper slide drive units 3650, the rear rear upper slide drive unit 3650 on the left side in front view includes a slide detection sensor 3655 that detects a detection piece 3614 of the slide plate 3610. The slide detection sensor 3655 is attached to the motor bracket 3651. By detecting the detection piece 3614 of the slide plate 3610 by the slide detection sensor 3655, it is possible to detect the slide position of the sub effect display device 3640 attached to the slide frame 3630.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back and rear upper movable effect unit 3600 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. FIG. 196 (a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a state in which the sub-effect display device is set to the retracted position farthest from the center of rotation in the rear-upper-rear movable effect unit, and FIG. 196 (b) is capable of turning the sub-effect display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state made into a position with a schematic structure, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which set the sub-effect display apparatus to the protruding position closest to the center of rotation by a schematic structure. FIG. 197 (a) is a front view on the turning table side of the back rear movable effect unit in a state where the sub effect display device of the rear upper movable effect unit is in a normal retreat position, and (b) is a sub effect display device. It is a front view on the turning table side in the back rear movable effect unit in a state where is set as a protruding position.

  In the normal state, the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 is in the retracted position in which the sub-effect display device 3640 is most raised (farthest from the turning center of the turning table 3380) (FIG. 196). (A) and FIG. 197 (a). In the retracted position, the drive gear 3653 of the rear upper rear slide drive unit 3650 meshes with the lower end of the pair of drive rack gears 3613 of the slide plate 3610. In this state, a pair of slide gears 3620 rotatably mounted on the slide plate 3610 are located near the upper end of the fixed rack gear 3386 on the swivel table 3380 and near the lower end of the movable rack gear 3631 on the slide frame 3630. , Each is engaged.

  In the retracted position, the detection piece 3614 of the slide plate 3610 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3655 provided in the left rear rear upper slide drive unit 3650. In the retracted position state, as illustrated, a part of the sub-effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) projects outward from the outer periphery of the turntable 3380 in a front view.

  Further, in the retracted position, the guide boss 3387 of the turntable 3380 is in contact with the lower end of the plate-side guide slit 3611 of the slide plate 3610, and the guide boss 3387 of the slide frame 3630 is located below the frame-side guide slit 3632. The guide pin 3612 of the slide plate 3610 is in contact with the end on the side. This restricts further sliding (movement) above the slide plate 3610 and the slide frame 3630 (the sub effect display device 3640).

  In this retracted position, when the drive gear 3653 is rotated clockwise in a right side view by a pair of back upper drive motors 3652, the slide plate 3610 is driven by the drive rack gear 3613 meshing with the drive gear 3653. Slide downward (to approach the center of the turntable 3380). When the slide plate 3610 slides downward, a pair of slide gears 3620 attached to the slide plate 3610 also slide (move) downward. At this time, the fixed-side rack gear 3386 of the turning table 3380 meshes with the pair of slide gears 3620 from the left and right outer sides, respectively. The slide gear 3620 is rotated by the rack gear 3386 (the left side slide gear 3620 in a front view is clockwise, and the right side slide gear 3620 in a front view is counterclockwise).

  In each of the pair of slide gears 3620, since the movable rack gear 3631 of the slide frame 3630 meshes from the opposite side to the fixed rack gear 3386, the sliding plate 3610 slides downward, so that the left side as viewed from the front is moved. When the slide gear 3620 rotates in the clockwise direction and the right slide gear 3620 in the front view rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the slide frame 3630 is moved by the movable rack gear 3631 meshing with each slide gear 3620. It will slide downward at twice the speed with respect to the slide plate 3610. In other words, the slide frame 3630 slides downward twice as far as the slide distance of the slide plate 3610. Since the sub-effect display device 3640 is attached to the slide frame 3630, the sub-effect display device 3640 slides downward (toward the turning center of the turning table 3380) together with the slide frame 3630.

  When the slide frame 3630 slides downward via the slide plate 3610 by the pair of back and rear upper drive motors 3652, the portion located outside the outer periphery of the turning table 3380 in front view becomes the outer periphery of the turning table 3380. As it moves further inward, the slide frame 3630 (the sub effect display device 3640) slides into the through hole 3382 of the turning table 3380 in front view (see FIG. 196 (b)).

  Then, when the slide frame 3630 (the sub effect display device 3640) is in the protruding position located at the lowermost position (close to the turning center of the turning table 3380), the driving of the pair of back rear upper drive motors 3652 is stopped ( (See FIG. 196 (c) and FIG. 197 (b)). In this protruding position, substantially the entire display screen of the sub effect display device 3640 attached to the slide frame 3630 is located in the through hole 3382 of the turntable 3380 in front view. In the protruding position, the guide boss 3387 of the revolving table 3380 is in contact with the upper end of the plate-side guide slit 3611 of the slide plate 3610, and the upper end of the frame-side guide slit 3632 of the slide frame 3630. The guide pin 3612 of the slide plate 3610 is in contact with the portion. This restricts further sliding (movement) below the slide plate 3610 and the slide frame 3630 (the sub effect display device 3640).

  In order to return from the protruding position to the retracted position, the pair of back and rear upper drive motors 3652 rotate the respective drive gears 3653 in the opposite direction to that described above. 3630 (the sub effect display device 3640) can be slid upward, and the driving of the pair of back-upper upper drive motors 3652 is stopped based on the detection of the detection piece 3641 of the slide plate 3610 by the slide detection sensor 3655. It can be returned to the retracted position.

  In addition, the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 can stop the sub-effect display device 3640 at an arbitrary position between the retreat position and the protruding position by the pair of rear rear upper drive motors 3652.

  As described above, the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 moves the sub effect display device 3640 having a display screen smaller than that of the main effect display device 1600 toward the retreat position and the turning center that are farther from the center (the turning center) of the turning table 3380. Between the projected positions. In other words, the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 moves the sub effect display device 3640 between a position outside the main effect display device 1600 (retreat position) and the front side (projection position) of the main effect display device 1600. , The effect image (main effect image) by the main effect display device 1600 or the effect image by the sub effect display device 3640 (sub effect image) according to the slide position of the sub effect display device 3640. ) Can be emphasized, and the player can enjoy the main effect image and the sub effect image.

[5-9g-1. Direction by the back movable center movable production unit and the back rear upper movable production unit]
Next, with respect to an effect (movable effect) using the rear central movable effect unit 3350 and the rear upper movable effect unit 3600 in the rear movable effect unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000, mainly refer to FIGS. 198 to 201. This will be described in detail. FIG. 198 is a front view of the rear movable effect unit schematically illustrating a state in which the sub-effect display device is turned at the first turning position. FIG. 199 is a front view of the rear movable effect unit schematically illustrating the movable range of the sub-effect display device in the first turning position. FIG. 200 is a front view of the rear movable effect unit showing, in a schematic configuration, a movable range of the sub effect display device in the second turning position. FIG. 201 is a front view of the rear movable effect unit showing, in a schematic configuration, a movable range of the sub-effect display device at the third turning position.

  The sub effect display device 3640 of the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 in the rear rear movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the turning table 3380 of the rear rear center moving effect unit 3350, and the turning table 3380 is located on a straight line passing through the turning center. Is slidable between a retracted position away from the center (center of rotation) and a projecting position close to the center of rotation. When the sub-effect display device 3640 is in the retracted position, a part of the slide frame 3630 to which the sub-effect display device 3640 is mounted is located outside the outer periphery of the turntable 3380 in front view. When the sub-effect display device 3640 is in the protruding position, the entire slide frame 3630 to which the sub-effect display device 3640 is mounted is located inside the outer periphery of the turning table 3380 in front view, and the sub-effect display device 3640 is located inside the opening 3361b of the unit base 3361.

  The rear rear center movable effect unit 3350 is configured such that the slide frame 3630 of the rear rear upper movable effect unit 3600 has a range (return restriction range) between the retracted position and a position where the outer periphery matches the outer periphery of the turntable 3380 in front view. ), The turning range of the turning table 3380 is regulated (see FIG. 198). The back rear center movable effect unit 3350 has a turning position where the turning range of the swivel table 3380 is regulated is a first turning position where the back rear upper moving effect unit 3600 (sub-effect display device 3640) is located immediately above the turning center. A second turning position where the sub-effect display device 3640 is located right to the turning center (a position turned at an angle of 90 degrees in a clockwise direction from the first turning position in a front view), and a sub-effect directly below the turning center. Three turning positions are provided: a third turning position where the display device 3640 is located (a position turned at an angle of 90 degrees in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front from the second turning position). The sub-effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) can slide to the retreat position (within the turning restriction range) only when the turning table 3380 turns to any of the three turning positions.

  In addition, when the slide frame 3630 is located within a range (turnable range) between a position where the outer periphery of the slide frame 3630 matches the outer periphery of the turntable 3380 in front view and a protruding position, the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 can be used. Then, the restriction of the turning range of the turning table 3380 is released, and the turning table 3380 (the sub effect display device 3640) can freely turn between the first turning position, the second turning position, and the third turning position. (See FIG. 198).

  In the normal state, the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 is located at the first turning position directly above the turning center of the turning table 3380 by the rear rear center moving effect unit 3350, and the sub effect display device 3640 is turned on. , And is located at a retracted position away from the center of rotation by the rear upper slide drive unit 3650 (see FIG. 169 and the like).

  In this normal state, since the slide frame 3630 is located within the turning restriction range, the turning range of the sub effect display device 3640 (turning table 3380) is ± with the pair of guide pins 3363 via the slide frame 3630. The turning is restricted only within the range of the turning angle of 5 degrees (see FIG. 199). In the state of the first turning position, the sub effect display device 3640 can be slid up and down between the retreat position and the protruding position. When the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the projecting position in the state of the first turning position, the sub-effect display device 3640 can be made to cover the upper half of the opening 3361b (the main effect display device 1600). Can be enjoyed by the player.

  At the second turning position in which the first turning position is turned at a turning angle of 90 degrees clockwise from the first turning position, as shown in FIG. 200, the sub effect display device 3640 is located right to the turning center, and It extends vertically on the right side of 3361b (main effect display device 1600). When the slide frame 3630 is slid into the turning restriction range on the retreat position side at the second turning position, the sub effect display device 3640 (turning table 3380) turns by the pair of guide pins 3363 via the slide frame 3630. It becomes impossible. In the state of the second turning position, the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3640 can be expanded to the right by the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3640 by setting the sub-effect display device 3640 to the retreat position. The player can enjoy the effect image on the wide screen.

  At the third turning position in which the second turning position is turned clockwise in the clockwise direction at a turning angle of 90 degrees, as shown in FIG. 201, the sub effect display device 3640 is located immediately below the turning center, and the display thereof is performed. The screen extends left and right. When the slide frame 3630 is slid into the rotation restriction range on the retreat position side at the third turning position, the sub effect display device 3640 (the turning table 3380) is moved by the pair of guide pins 3363 via the slide frame 3630. It is restricted to a state where it can be turned only within the range of the turning angle of ± 7 degrees. By reciprocatingly rotating the swivel table 3380 within this rotatable angle range, the sub effect display device 3640 can be swung right and left, and the player can enjoy the effect image physically swinging. it can. In addition, when the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the protruding position in the state of the third turning position, it is possible to cover the lower half of the opening 3361b (main effect display device 1600). The effect image displayed at 3640 can be enjoyed by the player.

  As described above, the sub-rear display device 3640 can be moved to various positions around the turning center of the turning table 3380 by the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the back rear upper moving effect unit 3600. The movement of the effect display device 3640 can be enjoyed by the player.

[5-9h. Movable production unit behind the back]
Next, the rear lower movable effect unit 3700 in the rear movable effect unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 202 (a) is a perspective view of the lower back rear movable rendering unit in the back rear movable rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 202 (b) is the back lower lower movable rendering unit of the back unit of the rear unit. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the device viewed from behind. The back rear lower movable effect unit 3700 is attached to the lower front part of the turning table 3380 in the rear center movable effect unit 3350 of the rear rear movable effect unit 3300.

  The back rear lower movable effecting unit 3700 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the swivel table 3380, and has a unit main body 3701 on the front side of which a decoration of a translucent geometric pattern is formed, and a center part in the left-right direction of the unit main body 3701. It is attached to the rear surface, and the rotating shaft is attached to the lower back lower drive motor 3702 projecting forward through the unit main body 3701, and to the rotating shaft of the lower back lower drive motor 3702, and has an outer shape like a spur gear. And a lower back lower decorative board 3704 attached to the rear side of the unit main body 3701 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a lower back lower decorative board 3704 And a board cover 3705 attached to the unit main body 3701 so as to cover the rear side of the center part in the left-right direction.

  The unit main body 3701 of the back rear lower movable effecting unit 3700 has an outer shape formed by an arc along the outer periphery of the swivel table 3380 and a string connecting both ends of the arc. The unit main body 3701 has a decoration that is depressed in a circular shape at the center in the left-right direction, and a star-shaped decoration is formed on both the left and right sides and near the left and right ends. The back-and-back lower decorative ornament 3703 is housed in the center of the unit main body 3701 and is recessed in a circular shape. The back-and-back lower drive motor 3702 rotates around an axis extending back and forth through the center thereof.

  The back back lower decorative board 3704 can make the front and rear lower back decorative body 3703 of the unit main body 3701 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face.

  According to the back rear lower movable effect unit 3700, the back rear lower rotary decorative body 3703 can be rotated by the back rear lower drive motor 3702. At this time, when the LED of the back rear lower decorative substrate 3704 is appropriately illuminated, since the outer shape of the back rear lower decorative body 3703 is formed in a gear shape, light from behind is blocked by the gear teeth. It can be made to look as if it is blinking by passing through, and the attention of the player can be attracted to the lower back and back rotating decorative body 3703.

[5-10. Production on a game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 203 is a front view of the game board in a state where the upper first rotating decorative body and the upper second rotating decorative body of the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit have been moved to the lowered position. FIG. 204 shows the back left movable decorative unit and the back right movable decoration of the back left movable production unit and the back right movable production unit in the state of the first turning position of the swivel table in the back movable production unit of the back unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where a body unit was moved from a separation position to an approach position. FIG. 205 is a diagram illustrating a rear left movable decorative unit and a rear right movable decoration of the rear left movable directing unit and the rear right movable directing unit in a state in which the turning table of the rear movable unit of the rear unit is in the third turning position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where a body unit was moved from a separation position to an approach position. FIG. 206 is a front view of the game board in a state where the sub-effect display device in the movable effect unit behind the back unit is moved to the projecting position in the normal first turning position. FIG. 207 is a front view of the game board in a state where the sub-effect display device in the movable effect unit behind the back unit is turned from the first turning position to the second turning position in the protruding position. FIG. 208 is a front view of the game board in a state where the sub-effect display device has been moved to the retreat position from the state of FIG. 207.

  FIG. 209 is a front view of the game board in a state where the sub-effect display device in the movable effect unit behind the back unit is moved from the second turning position to the third turning position in the protruding position. FIG. 210 is a front view of the game board in a state where the sub-effect display device has been moved to the retreat position from the state of FIG. 209. FIG. 211 shows the back left rotating decorative body and the back right rotating in the rear left movable decorative unit and the rear right movable decorative unit of the rear left movable rendering unit and the rear right movable rendering unit from the state of FIG. 205. The decorative body is brought to the third rendering position, and the first rotary decorative body and the second rotary decorative body on the back of the movable rendering unit on the rear side are moved to the lowering position, and the first rotary decorative body on the back and the reverse are rotated. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which rotated the upper second rotary decoration.

  In a normal state, the game board 5 passes through a transparent game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) outside the frame-shaped center role 2500 as shown in FIGS. The decoration of unit 3100 is visible. Also, within the frame (inside) of the center role item 2500, the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 can be viewed well from the player side (front).

  In a normal state, the upper back movable main unit 3230 of the upper back movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is in the raised position, and the upper side of the main effect display device 1600 in the frame of the center role 2500. Thus, on the right side of the logo decoration unit 2550, the upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the upper second rotating decorative body 3233 of the upper back movable main body unit 3230 in the upper movable back rendering unit 3200 can be seen.

  In a normal state, the turning table 3380 of the rear center movable effect unit 3350 in the rear movable effect unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 is in the first turning position, and the rear left movable effect unit 3400 and The rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 of the rear right movable effect unit 3500 are in the separated positions away from the turning center of the turntable 3380, respectively. Therefore, through the frame of the center role 2500, a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 of the back left movable effect unit 3400 are visible on the left side of the main effect display device 1600, and the right side of the main effect display device 1600. At the same time, a plurality of back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 of the back right movable effect unit 3500 can be seen. The plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 of the back rear left movable rendering unit 3400 and the back rear right movable rendering unit 3500 move the first decorative portion 3411a and the first decorative portion 3511a forward, respectively. It is in the state of the first production position toward.

  Further, in a normal state, the lower rear-side movable effect unit 3700 of the rear-side movable effect unit 3300 located behind the stage 2530 can be seen through the transparent center role 2500 and the transparent panel board 1110. In this normal state, the sub-effect display device 3640 in the back-to-back upper movable effect unit 3600 of the back-to-back movable effect unit 3300 is located at the retracted position, and the logo decoration unit of the center role 2500 arranged on the front side. It is hidden by 2550 and cannot be seen.

  The game board 5 is a decoration unit in front of the back unit 3000 according to a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. 3100, back upper movable effect unit 3200, back rear movable effect unit 3350, back rear left movable effect unit 3400, back rear right movable effect unit 3500, back rear upper movable effect unit provided in rear rear movable effect unit 3300 The 3600 and the lower back lower movable effect unit 3700 perform a predetermined effect (movable effect or light emitting effect).

  Specifically, as an effect using the back upper movable effecting unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 129 and FIG. 135, the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body In a state where 3233 is located on the right side of the logo decoration unit 2550 of the center role 2500, the first LED 3234a of the back decoration board 3234 is appropriately lit to emit the first top decoration 3232 and the second top decoration. When the body 3233 is illuminated and decorated, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233, and the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper The upper right corner of the game area 5a where the second rotating decorative body 3233 is located can be noticed. This makes the player think that there is something good in the right area of the game area 5a, and hits the game ball such that the game ball circulates on the right side of the center role 2500. A driving operation (so-called right-handing) can be encouraged, and the driving operation of a game ball can be enjoyed.

  In addition, as an effect using the back upper movable rendering unit 3200, the back upper movable main unit 3230 is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view by the driving of the rear raising / lowering drive motor 3213, and the rear upper first rotary decorative body 3232 is provided. And the upper back second rotary decorative body 3233 is moved from the upper position on the right side of the logo decoration unit 2550 above the main effect display device 1600 to the lower position on the front surface of the main effect display device 1600 in the center of the game area 5a ( See FIG. 203). As a result, the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 whose outer peripheries have a deformed polygonal shape are located substantially at the center on the front side of the main effect display device 1600, and the main effect display device 1600. Since the effect image displayed on the screen is interrupted, it is possible to make the effect stand out from the player side, and to perform an effect that strongly attracts the interest of the player.

  Then, in this state, when the upper back first rotary decorative body 3232 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the upper back rotary drive motor 3235, the upper rear side rotary decorative body 3232 is disposed on the front side of the back upper first rotary decorative body 3232. The second rotary decorative body 3233 revolves in the counterclockwise direction around the first shaft portion 3232a while rotating in the counterclockwise direction, and is disposed on the back side of the first rotary decorative body 3232. It is possible to show a movable effect in which the plurality of back-upside-out decorations 3246 project out of the back-upper first rotary decoration 3232 at different timings. As a result, it is possible to give the player a movable effect that feels like swirling and the stars scattering, and it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and to have something good for the player It is possible to make the user think that there is a chance, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  At this time, the first LED 3234a and the second LED 3234b of the back upper decorative substrate 3234 emit light as appropriate, so that the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 blink twinkle, and the back upper decorative decoration appears. The effect that the body 3246 (emerging decorative portion 3246b) scatters while shining can be shown, and the above-described operational effects can be further exhibited.

  Subsequently, as an effect using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350, the rear rear left movable effect unit 3400, and the rear right movable effect unit 3500 in the rear rear movable effect unit 3300, for example, in the normal state, the rear rear left A back-left movable drive unit 3466 and a back-left slide drive motor 3566 of a back-left slide unit 3460 and a back-right slide unit 3560 of the movable effect unit 3400 and the back-right moveable unit 3500, respectively, are provided with a back-left movable ornament. When the unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 are moved to the approach positions close to the center of rotation of the turntable 3380, respectively, the rear left movable decorative body formed in an arc shape as shown in FIG. Body unit 3401 and back right movable decorative body unit 3501 Out a state located on the front side in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the display device 1600, it is possible to show the effect to cover the left and right of the main effect display device 1600 to the player.

  In this state, on the front side of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600, the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 arranged on the left and right form a part of a ring. It is possible to show the player such a decoration, and to make the player pay attention to the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501. In this state, the central portion of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 faces forward in a circular shape from between the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 which are arranged side by side. Thus, it is possible to enjoy the effect image framed in a circular shape by the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501.

  In this state, although not shown, a plurality of back left rotations are performed by the back left drive motor 3431 and the back right drive motor 3531 in the back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back right movable decorative body unit 3501. The decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 are moved from the first production position with the first decorative part 3411a and the first decorative part 3511a facing forward, respectively, to the second decorative part 3411b and the second decorative part 3511b. Is rotated to the second effect position in which is directed forward, or the respective third decorative portion 3411c and the third decorative portion 3511c are directed forward in the third effect position (see FIG. 189). Thus, the decoration mode of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 changes, so that a variety of effects can be shown to the player, and the player can be hardly bored.

  In addition, as an effect using the rear rear center movable effect unit 3350, the rear rear left movable effect unit 3400, and the rear rear right movable effect unit 3500, the turning table 3380 is set to the third turning position, and the rear rear upper movable effect. With the sub-effect display device 3640 of the unit 3600 in the retracted position, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 are moved to the approach positions close to the turning center of the turning table 3380, respectively. (See FIG. 205). In this state, the display screen of the sub effect display device 3640 is located below the back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back right movable decorative body unit 3501 covering the left and right sides of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600. positioned. Thus, even if both left and right sides of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 are covered by the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501, the sub effect display arranged under the rear movable decorative body unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501. The reduction of the display area can be compensated for by the display screen of the device 3640, and the decorations of the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 and the effects of the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640. The effect by the image can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  In the state of FIG. 205 as well, the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are rotated by the back rear left driving motor 3431 and the back rear right driving motor 3531 to change the decoration. Can be entertained.

  Furthermore, as an effect using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350, the rear rear left movable effect unit 3400, and the rear rear right movable effect unit 3500, the turning table 3380 is set to the third turning position, and the rear rear upper movable effect. With the sub effect display device 3640 of the unit 3600 in the retracted position (the state of FIG. 208), the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 approach the turning center of the turning table 3380, respectively. Move to the approaching position. Although illustration is omitted, in this state, the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 formed in an arc shape is located below the logo decorative unit 2550 of the center role 2500 that is above the center of the main effect display device 1600. In addition, the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 also formed in an arc shape is located above the stage 2530 below the center of the main effect display device 1600, and the main effect display device 1600 The effect that covers the upper side and the lower side of the player can be shown to the player.

  In this state, the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 that are vertically arranged on the front surface of the display screen of the main effect display 1600 form a part of a ring. It is possible to show the player such a decoration, and to make the player pay attention to the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501. Also, in this state, the central portion of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 faces forward in a circular shape from between the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 arranged vertically. Thus, it is possible to enjoy the effect image framed in a circular shape by the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501.

  Further, as an effect using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350, the rear rear left movable effect unit 3400, and the rear rear right movable effect unit 3500, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the rear rear are provided, though not shown. By moving only one of the right movable decorative body units 3501 from the separation position to the approach position, it is possible to show the player an effect that covers only one side in the left-right direction of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600. . Thereby, by selecting the back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back right movable decorative body unit 3501 to be moved between the separated position and the approach position, various effects can be presented to the player. In this way, the player can enjoy the game without getting tired.

  Subsequently, as an effect using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 in the back rear movable effect unit 3300, for example, the turning table 3380 is set to the first turning position, and the sub effect display device is used. In a normal state with the rear position 3640 being the retreat position, the respective drive gears 3653 are moved to the right side by the rear upper drive motors 3652 provided on the pair of rear upper slide drive units 3650 in the rear upper movable effect unit 3600, respectively. By rotating the slide frame 3630 via the slide plate 3610 in a clockwise direction as viewed, and sliding the slide frame 3630 from the retracted position away from the center of rotation of the swivel table 3380 to a projecting position close to the center of rotation, the slide frame 3630 The sub effect display device 3640 is projected at the same time So that the downward movement).

  At this time, the sub effect display device 3640, which has been hidden behind the logo decoration unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500 in the retreat position, moves downward from the lower end of the logo decoration unit 2550, so that the player gradually moves from the player side. When the vehicle stops at the protruding position, the upper half of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 disposed on the rear side is covered (see FIG. 206). Thus, the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3640 can be viewed from the player side, and the interest of the player is displayed on the effect image (sub-effect image) displayed on the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3640. An attraction that can be attracted can be performed.

  Thereby, the appearance of the sub-effect display device 3640 different from the main effect display device 1600 causes the player to think that an important effect image is displayed on the sub-effect display device 3640. Thus, the effect image displayed on the display screen of the sub effect display device 3640 can be enjoyed. In addition, the appearance of the sub-effect display device 3640 can suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, increase the expectation for the game, and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the first turning position, during the movement of the sub-effect display device 3640 from the retracted position to the protruding position, or when the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the protruding position, The revolving table 3380 may be reciprocally rotated within a predetermined range of the revolving angle. Accordingly, the sub-effect display device 3640, which can be seen from the player side, swings left and right by reciprocating turning, and the effect image displayed on the sub-effect display device 3640 physically swings. The effect can be shown to the player. Accordingly, the sub-effect display device 3640 is shaken together with the displayed effect image, so that the movement of the sub-effect display device 3640 can be enjoyed. At this time, by swinging the sub-effect display device 3640 so as to be related to the effect image displayed on the main effect display device 1600, the player can be more enjoyed and the interest in the game can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

  As an effect using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the rear rear upper movable effect unit 3600, the slide frame 3630 on which the sub effect display device 3640 is mounted is rotated by a pair of rear rear upper drive motors 3652. In a state where the turning table 3380 is positioned within the possible range, the turning table 3380 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise in front view to the second turning position by the back turning drive motor 3370 (see FIG. 207). Thus, the effect that the sub effect display device 3640 visible below the logo decoration unit 2550 of the center role item 2500 turns around the center of the main effect display device 1600 (the turning center of the turning table 3380). Can be shown to the player.

  By turning the sub effect display device 3640 located within the turnable range from the first turning position to the second turning position, the horizontally long sub effect display device 3640 is in a vertically long state, and the main effect display device 1600 Since the right half of the display screen is covered, the player can enjoy a change in the direction of the sub-effect display device 3640. At this time, when the sub-effect display device 3640 is turned while, for example, a predetermined character is displayed as an effect image on the display screen of the sub-effect display means, the character moves (turns) together with the sub-effect display device 3640. ) Can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained. In addition, by moving (turning) the character (sub-effect display device 3640), it is possible to make the player feel that the game state shifts to another stage (for example, evolves from a normal reach effect). Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the next state and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

  After turning the sub-effect display device 3640 to the second turning position, the sub-effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) positioned within the turnable range is moved to the retreat position by the pair of back-upper upper drive motors 3652. Then, the sub-effect display device 3640 is arranged on the right side of the main effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 208). This allows the player to show an effect using the entire display screen of the main effect display device 1600 and the entire display screen of the sub effect display device 3640. For example, by displaying different effect images on the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640, it is possible to provide a lot of information on the game to the player, and it is possible to make the player hard to get tired of. . Alternatively, an effect image in which the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is expanded rightward by displaying an effect image constituting one image on the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 respectively. Can be shown to the player, and a powerful effect image can be enjoyed by the wide screen extending left and right.

  In the state where the sub effect display device 3640 is moved to the second turning position and the retreat position, as shown in FIG. 208, the sub effect display device 3640 is located near the right end of the game area 5a. The sub-effect display device 3640 can be suitably used for displaying an effect image that prompts a hit operation of a game ball so that the game ball circulates on the right side of the accessory 2500, and the player hits the game ball. Can be entertained.

  Further, as an effect using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600, in the state of the second turning position, the sub effect display device 3640 is attached by the pair of back rear upper drive motors 3652. With the slide frame 3630 positioned within the pivotable range, the turning table 3380 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise in the front view to the third turning position by the rear turning drive motor 3370 (see FIG. 209). ). Thereby, the sub-effect display device 3640 that has covered the right side of the main effect display device 1600 shows an effect such that the player turns around the center of the main effect display device 1600 (the turning center of the turning table 3380). be able to.

  By turning the sub effect display device 3640 located within the turnable range from the second turning position to the third turning position, the vertically long sub effect display device 3640 is in a horizontally long state, and the main effect display device 1600 Since the lower half of the display screen is covered, it is possible for the player to enjoy the change in the direction of the sub-effect display device 3640. At this time, when the sub-effect display device 3640 is turned while, for example, a predetermined character is displayed as an effect image on the display screen of the sub-effect display means, the character moves (turns) together with the sub-effect display device 3640. ) Can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained. In addition, by moving (turning) the character (sub-effect display device 3640), it is possible to make the player feel that the game state shifts to another stage (for example, evolves from a normal reach effect). Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the next state and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

  After the sub-effect display device 3640 is turned to the third turning position, the sub-effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) located within the turnable range is moved to the retreat position by the pair of rear upper drive motors 3652. Then, the sub-effect display device 3640 is arranged below the main effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 210). This allows the player to show the effect using the entire display screen of the main effect display device 1600 and the entire display screen of the sub effect display device 3640, which are arranged vertically. For example, by displaying different effect images on the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640, it is possible to provide a lot of information on the game to the player, and it is possible to make the player hard to get tired of. . Alternatively, by displaying the effect images constituting one image on the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640, respectively, an effect image in which the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is extended downward is displayed. It can be shown to a player, and a powerful effect image can be enjoyed by a vertically elongated screen extending vertically.

  When the sub-effect display device 3640 is in the third turning position and the retreat position, as shown in FIG. Look to the side. Therefore, by displaying an effect image pointing to the stage 2530 or the first starting port 2002 on the sub effect display device 3640 according to the game state, the game ball aiming at the first starting port 2002 for the player is displayed. The driving operation can be encouraged, and the driving operation of the game ball can be enjoyed.

  Further, at the third turning position, the turning table 3380 may be reciprocated in a predetermined turning angle range by the back turning drive motor 3370 of the fixed side unit 3360 in the back center movable effect unit 3350. Accordingly, the sub-effect display device 3640 visible below the main effect display device 1600 swings right and left by reciprocating turning, and the effect image displayed on the sub-effect display device 3640 physically swings. Can be shown to the player. Accordingly, the sub-effect display device 3640 is shaken together with the displayed effect image, so that the movement of the sub-effect display device 3640 can be enjoyed, and the second position located in front of the sub-effect display device 3640 can be enjoyed. The player's interest can be directed to the one starting port 2002. At this time, by swinging the sub-effect display device 3640 so as to be related to the effect image displayed on the main effect display device 1600, the player can be more enjoyed and the interest in the game can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

  As an effect using the back rear central movable effect unit 3350 and the rear rear upper movable effect unit 3600, although not shown, in addition to the above, in addition to the above, from the first turning position to the third turning position at the second turning position. The sub-effect display device 3640 may be turned without stopping. Alternatively, the sub effect display device 3640 may be turned in any direction between the first turning position, the second turning position, and the third turning position, and the sub effect display device 3640 is turned at any position. It may be appropriately moved between a retreat position away from the center and a protruding position approaching the turning center. As described above, by using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600, the sub effect display device 3640 can be moved to various positions or various movements can be performed. A variety of effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  Subsequently, as an effect using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the back rear lower movable effect unit 3700, for example, the back of the rear lower lower movable effect unit 3700 with the turning table 3380 in the first turning position. When the back lower drive decorative body 3703 is rotated by the back lower drive motor 3702, the lower back lower rotary decorative body 3703 visible on the rear side of the stage 2530 through the transparent center role 2500 and the panel plate 1110 is rotated. (See FIG. 206 and the like). With this, the player's interest can be attracted to the rotating back and forth lower decorative body 3703, so that the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 and the first starting port 2002 which can be seen in front of the player can also be drawn. Of the game ball, the player can be prompted to drive the game ball aiming at the first starting port 2002 and enter the game ball.

  In addition, when the rear lower lower rotary decorative body 3703 is rotated by the lower rear lower drive motor 3702 of the lower rear movable effect unit 3700 in a state where the turning table 3380 is in the second turning position, the inside of the frame of the center role 2500 In addition, it is possible to show the player the effect that the lower back lower rotating decorative body 3703 seen above the warp entrance 2520 rotates through the transparent center role 2500 and the panel board 1110 (see FIGS. 207 and 208). Thereby, since the player's interest can be attracted to the rotating back-and-back lower decorative body 3703, the player's interest can be attracted to the left side of the center role 2500. On the other hand, it is possible to promote a left hit of the game ball passing through the left side of the center role item 2500, and it is possible to entertain the operation of hitting the game ball.

  Subsequently, as an effect using the back upper movable effect unit 3200 and the rear rear movable effect unit 3300, for example, the turning table 3380 is at the third turning position, and the sub effect display device of the rear upper upper movable effect unit 3600 is provided. With the rear movable left back decorative unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 moved to the approach position close to the turning center of the turning table 3380, respectively, with the rear position 3640 set to the retracted position, the rear rear left movable A plurality of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 of the decorative body unit 3401 and the back right movable decorative body unit 3501 are respectively the third decorative part 3411c and the third decorative part 3511c facing forward. While rotating to the state of the three production positions, the back upper movable main unit 3230 of the back upper movable production unit 3200 is raised from the raised position. It is moved to the descending position rotates the second rotating decorative body 3233 first rotating decorative body 3232 and on the back on the back with (see Figure 211).

  As a result, the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is configured such that the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 of the back upper movable effect unit 3200, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400, and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 are rear left movable. The decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 are in a state of being covered, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the center of the game area 5a and the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 can be displayed. By covering, the player can be made to think that there is something good (for example, the start of the "big hit" game), and the expectation for the game can be increased.

  In this state, as shown in FIG. 211, the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401, and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 covering the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 are displayed. Since the display screen of the sub effect display device 3640 faces forward, the effect image of the sub effect display device 3640 can be displayed even if the effect image of the main effect display device 1600 is not visible. Can also entertain the player.

  As an effect using the back upper movable effect unit 3200 and the back rear movable effect unit 3300, in FIG. 211, a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are rotated to a third effect position. Although the state where it was shown is shown, the state where it is in the first production position or the state where it is rotated to the second production position can also be used. By appropriately selecting the position, it is possible to present various patterns of effects to the player.

  In addition, in FIG. 211, the turning table 3380 is shown in the state of the third turning position as an effect using the back upper movable effecting unit 3200 and the back rear moving effecting unit 3300, but the first turning position or the second turning position is shown. It can also be in the state of the turning position, and it is possible to show the player the effects of various patterns.

  As described above, in the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the back front center movable rendering unit 3350, the back left movable rendering unit 3400, and the back rear movable rendering unit 3300 in the back front decorative unit 3100, the back upper movable rendering unit 3200, and the back rear movable rendering unit 3300 It is possible to perform a light-emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like by appropriately using the back rear right moving effect unit 3500, the back rear upper moving effect unit 3600, and the back rear lower moving effect unit 3700. Various patterns of effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining them. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 212 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4, Each control is assigned. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, the door frame side effect display device 460 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511, the main effect. An effect display control unit 1512 for controlling display of an effect image on the display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 is provided. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls the payout of the game balls and the like, and a firing control unit 953 that controls the firing of the game balls by rotating the handle 302.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. An MPU, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids The circuit includes a circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 3102 for detecting a game ball received in the first starting port 2002, and a second starting port sensor for detecting a game ball received in the second starting port 2004. 2402, a general winning opening sensor 3101 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate section 2003, a large detecting a game ball received in the large winning opening 2005. The first receiving port sensor 2404 for detecting a game ball received in the first receiving port 2007 after being detected by the winning opening sensor 2403 and the large receiving port sensor 2403, and the second receiving port after being detected by the big winning port sensor 2403. A second reception sensor 2405 for detecting a game ball received in 2008, and a magnet for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a. Capacitors 3103, the detection signal from the like are input via the respective main control I / O ports.

  The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the starting port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, and the V winning port solenoid 2416 are output. A drive signal is output or a status display 1401, a normal symbol display 1402, a normal hold display 1403, a first special symbol display 1404, and a first special hold number display of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port. A drive signal is output to the display 1405, the second special symbol display 1406, the second special reserved number display 1407, the round display 1408, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port sensor 3102, the second starting port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the first receiving port sensor 2404, and the second receiving port sensor 2405 have non- While a contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3101. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate unit 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 3102, the second starting port sensor 2402, Also, detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2401 frequently occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 3102, the second starting port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401. In addition, when an advantageous game state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and game balls enter frequently, so that the special winning opening sensor 2403 and the first receiving port are used. The detection of a game ball by the entrance sensor 2404 and the second reception sensor 2405 frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and long life are also used for the special winning opening sensor 2403, the first reception sensor 2404, and the second reception sensor 2405. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball does not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3101 does not frequently occur. Therefore, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3101.

  Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands relating to control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511, which will be described in detail later.

  The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from a power supply board in a power supply board box 930, as will be described in detail later. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. ). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit monitors the reduction of various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. The power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port and also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
A payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls and the like is not shown in detail, but performs a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, a firing control by a firing solenoid 682, and a ball by a ball sending solenoid 255. A launch control unit 953 for performing feed control, an error LED display for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail 803, a ball guiding unit 820, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game balls in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 to start a ball removal operation.

[6-2a. Dispensing control section]
Although not shown in detail, a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 951 is a microcontroller having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. The payout control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM as well as a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) related to a game (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via a payout control I / O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the CPU through the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input, the ball exhaustion detection sensor 827 Detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

  Detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit, and are input to the payout control MPU through the payout control I / O port. You.

  Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 of the foul cover unit 270 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port and indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls actually paid out is output to an external terminal board via a payout control I / O port. This external terminal board is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 and the like.

  The error LED display is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The following are the contents displayed and notified by the error LED display. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 1310 and Is notified that the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the payout device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it is "ball watching" (specifically, the blade). Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout blade 839 and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passage 831d and the payout passage 832d of the payout device 830, and the payout blade 839 is difficult to rotate). "3" is displayed When it is present, it is informed that it is a "counter switch error" (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842), and the numeral "5" is displayed. Indicates that the retry error has occurred (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number “6” is displayed, indicates that the retry error has occurred. (Specifically, the game balls stored in the foul cover unit 270 are full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279), and the number “7” is displayed. When the connection is made, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (electric connection has been disconnected at any point from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. (Specifically, yet that the ball number of game balls no payout has reached a predetermined number spheres) message indicating "stock" when there are informed.

  A ball lending request signal for a game ball from the ball lending button 328 and a prepaid card return request signal from the return button 329 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU. Is done. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls lent out of the game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending display unit 330. Is input to the ball lending display unit 330 and displayed.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
Although not shown in detail, a firing control unit 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 is a firing control input to which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are input. Circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a based on the clock signal, and a firing reference pulse And a ball feeding solenoid driving circuit that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 255 based on the firing reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls per minute are launched toward the gaming area 5a, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit, A ball-feeding reference pulse is generated by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and output to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 300, a handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 302, and a single-shot button that detects whether the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. After the detection signal from the operation sensor 312 is input to the firing control input circuit, it is input to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal, and is input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handlebar rotation detection sensor 307, which electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 302, is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  Based on a signal from the handlebar rotation detection sensor 307, the launching solenoid drive circuit receives a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a with a launching strength appropriate for the rotational position of the handlebar 302. As a result, the output is output to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 to drop. When one ball is received in the sending unit 250 and the input of the ball sending reference pulse ends, the output of the constant current is stopped to send the received game ball to the ball launching device 680 side. As described above, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 682 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 255 is controlled to be constant. ing.

  The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 212, the peripheral control board 1510 performs an effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a door frame side effect based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 is provided.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. And a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. The game board-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is transmitted from a lamp drive board serial I / O port to a first effect drive board 3032 and a second effect drive. The game board side drive data for transmitting to the board 3033 or outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the game board decoration drive board serial I / O port to the A drive signal is transmitted to the first effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive board 3033, and a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a vibration motor 424 provided on the door frame 3 is output. Door-side drive data to perform lighting, and a door-side emission data to output a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. A screen for transmitting door-side drive light emission data from the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side and displaying the data on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640. In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating from the display control unit serial I / O port to the effect display control unit 1512, the control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM For example, output to a sound source IC.

  The detection signals from the various detection sensors for detecting the positions of the various movable effect units provided on the game board 5 are transmitted to the first effect drive substrate 3032 and the second effect drive substrate 3033 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The data is input to the peripheral control MPU via the CPU. Further, a detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 440 of the effect operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 3 is input to the peripheral control MPU.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 We are monitoring the operation.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and performs various effects from the upper speaker 573 and the speaker 921 provided on the door frame 3, the body frame 4, and the like. Control is performed so that the combined music and sound effects are played. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume that protrudes backward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is stored. In this embodiment, an acoustic signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or , 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the peripheral control MPU. A diagnosis is made as to whether or not the own system is running away by using the WDT together.

  A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed through a serial input / output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) bits per second (hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, a door frame side lighting flashing command, a game board side lighting flashing command output from the peripheral control MPU to the first effect driving board 3032 and the second effect driving board 3033 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the movable body drive command and the display command. In the present embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

  The first effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive board 3033 output a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 or the like. For example, a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received game board side lighting / blinking command is output to the LED of each decorative board provided in the game board 5.

  In addition, the first effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive board 3033 transmit a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration motor 424 provided on the door frame 3 or the drive motor provided on the game board 5. Etc.

[6-4. Effect display control unit]
Next, the effect display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, Display control MPU, a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data, and a VDP for displaying and controlling the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640. Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of screens displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640, and an image ROM stored in the image ROM. RAM where various types of data are transferred and copied , And a.

  The display control MPU includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and performs a door frame side effect display device. 460, a main effect display device 1600, and a sub effect display device 3640. If the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. The display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs an interrupt process when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM stores various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640, as well as control data (display) from the peripheral control unit 1511. Command), a plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) and the like. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining a screen configuration in a time series, and the order of screens to be drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640. Is stipulated. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured such that when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM, the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order is arranged in chronological order. This non-resident area transfer data is obtained by converting screen data to be drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 in accordance with the progress of the schedule data in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM. Stipulates the order of transferring various data.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the display control ROM from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and outputs the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, And the drawing data to be displayed on the sub-effect display device 3640 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub-effect display device 3640. In addition, when the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 do not receive screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. Output to The VDP adopts a line buffer method. This “line buffer method” means that one line of drawing data for drawing the left and right directions of the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 is held in a line buffer. In this method, the drawing data for one line held in the buffer is output to the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640.

  An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored. This affects the speed of drawing on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. Note that sprite data is base data which is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in a compressed state in the image ROM.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640. For example, when various characters (characters) are displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640, the data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Call. Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of persons on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting a background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. For these sprites, a position arranged on the screen and a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as “sprite overlapping order”) are set, and the door frame side effect display device 460 and the main effect The image is drawn on the display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640.

  In addition, the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular regions each having 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of six sprite characters arranged in 2 × 3 are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be represented using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 set the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by a main scan and a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in a direction that intersects the one direction. The door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 receive the one-line drawing data output from the effect display control unit 1512, and perform the door frame side effect as main scanning. When viewed from the front of the display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640, they are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 shift to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, the drawing data for the next line. Is input, as main scanning, from left to right as viewed from the front of the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 based on the drawing data for the next line. The signals are sequentially output to pixels of one line.

[7. Game content]
Next, the game contents of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 135 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is rotated by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Then, the ball is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the hitting strength. In addition, the driving strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and can be driven harder as the clockwise rotation is performed, and a maximum of 100 game balls per minute continuously, that is, , A game ball can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and the game ball is inserted into the obstacle nail. By the contact, the flowing speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nails, a windmill (not shown) which is rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 in a front view from the highest portion, while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown), It flows down in the area on the left side of the center role 2500. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522.

  The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from either the top in the center in the left-right direction or the valleys on both the left and right sides of the top. Is done. When the game ball is released from the top of the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, the top is located right above the first start port 2002, so that the ball is accepted by the first start port 2002 with high probability. When game balls are received in the first start port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When the game balls rolling on the stage 2530 are released into the game area 5a from the valleys on the left and right sides of the top, they flow down toward the starting port unit 2100. The game balls released from the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a are the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the general winning port 2001 of the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and the game ball of the attacker unit 2400. There is a possibility that it will be accepted at the general winning opening 2001 or the like.

  By the way, when a game ball that has flowed to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center in the left-right direction by the left shelf 2202 of the side unit 2200, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 Alternatively, there is a possibility that the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, or the like may be accepted. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball hit into the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right-handed), It is discharged to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400 from the right guide passage 2540 of the center role 2500. Below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540, a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are provided, and pass through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

  Then, when the right-hitting game ball passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result is “normal hit”, the closed second starting port 2004 is closed. Is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), so that game balls can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. When game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. You.

  In the present embodiment, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result in the normal lottery performed by passing the game ball through the gate unit 2003 (for example, 0. 0). 01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time elapses. The shorter the normal fluctuation time, the more the game balls for which the “normal hit” has been drawn in the gate unit 2003 can be accepted in the second starting port 2004.

  Note that if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the number of ordinary lottery results to be held is limited to four, and for more than that, even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous game state (for example, “big hit”, “big hit”) that is advantageous to the player. "Medium hit", "Small hit", "Probability change (probable change)", "Time saving (Time saving)", "Per game" (game balls can be accepted into the V winning opening (first entrance 2007)) ), Etc.), a special lottery result is generated. Then, the lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). Note that special lottery results obtained by accepting game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include “losing”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, and “5R big hit”. 15R jackpot "," probability change (probability change) "," time saving (time reduction) "," probability change time reduction "," probability change time reduction no hit "," second big hit (for example, per character) ", etc. is there.

  When the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. After the elapse of the special fluctuating time, the special winning opening 2005 is ready to accept game balls in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the special winning opening 2005 when the special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of games are provided from the payout device 830 by the main control board and the payout control board 951. The ball is paid out to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the special winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting game balls, by allowing the special winning opening 2005 to accept game balls, many game balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, after the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which game balls can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern for closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which game balls can be received, or the special winning When any one of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern for closing the game balls in a non-acceptable closed state (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) is set to a predetermined value. Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for “2R jackpot”, 5 rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot” are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In addition, in the "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as a "big hit" is drawn ("probable change") or the display time of the effect image indicating the special lottery result is changed. ("Time savings").

  If the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is “per hit”, the special winning opening 2005 allows the game balls to be received in a predetermined pattern, and then the first reception port 2007 for a predetermined time. A game ball can be received at the (V winning opening), and when a game ball is received at the first reception port 2007, an ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST is to maintain the state of the probability change and the time saving during the predetermined specific number of changes.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the special lottery result by the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004. When a game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. You. The number of reserved special lottery results to be retained is limited to a maximum of four for the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. Even if a game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the main effect display device 1600 (or the sub effect display device 3640). The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that the plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined period of time, and thereafter, the special lottery result is indicated by a combination of the LEDs that are turned on.

  On the other hand, the main effect display device 1600 (sub effect display device 3640) is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the main effect display device 1600 is such that a pattern row composed of a plurality of patterns is displayed in a state in which three pattern rows are arranged in the left and right direction, and each pattern row is changed, and the pattern that is variably displayed is displayed. The rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective picture rows are stopped and displayed such that the pictures of the three picture rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a final lottery image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the main effect display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the special lottery result is generated.

  In addition, a time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (variable time)) and a time indicating the special lottery result in the main effect display device 1600 (the image sequence changes and the final image is changed) (The time until is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 (the first The operation buttons 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the third effect operation unit 400B, etc.), the door frame side effect display device 460 (the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side, the decorative rotator unit 530, etc.), the back unit 3000 Front and back movable unit 3350, rear and center movable stage unit 3350, rear and left movable stage unit 3400, rear and right movable stage unit 3500, and rear and upper movable stage Lighting effect, movable effect by appropriately using the unit 3600 and the back and rear movable effect unit 3700, etc. , It is possible to perform the display effect, and the like, also can entertain a player with various effects of interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

[8. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The main effect display device 1600 according to the present embodiment includes, as an effect display means of the present invention, a rear left movable effect unit 3400 and a rear left movable decoration in the rear right movable effect unit 3500 of the rear movable effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment. The back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 of the body unit 3401 and the back right movable decorative body unit 3501 are the decorative body of the present invention, the back left left base 3420 and the back right base in the present embodiment. Reference numeral 3520 denotes the shutter of the present invention, and the back left back decorative board 3421 and the back right decorative board 3521 of the present embodiment serve as the decorative board of the present invention, and the first bearing cover 3426, the second bearing cover 3427, and the The four bearing cover 3429, the first bearing cover 3526, the second bearing cover 3527, and the fourth bearing cover 3529 The decorative covering of the invention, the back left rear drive motor 3431 and the back right rear drive motor 3531 in this embodiment is the rotation driving means of the present invention, and corresponds respectively.

  Further, the drive gear 3432 and the drive gear 3532, the relay gear 3433 and the relay gear 3533, the rear left rear drive rack 3434 and the rear right drive rack 3534, the driven gear portion 3435a of the transmission gear member lower 3435, and the transmission gear member in the present embodiment. The driven gear portion 3535a of the lower 3535, the driven gear portion 3436a of the upper transmission gear member 3436, and the driven gear portion 3536a of the upper transmission gear member 3536 are connected to the transmission mechanism of the present invention. Gear 3433 and relay gear 3533, rear left drive rack 3434 and rear right drive rack 3534, lower transmission gear member 3435 and lower transmission gear member 3535, upper transmission gear member 3436 and upper transmission gear member 3536, rotation gear 3437 and rotation The gear 3537 is a rotary drive of the present invention. In addition, the lower working rack gear 3434b, the upper working rack gear 3434c, the lower working rack gear 3534b, and the upper working rack gear 3534c in the present embodiment correspond to the working rack gear of the present invention, and the rotary coupling mechanism 3450 in the present embodiment corresponds to the universal joint of the present invention. , Respectively.

  Furthermore, the rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the rear right slide drive motor 3566 of the rear left slide unit 3460 and the rear right slide unit 3560 in this embodiment correspond to the opening / closing drive means of the present invention.

[9. Characteristic operation and effect of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pair of rear left bases 3420 and the right rear base 3420 are set in the separated position by setting the rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 to the separated positions. The display screen of the main effect display device 1600 disposed on the rear side through 3520 can be visually recognized in a favorable state from the front (the player side), and the effect image by the main effect display device 1600 allows the player to be displayed. You can entertain. In this state, since the pair of back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 are located on both outer sides of the main effect display device 1600, each of the pair of back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 is provided. With the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 attached to the front surface, both outer sides of the main effect display device 1600 can be decorated, and the appearance in the game area 5a is improved. The pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the player's interest. Then, in accordance with the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area 5a, the rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the rear right slide drive motor 3566 cause a pair of rear left base 3420 and rear right base 3520 to be driven. Is moved from the separation position to the approach position, the rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 are positioned in front of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 to block the effect image, respectively. Since the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 move to the center side of the front view game area 5a and change positions, the player is interested in a pair of back left left base 3420 and back right. A plurality of back-left rotating ornaments 3410 and a back-right rotating ornament attached to the base 3520 and the respective back-left left base 3420 and back-right base 3520. Can be strongly attracted to the 510, and then wonder whether not there's something good to the player can be to heighten the anticipation for the game. When the rear left drive motor 3431 and the rear right drive motor 3531 are driven with the pair of rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 moved to the approach position, the respective rear left bases 3420 are moved. And among the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 arranged in an arc on the front surface of the back right base 3520, the first back left left disposed alternately is provided. Rotating gear 3437 attached to shaft portion 3412 and shaft portion 3512 of rotating decorative body 3410A, first back right rotating decorative body 3510A, third back left rotating decorative body 3410C, and third back right rotating decorative body 3510C. And a transmission gear portion 3435c and a transmission gear portion 3535c meshing with the rotating gear 3537, and a transmission gear portion 3436c and a transmission gear portion 3536c. The lower reaching gear member 3435, the lower transmitting gear member 3535, and the upper transmitting gear member 3436 and the upper transmitting gear member 3536 are rotated via the rear left driving rack 3434, the rear right driving rack 3534, and the like. Through the shaft 3412 and the shaft 3512 to which the rotating gear 3537 is attached, the decoration body 3411 and the decoration body 3511 (the first back rear left rotation decoration 3410A and the decoration body 3411) from which the shaft 3412 and the shaft 3512 protrude. The first back right rotating decorative body 3510A, the third back left rotating decorative body 3410C, and the third back right rotating decorative body 3510C) will rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512. At the same time, the shaft 3412 and the shaft 3512 to which the rotating gear 3437 and the rotating gear 3537 are attached are adjacent to each other. Since the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 are connected by the rotation connection mechanism 3450 so that rotation can be transmitted, the rotation of the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 can be performed even if the directions in which the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 extend are different. And the second back rear left rotating decorative body 3410B and the second back right rotating decorative body 3510B, and the fourth back rear left rotating decorative body 3410D and the fourth The back right rotating decorative body 3510D also rotates.

  In this manner, the rear left driving motor 3431 and the rear right driving motor 3531 drive the rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the rear right rotating decorative body 3510 arranged in a row. The rotation is transmitted to every other via the drive rack 3434, the rear right drive rack 3534, the lower transmission gear member 3435, the lower transmission gear member 3535, the upper transmission gear member 3436, the upper transmission gear member 3536, and the like. The second back left rotating decorative body 3410B, the second back right rotating decorative body 3510B, the fourth back left rotating decorative body 3410D, and the fourth back right right through the shaft part 3412 and the shaft part 3512, Since the rotary decorative body 3510D is rotated, it is arranged in an arc by one back left drive motor 3431 and back right drive motor 3531, so that the rotating shaft is rotated. A plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 extending in different directions can be simultaneously rotated by a back left driving motor 3431 and a back right driving motor 3531, and respective axes thereof. Since the axes of the portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 extend along the surface of the rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520, a plurality of rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are provided. When stopped at an appropriate rotation angle, the three-dimensionally formed decorative body 3411 and the part facing the front of the decorative body 3511 are changed, and the back-left rotated decorative body seen from the player side is changed. 3410 and the appearance of the rear right rotation decorative body 3510 can be changed. Therefore, after moving the pair of back left base 3420 and back right base 3520 to the approach position, the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are rotated to be visible from the player side. By changing the appearance of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510, even after the pair of back left base 3420 and the back right base 3520 are moved to the approaching position and closed, the pair of back rotating left base 3420 and the back right rotating base 3520 are closed. On the back left base 3420 and the back right base 3520, it is possible to continuously show the movable effect by the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510. In addition to the above, the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 rotate, thereby increasing the player's expectation of the game. Increase makes it possible, a reduction in the interest entertained player can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pair of back left base 3420 and back right base 3520 are in the separated position, respectively, the back left drive motor 3431 and the back right drive motor 3531 cause the plurality of back left rotation decorative bodies 3410 and back. By rotating the back right rotating decorative body 3510, the decorations on both outer sides of the main effect display device 1600 by the plurality of back right rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 can be changed (changed). Appearance in the game area 5a can be greatly changed, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to make it hard to get tired. In addition, the appearance in the game area 5a can be changed to enhance appeal to the player. This makes it easy for a player who is selecting a pachinko machine to play to select the present pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the pair of back rear left base 3420 and back rear right base 3520 are configured to be moved by back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and back rear right slide drive motor 3566, respectively. Since it can be moved between the separated position, only one of the pair of rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 can be moved between the approach position and the separated position, or the pair of rear left bases can be moved. 3420 and the rear right base 3520 are simultaneously moved in opposite directions between the approach position and the separation position, or the pair of rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 are simultaneously moved between the approach position and the separation position. They can be moved in the same direction. In addition, each of the pair of back left left base 3420 and back right base 3520 has a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510, a back left driving motor 3431, and a back right driving motor. 3531, the rear left drive motor 3431 and the rear right are located at any position between the pair of rear left base 3420 and rear right base 3520 between the approach position and the separation position. The drive motor 3531 can rotate the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510.

  Accordingly, the pair of the rear left rear base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 are moved by the rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the rear right slide drive motor 3566, and the rear left drive motor 3431 and the rear right drive motor 3531 are respectively driven. And the rotation of a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 attached to the back left base 3420 and the back right base 3520, respectively, to achieve various movable effects. It is possible to show to the player, to make the player hard to get tired of, and to make it possible to more enjoy the movable effect using the back left base 3420 and the back right base 3520. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are arranged such that the axes of the shaft portions 3412 and 3512 are parallel to the front surfaces of the rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520. The plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are lined up along the front surfaces of the back left left base 3420 and the back right base 3520. In this state, it is possible to reduce the depth in the front-rear direction required for the arrangement of the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back right rotating decorative bodies 3510, and the back left left base 3420 and the back right A plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 can be reliably disposed on the front side of the base 3520, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operational effects can be provided. . Further, since the depth of the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 can be reduced, the back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are relatively large. And other members (for example, the main effect display device 1600, the game panel 1100) before and after the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410, the back right rotating decorative bodies 3510, the back left base 3420, and the back right base 3520. , Center accessory 2500, swivel table 3380, etc.), and place a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 in a narrow place (for example, game panel 1100 and main effect display device 1600). ), And the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's interest strongly.

  Further, after the main effect display device 1600 has a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, a pair of back left base 3420 and back right base 3520 is moved in a moving direction connecting an approaching position and a separating position. Since the length in the right angle direction is formed to be longer than the short side of the outer shape of the main effect display device 1600, the rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 display the display screen of the main effect display device 1600. When the rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 are moved to the front side of the main effect display device 1600, the rear base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 move to the front (back). The part to be covered is widened, and when the back left base 3420 and the back right base 3520 are moved to the front side of the main effect display device 1600, the player Obtain impact can be enhanced, it can be allowed more entertaining players to suppress the lowering of interest. Further, for example, when both longitudinal ends of the back left base 3420 and the back right base 3520 are movably supported between an approaching position and a separating position, a guide member (eg, The slide shaft 3462 and the slide shaft 3562, the slide guide 3463 and the slide guide 3563, etc.) are disposed outside the main effect display device 1600 in a front view, so that the effect image can be hardly obstructed by the guide member. The effect image can be enjoyed by the player in a favorable state.

  In addition, the first bearing cover 3426, the second bearing cover 3427, the fourth bearing cover 3429, the first bearing cover 3526, and the first bearing cover 3426 that cover the front side of the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 and the rear left drive motor 3431 and the rear right drive motor 3531 Since the two-bearing cover 3527 and the fourth bearing cover 3529 are attached to the front surfaces of the rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520, the first bearing cover 3426, the second bearing cover 3427, and the fourth bearing cover 3429. The first bearing cover 3526, the second bearing cover 3527, and the fourth bearing cover 3529 can hide the rotation connection mechanism 3450, the back left drive motor 3431, and the back right drive motor 3531 from the player side. , The rear connection left drive motor 3431 and the rear right drive motor 3531 are viewed. Appearance of the game area 5a Te can be reduced from becoming worse. In addition, the first bearing cover 3426, the second bearing cover 3427, the fourth bearing cover 3429, the first bearing cover 3526, and the second bearing cover that hide the rotation coupling mechanism 3450, the back left drive motor 3431, and the back right drive motor 3531 are hidden. 3527 and the fourth bearing cover 3529, the first bearing cover 3426, the second bearing cover 3427, the fourth bearing cover 3429, the first bearing cover 3526, the second bearing cover 3527, and the fourth bearing cover 3529 play the game. The front of the rear base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 in the area 5a and the back rear base 3520 can be decorated, and the appearance can be improved and the player can be entertained.

  Further, when the pair of rear left rear base 3420 and rear right base 3520 are moved to the approach position, a plurality of rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 attached to the respective front surfaces become: Since they are arranged in an annular shape, the player's interest can be strongly directed to the center of the game area 5a. On the other hand, when the pair of back left left base 3420 and back right base 3520 are moved to the separated position, the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are arranged along the outer periphery of the game area 5a. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be improved in appearance by decorating the periphery of the gaming area 5a. In addition, by moving the pair of back left left base 3420 and back right base 3520 to the approach position or the separation position, a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 arranged in an arc shape and The diameter of an imaginary ring formed by the back right rotating decoration 3510 can be reduced or increased. Accordingly, when the pair of rear left back base 3420 and rear right base 3520 are moved from the separation position to the approach position, a virtual ring of the rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the rear right rotating decorative body 3510 is formed. Since the size is reduced, the interest of the player can be directed to the center of the game area 5a. On the other hand, when the pair of back left left base 3420 and back right base 3520 are moved from the approach position to the separated position, a virtual ring formed by the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 is formed. Since it becomes larger, the player's interest can be directed to the outer peripheral side of the game area 5a.

  In addition, since the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are arranged in an arc around the center of the swivel table 3380, for example, the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies are arranged. By rotating each of the body 3410 and the rear-right rotating decorative body 3510 so that the end facing the center of the game area 5a moves forward, a movable effect of flowing forward from the center of the game area 5a is obtained. It can be shown to the player, and can give the illusion of the player as if a head wind is blowing. Alternatively, when each of the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 is rotated such that the ends facing the center of the game area 5a move rearward, the center of the game area 5a is rotated. It is possible to show the player a movable effect flowing backward from the player, and to give the illusion of the player as if he were sucked into the game area 5a. Therefore, by rotating the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 arranged in an arc shape, it is possible to direct the player's interest to the center of the game area 5a. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when the plurality of LEDs provided on the back left decoration board 3421 and the back right decoration board 3521 are appropriately lit, the back left rotation decoration 3410 and the back right rotation decoration 3510 are illuminated. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 and to make the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 stand out. Can be strongly attracted, and the player can be made to think that there is something, and the expectation for the game can be raised. In addition, the back left left decorative board 3421 and the back right right are rotated in a state in which the back left left rotating decoration 3410 and the back right rotation decoration 3510 are rotated by the back left driving motor 3431 and the back right driving motor 3531. When the LED of the decoration substrate 3521 emits light, the orientation of the decoration body 3411 and the decoration body 3511 that are three-dimensionally formed by rotation is changed, so that the front and back left rotating decoration 3410 and the back and right are turned from the LED. The direction of refraction and reflection of the light applied to the rotating decorative body 3510, the amount of transmission, and the like are gradually changed, and the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 are twinkled. It is possible to show and entertain the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. Further, in a state where the pair of rear left base 3420 and rear right base 3520 are moved to the approach position by the rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the rear right slide drive motor 3566, the rear left rear decorative board 3421 and the rear rear are moved. When the LED of the right decoration substrate 3521 is made to emit light, the player can see the light emission decoration having a brightness clearly different from the effect image of the main effect display device 1600, so that the player's interest is directed to the center of the game area 5a. Can be done. In addition, the back rear left decorative board 3421 is moved in a state where the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 are moved to the approach position and the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are rotated. And when the LED of the back right decoration board 3521 is made to emit light, the plurality of back left rotation decorations 3410 and the back right rotation decoration 3510 on the front surface of the main effect display device 1600 play a movable light emission effect such that they blink. Since the game can be shown to the player, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the rotating connection mechanism 3450 is formed by a pair of arm portions 3451 protruding from the connected shaft portions 3412 and 3512, and a cross-shaped spider 3452 inserted between the respective arm portions 3541. Since the rotation is transmitted through the spider 3452, the rotation due to the expansion and contraction (spring constant) of the rubber and the spring is compared with the case where the rotation is transmitted using the rubber and the spring. The transmission time lag can be eliminated, and a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 can be simultaneously rotated. Accordingly, when the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are rotated by the back rear left driving motor 3431 and the back right driving motor 3531, the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back Since the rear right rotating decorative body 3510 rotates at the same time, a plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 rotate in sequence with a delay, giving an unnatural feeling to the player. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of incongruity, and to enjoy the movement of the plurality of back-left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back-right rotating decorative bodies 3510 having a sense of unity to the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. be able to.

  In the rotation connection mechanism 3450, the transmission portion 3452 a of the spider 3452 is sandwiched between the side surface of the arm portion 3451 of the one shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 and the side surface of the arm portion 3451 of the other shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512. Alone, it is possible to assemble the rotary coupling mechanism 3450 that couples the two shaft portions 3412 and 3512 to each other so that rotation can be transmitted, so that a universal joint or a constant velocity shaft coupling is used as the rotary coupling mechanism (universal shaft joint). The number of parts can be reduced, the labor required for assembling can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed, as compared with the case of adopting.

  Further, among the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 arranged in a row, the first back rear left rotating decorative body 3410A and the first back rear right rotating which are located every other one are arranged. The rotating gear 3437, the rotating gear 3537, the lower transmission gear member 3435, and the transmission are provided for the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 of the decorative body 3510A, the third back left rotating decorative body 3410C, and the third back right rotating decorative body 3510C. Since the drive from the rear left drive motor 3431 and the rear right drive motor 3531 is transmitted through the lower gear member 3535, the upper transmission gear member 3436, the upper transmission gear member 3536, and the like, the rotation is connected. Accumulation (influence) of rattling in the rotation direction in the mechanism 3450 can be reduced as much as possible. Therefore, the second back left rotating decorative body 3410B and the second back right rotating decorative body 3510B, and the fourth back rear left rotating decorative body 3410D and the fourth back right rotating decorative body that are rotated via the rotation connection mechanism 3450. Since the time lag of the rotation of the 3510D can be reduced as much as possible, the back left driving motor 3431 and the back right driving motor 3531 rotate the plurality of back left rotating decorations 3410 and the back right rotating decoration 3510. When this is done, it is possible to rotate the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 substantially simultaneously, and the movement of the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 (Rotation) is imparted with a sense of unity, and a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 can sufficiently exhibit the effect of movable performance. Can be a pachinko machine 1 exhibits reliably effects described above.

  Furthermore, for a plurality of rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 arranged in a row, a second rear rear left rotating decorative body 3410B and a second rear right rotating decorative body 3510B, Since the three back rear left rotating decorative body 3410C and the third back right rotating decorative body 3510C are not connected by the rotation connection mechanism 3450, the rotating gear 3437 and the rotating gear 3537 are attached to the shaft part 3412 and the shaft part 3512. Sandwiched between the two first back-and-rear left rotation decorative bodies 3410A and 3510A, and the third back-and-rear left rotational decoration 3410C and the third back-and-right right decorative ornament 3510C. The rotation can be prevented from being transmitted from both sides to the second rear-left rear decorative ornament 3410B and the second rear right-rotated decorative body 3510B. Rotation of 10B and the second back right after rotating the decorative body 3510B can be prevented from being jerky. Accordingly, when a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are rotated by the back left driving motor 3431 and the back right driving motor 3531, respectively, the back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back Since the back right rotating decorative body 3510 can be rotated substantially simultaneously without a sense of incongruity, the effect of rotation of the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 can be sufficiently exhibited, and It is possible to entertain the people and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft of the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 extending in parallel to the plane of the back rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 (planes extending vertically and horizontally). A bevel gear-shaped rotating gear 3437 and a rotating gear 3537 are attached to the portion 3512, and from the rear side of the rotating gear 3437 and the rotating gear 3537, a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3435c and a transmission gear portion 3535c, and a transmission gear portion 3436c and a transmission gear portion. The lower transmission gear member 3435 and the lower transmission gear member 3535 and the lower transmission gear member 3535 and the upper transmission gear member 3436 and the upper transmission gear member 3536 are rotatable about an axis extending forward and backward. Lower 3535, upper transmission gear member 3436, and driven gear portion 3435 at the rear end of upper transmission gear member 3536 In addition, the driven gear portion 3436a, the driven gear portion 3535a, and the driven gear portion 3436a are attached to the lower left driving rack 3434 and the lower right driving rack 3534 as a transmission mechanism. By engaging the rear rear left drive motor 3431 and the rear right drive motor 3531 with the rear left drive motor 3431 and the rear rear right drive motor 3531 after engaging the upper gear 3534b and the upper working gear 3534c, the lower rear drive rack 3434 and the rear right drive rack 3534 are slid. The rear left drive motor 3431 and the rear right drive motor 3531 are connected via the rear left drive rack 3434 and the rear right drive rack 3534 to the 3435 and the lower transmission gear member 3535 and the upper and lower transmission gear members 3436 and 3536. From the drive Because it to rotate, it is possible to reduce as much as possible the longitudinal direction of the depth (thickness) in the back left rear drive rack 3434 and back right rear drive rack 3534 and the like. Therefore, even if a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are mounted on the front surfaces of the back left base 3420 and the back right base 3520, it is possible to make it difficult to abut other members. It is possible to easily realize the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects. Further, as described above, the depth in the front-rear direction of the rear left drive rack 3434 and the rear right drive rack 3534, the lower transmission gear member 3435, the lower transmission gear member 3535, the upper transmission gear member 3436, the upper transmission gear member 3536, and the like. Since the (thickness) can be made as thin as possible, the depth in the front-rear direction of the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 can be relatively increased. The back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back back right rotating decorative body 3510 can be made to stand out. Alternatively, a plurality of back-left rotation decorations 3410 and a back-right rotation decoration 3510 can be arranged at a position with a small depth, and a plurality of back-left rotation decorations 3410 and a back-right rotation decoration 3510 (back). The rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520) can be more freely arranged.

  In addition, the drive of the rear left drive motor 3431 and the rear right drive motor 3531 is performed by the rod-shaped rear left drive rack 3434 and the rear right drive rack 3534 on the transmission gear member lower 3435, the transmission gear member lower 3535, and the transmission gear member. 3436 and the transmission gear member 3536, the length of the rear left drive rack 3434 and the rear right drive rack 3534 are appropriately selected so that the rear left drive motor 3431 and the rear right The drive motor 3531 can be arranged at a position that is as inconspicuous as possible, away from the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back right rotating decorative bodies 3510, and the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 are relatively large. In addition, the back right rotating decorative body 3510 can be made to stand out.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, a plurality of three-dimensionally formed decorative body main bodies 3411 and decorative body main bodies 3511 (back left rotating decorative body 3410 and back right rotating decorative body 3510). ) Are rotated at the same time, and when the rotation of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 is stopped at an appropriate rotation angle, the outer peripheral surfaces of the decorative body main body 3411 and the decorative body main body 3511 are stopped. Since it is possible to change the part facing forward, the appearance of the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 seen from the player side can be changed. Can give a strong impact, and can entertain the player. The apparent back after left rotation decorative body 3410 and back right rear rotary decoration member 3510 can be variously changed, it is possible to suppress the reduction of interest and hardly get bored the player.

  By the way, the rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 to which the plurality of rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are attached extend forward and backward by the unit base 3361 of the fixed unit 3360. Since it is attached to the front surface of the swivel table 3380 rotatably mounted around the axis, when the swivel table 3380 is rotated by the back swing drive motor 3370 according to the game state, it is attached to the swivel table 3380. Through the back left base 3420 and the back right base 3520, a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are centered on the turntable 3380, that is, near the center of the game area 5a. As a result, the entirety turns around the axis extending in the front-rear direction, The position where the rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 are lined up can be variously changed, such as left side, right side, upper side, lower side, or diagonally upper side, diagonally lower side, and the like. The pachinko machine 1 can change the decoration (appearance) in the game area 5a and can strongly attract the player's interest.

  In addition, by rotating the revolving table 3380 in a reciprocating manner, the whole of the plurality of back-left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back-right rotating decorative bodies 3510 can be rocked (vibrated), so that the player's interest becomes a plurality of. The back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 can be strongly attracted. Accordingly, a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 attached to the back left base 3420 and the back right base 3520 by the back left driving motor 3431 and the back right driving motor 3531 are formed. By appropriately combining the rotation and the turning of the rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 via the turning table 3380 by the rear turning drive motor 3370, various effects can be shown to the player. It is possible not only to make the player hard to get tired of, but also to enhance the effect of the plurality of rotating back-left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back-right rotating decorative bodies 3510, thereby deterring a player and suppressing a decrease in interest. Can be done.

  In addition, since a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 can be rotated by one back left driving motor 3431 and back right driving motor 3531, unlike a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a drive motor for each decorative body, and the space required for the drive motor can be made as small as possible. The plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are required. The space can be made relatively large. Therefore, for example, it is possible to relatively widen the space between the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510, and therefore, the back back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back back right rotating decorative body 3510 are provided. To increase the rotation range of the back rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 so as to be more conspicuous, or the back left rotation decoration body 3410 and Since the number of back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 can be increased to increase the impact when rotated, the number of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the number of back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 due to movement, decoration, and the like can be increased. The effect of the effect can be further enhanced, and the player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, since only one rear left drive motor 3431 and one rear right drive motor 3531 are required, a plurality of rear left rotation decorative bodies 3410 attached to the rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 can be used. Since the right rotation decorative body 3510, the back rear left drive motor 3431, and the back right drive motor 3531 can be easily assembled, it is possible to easily arrange them on the front surface of the swivel table 3380. Through the left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520, a plurality of rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510, a rear left driving motor 3431, and a rear right driving motor 3531 can be attached. Thus, it is possible to reliably achieve the above-described operation and effect.

  Further, the main effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear side of the unit base 3361, and the opening 3361 b and the through-hole that penetrate the unit base 3361 and the swivel table 3380 through the front and rear of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 larger than the display screen of the main effect display device 1600. The main effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front (the player side) through the opening 3361b of the unit base 3361 and the through hole 3382 of the swivel table 3380. The effect image displayed on the display device 1600 can be enjoyed by the player. In addition, when the turning table 3380 is rotated by the back turning drive motor 3370, a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 attached to the turning table 3380 via the back left base 3420 and the back right base 3520 and the back. The whole of the rear right rotation decoration 3510 turns around the main effect display 1600 around the main effect display 1600, and a plurality of back left rotation decorations 3410 and back right rotation decorations are provided. The entire 3510 can be entertained by the player by the movement of turning around the main effect display device 1600, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. In addition, since the main effect display device 1600 that displays the effect image is provided, for example, a plurality of back-left rotation decorations 3410 and back-right rotation decorations are provided according to the movement of the character displayed on the main effect display device 1600. The body 3510 rotates around an axis extending in parallel with the plane of the game area 5a, and the whole of the plurality of back-left rotating ornaments 3410 and the back-right rotating ornament 3510 rotate around the main effect display device 1600. It is possible to show the player such an effect as if to perform the effect image, and the effect of combining the effect image and the movement such as rotation or turning of the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510. A variety of effects can be shown to the player, and the player can be more entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, a plurality of guide bushes 3364 and guide rollers 3365 attached to the unit base 3361 allow the turntable 3380 to be attached rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. When the turning pinion gear 3373 is rotated via the driving gear 3371 and the turning transmission gear 3372, the turning table 3380 is rotated around the axis extending forward and backward by the turning gear 3384 meshing with the turning pinion gear 3373. Therefore, it is possible to reliably realize the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects. Further, since the turning table 3380 is rotatably mounted by the plurality of guide bushes 3364 and the guide rollers 3365 which are in contact with the outer periphery of the turning table 3380, there is no need to provide a rotation shaft at the center of rotation of the turning table 3380. The main effect display device 1600 can be reliably disposed behind the turning table 3380, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be provided.

  Further, since a plurality of guide pins 3363, a slide frame 3630, a back rear upper drive motor 3652, and the like are provided as rotation restricting means for restricting the rotation of the rotation table 3380, the rotation of the rotation table 3380 by the rotation driving means is controlled. In the stopped state, when a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and a back right rotating decorative body 3510 are rotated by the back left driving motor 3431 and the back right driving motor 3531, a plurality of back left rotating are performed. Even if the swivel table 3380 is caused to rotate in the rotation direction by the vibration caused by the rotation of the decorative body 3410 and the rear right rotating decorative body 3510, the rotation of the swivel table 3380 can be restricted by the rotation restricting means. Swings back and forth to rotate a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating The entire decoration body 3510 can be prevented from performing an unstable movement, and the plurality of back left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and the whole back right rotation decoration body 3510 can be rotated in a stable state. At the same time, it is possible to rotate the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 without giving a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the rotation of the turning table 3380 can be regulated by the plurality of guide pins 3363, the slide frame 3630, the back rear upper drive motor 3652, etc., as the turning restricting means, the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back Since a turning moment for rotating the turning table 3380 by the load of the rear right rotating decorative body 3510, the rear left driving motor 3431, the rear right driving motor 3531 or the like can be received by the turning restricting means, the turning table 3380 can be received. When the rotation of is stopped, the rotational moment due to the load of the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back right rotating decorative bodies 3510, the back left driving motor 3431, the back right driving motor 3531, and the like is canceled. The force is applied to the turning table 3380 from the back turning drive motor 3370. It is not necessary, can be loaded on the back after the turning driving motor 3370 prevents such of the can be avoided interruption of the game due to an overload.

  Furthermore, in a state in which the turning table 3380 is rotated by the back turning drive motor 3370 to rotate the entire back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the entire back right rotating decorative body 3510, the back left decorative board 3421 and When the LED on the back right rear decorative board 3521 emits light, the trajectory of arc-shaped light centered on the center of the swivel table 3380 can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained. Further, when the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are rotated by the back left driving motor 3431 and the back right driving motor 3531 while rotating the swivel table 3380, the back left decorative board is rotated. Since the locus of the arc-shaped light due to the light emission of the LEDs of the 3421 and the back right decoration board 3521 blinks, the movable light emission effect like a comet can be shown to the player, so that something is good for the player. It is possible to make the user think that there is a chance, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, for transmitting the drive from the rear left drive motor 3431 and the rear right drive motor 3531 to rotate the shaft 3412 and the shaft 3512 of the rear left rotational decorative body 3410 and the rear right rotational decorative body 3510. The rotation including the rear left drive rack 3434 and the rear right drive rack 3534, the lower transmission gear member 3435, the lower transmission gear member 3535, the upper transmission gear member 3436, the upper transmission gear member 3536, the rotation gear 3437, the rotation gear 3537, and the like. Since the driving mechanism is provided, the rear left driving motor 3431 and the rear right driving motor 3531 are arranged at positions away from the plural rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the rear right rotating decorative body 3510 by the rotary driving mechanism. The rear left drive motor 3431 and the rear right drive motor 3531 can be made inconspicuous. And the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 can be made more conspicuous relatively to the player, and the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back right right can be provided to the player. The decoration and movement (rotation) of the rotating decorative body 3510 can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531 can be arranged at positions away from the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510. Therefore, the rear left rear drive motor 3431 and the rear right drive motor 3531 are arranged at positions spaced apart from the plurality of rear left rotary decorative bodies 3410 and the rear right rotary decorative body 3510 in the circumferential direction of the turning table 3380. Or by being disposed at a position close to the center of rotation of the swivel table 3380, a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510, a back left driving motor 3431, and a back right driving motor 3531 are provided. Can be brought closer to the center side of the swivel table 3380, and a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 351 can be obtained. And the rear left drive motor 3431 and the rear right drive motor 3531 can reduce the force of the rotational moment for rotating the swivel table 3380, and the force for canceling the rotational moment can be reduced. Therefore, the load on the back swing drive motor 3370 that generates the canceling force can be reduced, and the load on the back swing drive motor 3370 increases and the game is prevented from being interrupted due to an overload. be able to.

  In addition, as described above, the drive from the rear left drive motor 3431 and the rear right drive motor 3531 is transmitted via the rear left drive rack 3434 and the rear right drive rack 3534, and rotated. By making the depth (thickness) in the front-rear direction as thin as possible with the rear left driving rack 3434 and the rear right driving rack 3534, a plurality of rear left rotating decorations 3410 and rear right rotating decorations are provided. Since a space can be secured on the rear side of the 3510, it is possible to arrange the swivel table 3380 in that space. The structure attached to the swivel table 3380 via the left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 can be easily embodied, and the above-described effects can be obtained. It can be a dick machine 1. In addition, other decorative bodies and members can be arranged behind the plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 (back left left base 3420 and back rear right base 3520). , It is possible to entertain a variety of effects to the player.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 that are movable along the surface of the game area 5a in the game area 5a in front view are arranged. In addition, the rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the rear rear are provided near the outer periphery of the game area 5a (near the outer periphery of the turning table 3380) away from the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501. A right slide drive motor 3566 is provided. In this state, when the drive pulley 3468 and the drive pulley 3568 are rotated by the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 in accordance with the game state of the game performed in the game area 5a, the drive pulley 3468 The first belt 3470 and the first belt 3570 wound around the driving pulley 3568 rotate the relay pulley 3469 and the relay pulley 3569, and the second belt 3471 wound around the relay pulley 3469 and the relay pulley 3569 and the second belt 3471. The pulley portion 3465e and the pulley portion 3565e are rotated by the two belts 3571, and the slide disposed together with the pulley portion 3465e and the pulley portion 3565e in the vicinity of the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501. Arm 346 The sliding pin 3465c and the sliding pin 3565c revolve, and the sliding pin 3465c and the sliding pin 3565c revolve, and the back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back right movable decoration are rotated by the revolving of the sliding pin 3465c and the sliding pin 3565c. The body unit 3501 moves between the separated position and the approach position along the surface of the game area 5a as a predetermined effect operation. As described above, even if the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 are arranged at positions away from the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501, the back rear left movable The rotation from the slide drive motor 3466 and the rear right slide drive motor 3566 is transmitted by the belts including the first belt 3470 and the first belt 3570 and the second belt 3471 and the second belt 3571, so that the rear left movable decoration is provided. Since the body unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 can be moved, the rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the rear rear can be moved near the rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative unit 3501. There is no need to dispose the right slide drive motor 3566, and It is possible to easily secure a space around the preparative 3401 and back right rear movable decorative body unit 3501. Therefore, in the space secured around the back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back right movable decorative body unit 3501, other decorative bodies (the back rear upper movable rendering unit 3600 and the back rear lower movable rendering unit 3700) and the rendering are provided. By arranging the sub-effect display device 3640 or the like for displaying an image, it is possible to present various effects to the player, thereby making it difficult for the player to be bored. The body unit 3401 and the back right movable decorative body unit 3501 can be made to stand out by making them relatively large, and the interest of the player is more strongly applied to the back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back right movable decorative body unit 3501. It can be attracted, and the back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back right movable decorative body unit 3501 can enjoy the production operation. The reduction of interest can be suppressed Te.

  In addition, the first belt 3470, the first belt 3570, the second belt 3471, and the second belt 3571 are used for transmitting rotation from the rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the rear right slide drive motor 3566 to the slide arm 3465 and the slide arm 3565. Since the belt has flexibility, the driving pulley 3468 and the driving pulley 3568 and the pulley portion are compared with a case where transmission is performed via a plurality of gears as in the related art. By reducing the diameters of the 3465e and the pulley portion 3565e, the distance between the forward and backward sides of the belt can be reduced, and the back left slide drive motor 3466, the back right slide drive motor 3566, and the back left The width between the movable decorative body unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 (rotation transmitted It is possible to reduce the width) of the order of the route.

  Further, the second belt 3471 and the second belt 3571 wound around the pulley portion 3465e and the pulley portion 3565e, the first belt 3470 and the first belt 3570 wound around the drive pulley 3468 and the drive pulley 3568, Since it extends along the outer periphery of the game area 5a, the rotation from the rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the rear right slide drive motor 3566 arranged at a position near the outer circumference of the game area 5a that is hardly obstructed is performed. The power can be reliably transmitted to the slide arm 3465 and the slide arm 3565, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, a relay pulley 3469 and a relay pulley 3569 are provided near the outer periphery of the game area 5a between the drive pulley 3468 and the drive pulley 3568 and the pulley portion 3465e and the pulley portion 3565e. Since the second belt 3471 and the second belt 3571 and the first belt 3470 and the first belt 3570 wound around the driving pulley 3468 and the driving pulley 3568 extend along the outer periphery of the game area 5a, Even if these belts extend in a non-linear (rectangular) shape along the outer circumference of the game area 5a, the first belt 3470 and the first belt 3570, and the second belt 3471 and the second belt 3571 respectively form windings. So that it extends linearly between the pulleys As compared with the case where one belt is wound around the pulley portion 3465e and the pulley portion 3565e, and the driving pulley 3468 and the driving pulley 3568, no lateral force acts on each belt. The belt can be prevented from coming off easily. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 from moving due to the first belt 3470 and the first belt 3570 and the second belt 3471 and the second belt 3571 coming off. Therefore, the rear left rear decorative unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative unit 3501 are reliably moved, and the player moves the rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative unit 3501 to the player. Can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, the rotation from the back left slide drive motor 3466 and the back right slide drive motor 3566 is transmitted through the first belt 3470 and the first belt 3570 and the second belt 3471 and the second belt 3571. Since it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of components between the rear left rear drive motor 3466 and the rear right slide drive motor 3566 and the rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative unit 3501, Even when the rear left and right rearrangement effecting unit 3400 and the rear right and left rearrangement effecting unit 3500 of this configuration are provided, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and to easily achieve the rear left and right rearrangement effect unit 3400 of this configuration. In addition, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 including the rear right movable effect unit 3500.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the rear right are attached to the turning table 3380 of the central movable effect unit 3350 behind the movable unit 3300 behind the rear unit 3000. The rear left slide unit 3460 and the rear right slide unit 3560 of the movable effect unit 3500 separate the rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 of the rear left movable decorative unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative unit 3501. In the position state, the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 together with the back left base 3420 and the back right base 3520 are located outside the through-hole 3382 of the turning table 3380, respectively. The main effect display device 160 through the through hole 3382 Can be seen from the front side, and the effect image displayed on the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 can be shown to the player in a favorable state, and the effect image can be enjoyed. .

  On the other hand, when the rear left rear base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 are brought into the close position by the rear left slide unit 3460 and the rear right slide unit 3560, the rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 are put together with the rear left base 3420. Since the rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are located inside the through holes 3382 of the turning table 3380, respectively, the rear left rear base 3420, the rear right base 3520, and the rear left rotating are arranged. The right and left sides of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 are shielded from the front side by the decorative body 3410 and the rear right rotating decorative body 3510, and the effect image displayed on the display screen becomes hard to see, so that the player's Interestingly, the rear left rotating base 3410 is attached to the front of the rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520. In addition to being able to be attracted to the back right rotating decorative body 3510, the rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 block the effect image, so that something good for the player is achieved. It can be made to think that there is, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The turning table 3380 to which the rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 are attached via the rear left slide unit 3460 and the rear right slide unit 3560 rotates about (the center of) the main effect display device 1600. Therefore, by rotating the swivel table 3380, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 (the back rear left base 3420 and the rear rear) which move between the approach position and the separated position are moved. The moving direction of the right base 3520, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401, and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501) can be freely changed in a horizontal direction, a vertical direction, an oblique direction, or the like. The main rearrangement display device comprises a back rear left movable decoration unit 3401 and a back rear right movable decoration unit 3501 from different directions. It can be moved to a closer position where the 600 front side. In addition, the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 in the back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back right movable decorative body unit 3501 are a back left left base 3420 and a back rear that move together. Since it is attached to the rear right base 3520 so as to be movable (rotatable about an axis extending in parallel with the display screen of the main effect display device 1600), the rear left base 3420 and the front side of the rear right base 3520 are provided. Also in the above, the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 can be moved (rotated). Furthermore, since the back left left base 3420 and the back right base 3520 are each provided with a back left left decorative board 3421 and a back right right decorative board 3521 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, respectively, The LED on the back right decoration board 3521 allows the back left rotation decoration 3410 and the back right rotation decoration 3510 to emit light as appropriate. Therefore, the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 move between the approaching position and the separating position together with the back left left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520, or are turned by the swivel table 3380. It can rotate around the main effect display device 1600 together with the back left base 3420 and the back right base 3520, and can move (rotate) with respect to the back left base 3420 and the back right base 3520. In addition, since it is possible to perform luminous decoration with the back rear left decorative substrate 3421 and the back rear right decorative substrate 3521, a variety of effects can be shown to the player by appropriately combining the movement and the luminous decoration. In addition, it is possible to make the player hard to get tired and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, in a state where the rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are moved to the separated position together with the rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520, the main effect display device 1600 in a front view. The back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 can be seen on both outer sides so as to sandwich the main rendering display device by the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510, respectively. A part of the outer periphery of the 1600 can be decorated to enhance the appearance. When the swivel table 3380 is rotated in the separated position, the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 rotate around the main effect display device 1600. Back and left rotating decorative body 3410 and back and right rotating decorative body 3510 (back and left movable decorative body unit 3401 and back and right movable decorative body unit 3501) for opening and closing the front side of the main display display device 1600 By doing this, the player can be surprised, and the player can be entertained by the movement of the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 rotating around the main effect display device 1600. At the same time, the player's interest is seen between the back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back right movable decorative body unit 3501. That the main effect display can be strongly attracted to effect image device 1600, a drop in interest to delight effect image can be suppressed. Alternatively, in the state of the separated position, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are moved (rotated) with respect to the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 to which they are respectively attached. By moving the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 which decorate a part of the outer periphery of the main effect display device 1600, the player can be entertained.

  Further, when moving the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 between the approach position and the separation position via the back left base 3420 and the back right base 3520, The rear left slide unit 3460 and the rear right slide unit 3560 apply a force to the central portion in the longitudinal direction (the direction perpendicular to the moving direction) of the base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 to cause the rear left base 3420 and Since the rear right base 3520 is moved, the rear left base 3420 and the rear rear are set in a state where the direction of movement of the rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 is changed by the rotation of the turning table 3380. Even when the right base 3520 is moved, the force for moving the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 is applied to the back rear left base 3420. By acting near the center of gravity of the rear right base 3520, the rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 can be hardly tilted from a correct posture, and the rear rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 can be smoothly moved. Can be moved. Therefore, regardless of the orientation of the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 due to the rotation of the turntable 3380, the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base are smoothly moved without rattling. The back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 can be moved between the approach position and the away position together with the 3520, so that the back left rotating without giving the player a sense of incongruity. The decorative body 3410 and the back-right rotating decorative body 3510 can be moved, and the movement of the back-left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-right rotating decorative body 3510 can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, by emitting the LEDs of the back rear left decorative board 3421 and the back rear right decorative board 3521, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 attached to the front side of the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520, and the back. Since the back-right rotating decorative body 3510 can be illuminated, the back-left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-right rotating decorative body 3510 are illuminated by the back-left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-right rotating decorative body 3510. Since it can be made to stand out, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510, and the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear can be light-emitting decoration. The appearance of the right rotation decorative body 3510 can be improved.

  Further, in the state of the separated position, the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 are illuminated with the LEDs of the back left decorative board 3421 and the back right decorative board 3521 so that the player is behind the back. By making the left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 noticed, and then moving the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 from the separation position to the approach position, It is possible to make it difficult for a player to overlook the movement of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510. Alternatively, in a state where the rotation of the swivel table 3380 is stopped, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are illuminated with the LEDs of the back rear left decorative board 3421 and the back rear right decorative board 3521. The player is focused on the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510, and then the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 by rotating the swivel table 3380. Is rotated about the main effect display device 1600, so that the player can hardly miss the rotation of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510. Accordingly, the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 are illuminated to emit light, so that the movement and rotation of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 can be surely shown and enjoyed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, since the rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are attached to the rear left base 3420 and the rear right base 3520 longer than the short side of the rectangular main effect display device 1600, Since the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 can be hidden by the back left base 3420 and the back right base 3520 in addition to the back left decorative decoration 3410 and the back right decorative decoration 3510, the main effect display device The back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 have a function of concealing the 1600, and the function of decorating the concealed front side of the main effect display device 1600 has a back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and a back rear right rotating decorative body. 3510, it is provided with a three-dimensional back left rotating decorative body 3410 and a back right rotating decorative body 3510 with more depth. Door can be. Therefore, since the front side of the main effect display device 1600 is hidden by the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 formed in a three-dimensional shape with depth, it can be seen with a conventional pachinko machine. The effect that could not be performed can be shown to the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player. Further, since the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 have a three-dimensional shape with depth, the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 are separated at the separated position. In the stopped state, it is an illusion to the player that the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back back right rotating decorative body 3510 are general decoration members decorating the inside of the game area 5a in a front view. Can be done. When the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510 are moved to the approaching position or rotated by the swivel table 3380 in a state where the player is in an illusion, the player is unexpectedly surprised. , The player can be greatly surprised, entertaining the player, and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the turning table 3380 of the rear center movable effect unit 3350 of the rear movable effect unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 is rotated to arrange the center in the front view game area 5a. The sub-effect display device 3640 of the rear rear upper movable effect unit 3600 can be swirled around the center of the main effect display device 1600, and the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the center of the main effect display device 1600. The sub-effect display device 3640 can be arranged in various places with respect to the main effect display device 1600 because the main effect display device 1600 can be moved away from the main effect display device 1600. Can be presented.

  More specifically, in the turning direction of the sub effect display device 3640 (turn table 3380), a plurality of specific turning positions (here, the first turning position, the first turning position, and the second turning position) are provided by a plurality of guide pins 3363 projecting forward from the unit base 3361. (Two turning positions and a third turning position) are provided, and the sub effect display device 3640 can be moved to the retreat position farthest from the turning center only at any of the specific turning positions. In a state in which the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the retreat position, the sub-effect display device 3640 is farthest from the center of the main effect display device 1600. Therefore, the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is displayed by the sub-effect display device 3640. There is almost no obstruction, and the entire display screen of the main effect display device 1600 can be seen from the player side, so that the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 can be made to stand out, and the effect image is displayed on a large display screen. Can entertain the player. In this state, since the sub-effect display device 3640 is located adjacent to the main effect display device 1600, an effect image such that the main effect display device 1600 and the sub-effect display device 3640 constitute one screen. Is displayed, a large effect image combining the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 can be shown to the player, and the powerful effect image can surprise and entertain the player.

  When the sub effect display device 3640 is in the retracted position, the range of the turning angle of the sub effect display device 3640 (the turning table 3380) is regulated by the guide pin 3363 that comes into contact with the sub effect display device 3640 (the slide frame 3630). Since the sub-effect display device 3640 cannot be swirled, the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved in the direction of the center of rotation (projection position), so that the portion projecting outward from the turning table 3380 is moved inward. Then, after the restriction by the guide pin 3363 is released, the sub effect display device 3640 is turned by rotating the turn table 3380. Therefore, when the sub-effect display device 3640 at the retreat position turns, the sub-effect display device 3640 once moves in the direction of the turning center (projection position) and then turns. In addition, the player's interest can be attracted to the sub-effect display device 3640 so that the player can pay attention, and the turning of the sub-effect display device 3640 can be prevented from being overlooked. Then, in a state where the sub effect display device 3640 is moved from the retreat position and the regulation by the guide pin 3363 is released (a state in a position within the turnable range), the turning table 3380 is rotated to turn the sub effect display device 3640. An effect in which an effect image (for example, another character) displayed on the sub effect display device 3640 is turning around an effect image (for example, a certain character) displayed on the main effect display device 1600. Can be shown to the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player by the effect which was not seen in the conventional pachinko machine. In this state, when the sub-effect display device 3640 is turned, when the main effect display device 1600 and the sub-effect display device 3640 display an effect image that forms one screen, By turning the display device 3640, the outer shape of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 changes, so that the player can be wondered to pay attention to the effect image. Thus, the effect using the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 can be more enjoyed.

  When the sub-effect display device 3640 stops turning, the revolvable range in which the regulation by the guide pin 3363 released from the retreat position side (the retreat position at the specific turning position or the protruding position from the retreat position) is released. When the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the protruding position from the inner position, the sub-effect display device 3640 can be shown to the player as an effect in which the sub-effect display device 3640 moves linearly toward the center. Also, when the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved from the retreat position side to the protruding position while turning, the effect in which the sub-effect display device 3640 moves in an arc toward the center side can be shown to the player. Further, when the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved from the retreat position side to the protruding position while reciprocatingly turning within the range of the predetermined turning angle, the effect that the sub-effect display device 3640 moves in a zigzag manner toward the center side is obtained. Can be shown to players. In addition, when the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the protruding position, the sub-effect display device 3640 can be turned to an arbitrary position in the turning direction and then moved toward the protruding position. Therefore, the pattern (movement) of the movement of the sub-effect display device 3640 in the direction toward the turning center can be made diversified, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored. Then, when the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved from the retreat position side to the protruding position, the sub-effect display device 3640 moves to the front side of the main effect display device 1600 because the sub-effect display device 3640 approaches the turning center. The display device 3640 can block half of the effect image displayed on the main effect display device 1600, and attracts the player's interest to the effect image displayed on the sub effect display device 3640, and displays the effect image. You can entertain. In addition, since the sub-effect display device 3640 can be moved from the protruding position to the retreat position side by performing a reverse movement to that described above, a variety of effects can be shown to the player.

  In this manner, since various effects can be presented to the player by the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640, it is possible to make the player hard to get tired of and to entertain the player with interest. The decrease can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved from the retreat position to the protruding position, the sub-effect display device 3640 moves to the center side of the game area 5a in front view while blocking the effect image of the main effect display device 1600. It can give a strong impact to the game, attract the player's attention, and make the player think that something is good. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by increasing the height. Therefore, for example, at the time of a predetermined effect for indicating to a player a special lottery result drawn by accepting a game ball in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the sub-effect display device 3640 is displayed. By turning or moving to the protruding position, it is possible to make the player think that the special lottery result (for example, "big hit") in which the advantageous gaming state occurs has been selected, and the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state And a decrease in interest can be suppressed. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 on which the effect indicating the special lottery result is executed is provided with the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 that can be preferably used because the effect indicating the special lottery result is performed because the effects described above are exhibited. An effect unit can be provided.

  Further, when the sub effect display device 3640 is moved to the retreat position at the specific turning position (the first turning position, the second turning position, and the third turning position), the turning of the sub effect display device 3640 is restricted by the guide pin 3363. Therefore, in the second turning position provided to the right of the turning center, a force for turning the sub effect display device 3640 (the turning table 3380) by the weight of the sub effect display device 3640 acts. However, since the force can be received by the guide pin 3363, the sub-effect display device 3640 (turn table 3380) turns downward without permission while the sub-effect display device 3640 stops rotating at the second turning position. Can be prevented, and the effect image by the sub effect display device 3640 can be displayed in a favorable state at the second turning position. Want to can. In addition, since the guide pin 3363 can receive the force for turning the sub-effect display device 3640, the sub-effect display device 3640 (turn table) can be stopped while the sub-effect display device 3640 stops rotating at the second turning position. 3380) can be prevented from being loaded on the back swing drive motor 3370 for turning, and interruption of the game due to overload can be avoided.

  Further, by projecting the guide pin 3363 forward from the unit base 3361, the guide pin 3363 is brought into contact with the sub-effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) at the retracted position to restrict the turning. The sub-produce display device 3640 is regulated in a range of different turning angles by appropriately changing the protruding intervals at a plurality of specific turning positions (first turning position, second turning position, and third turning position). Therefore, depending on the specific turning position where the sub-effect display device 3640 is turned, the sub-effect display device 3640 cannot be turned by the guide pin 3363, or the sub-effect display device 3640 cannot be turned within a predetermined turning angle. To make a reciprocating turn in the turning direction. More specifically, for example, at the second turning position, the two guide pins 3363 are separated in the turning direction by the same width as the slide frame 3630 on which the sub effect display device 3640 is mounted. When the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the retracted position so as to be inserted between the two, the portion of the slide frame 3630 that protrudes outside the turning table 3380 is sandwiched by the two guide pins 3363, The sub effect display device 3640 can be restricted (locked) so as not to turn. In the first turning position and the third turning position, the interval between the two guide pins 3363 in the turning direction is wider than the width of the slide frame 3630 so that the guide pin 3363 is inserted between the two guide pins 3363. When the sub effect display device 3640 is moved to the retracted position, a gap having a predetermined width is provided between the sub effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) and the two guide pins 3363. Only the sub-effect display device 3640 can be turned in the turning direction, and the sub-effect display device 3640 can be restricted to be turnable only within a predetermined turning angle range. As described above, according to the specific turning position, the sub effect display device 3640 can be made unturnable by the guide pin 3363 or can be reciprocally turned in the turning direction within the range of the predetermined turning angle. Depending on the specific turning position at which the effect display device 3640 is located, different movements in the turning direction can be shown to the player, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be bored by various effects, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, except for the specific turning positions (the first turning position, the second turning position, and the third turning position), the distance between the two guide pins 3363 in the turning direction is set to the slide frame 3630 to which the sub effect display device 3640 is attached. When the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved in the direction of the retreat position at the turning position between the two guide pins 3363, the outer side of the slide frame 3630 becomes smaller than the guide pins 3363. The sub effect display device 3640 does not enter between the two guide pins 3363. Therefore, even if another member is attached to a portion (a portion other than the specific turning position) between the two guide pins 3363 having a small interval, it does not come into contact with the sub effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630). Since another member can be attached to the part, the back turning drive motor 3370 for rotating the turning table 3380, the turning detection sensor 336, and the like can be attached to the part as another member, as described above. It is possible to reliably realize the pachinko machine 1 having the function and effect.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be applied, and in this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the rear rear center movable effect unit 3350 of the rear rear movable effect unit 3300, the turning gear 3384 of the turning table 3380 is shown as extending in an arc shape that does not make one round, but is limited to this. Instead of this, the revolving gear 3384 may be formed to extend in an annular shape. This makes it possible to freely rotate the swivel table 3380, thereby providing an effect that makes the player more entertained.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the back rear movable effect unit 3300, in a state where the sub effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) of the rear rear upper movable effect unit 3600 is moved to the projecting position side from the retracted position. When the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 of the back rear left movable rendering unit 3400 and the back rear right movable rendering unit 3500 are moved from the separation position to the approach position, the slide frame 3630 is obtained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rear effect left movable decorative body unit 3401 can be set regardless of the position of the sub effect display device 3640 between the retreat position and the protruding position. In addition, the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 may be movable between the separated position and the approach position. This allows the rear back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 to be moved to the approach position regardless of the position of the rotation angle of the swivel table 3380. Can be presented to the player.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the rear left movable rendering unit 3400 and the rear right movable rendering unit 3500 of the rear movable rendering unit 3300, between the driving pulley 3468 and the driving pulley 3568 and the pulley portion 3465e and the pulley portion 3565e. Is provided with one relay pulley 3469 and one relay pulley 3569, and is wound around a second belt 3471 and a second belt 3571 wound around a pulley portion 3465e and a pulley portion 3565e, and is wound around a drive pulley 3468 and a drive pulley 3568. Although the two belts, the first belt 3470 and the first belt 3570, are used to transmit the rotation, the present invention is not limited to this. The driving belt 3468 and the driving pulley 3568 and the pulley portion 3465e and the pulley portion 3565e Multiple relay pulleys between On the, over sequentially winding the belt between the two pulleys in proximity, it may be caused to transmit the rotation through the three or more belts.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1600 Main effect display device (effect display means)
3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3300 Behind back movable effect unit 3350 Behind center movable effect unit 3360 Fixed side unit 3380 Swivel table 3400 Behind back left movable effect unit 3401 Behind left movable decorative body unit 3410 Back and left rotating decorative body (decoration) body)
3410A First back-left rotating decorative body 3410B Second back-left rotating decorative body 3410C Third back-left rotating decorative body 3410D Fourth back-left rotating decorative body 3411 Decorative body 3412 Shaft 3420 Back-left base (shutter) )
3421 Bottom left back decorative board (decorative board)
3426 First bearing cover (decorative cover)
3427 Second bearing cover (decorative cover)
3429 4th bearing cover (decorative cover)
3431 Back rear left drive motor (rotation drive means)
3432 Drive gear (transmission mechanism, rotary drive mechanism)
3433 Relay gear (transmission mechanism, rotation drive mechanism)
3434 Back rear left drive rack (transmission mechanism, rotary drive mechanism)
3434b Operation rack gear lower (operation rack gear)
3434c On operating rack gear (operating rack gear)
3435 Under transmission gear member (rotation drive mechanism)
3435a driven gear unit (transmission mechanism, rotation drive mechanism)
3435c Transmission gear section (rotation drive mechanism)
3436 On transmission gear member (rotation drive mechanism)
3436a driven gear unit (transmission mechanism, rotation drive mechanism)
3436c Transmission gear section (rotation drive mechanism)
3437 Rotary gear (rotary drive mechanism)
3450 Rotary coupling mechanism (universal shaft coupling)
3451 Arm unit 3452 Spider 3452a Transmission unit 3460 Rear left rear slide unit 3466 Rear rear left slide drive motor (open / close drive unit)
3500 Back rear right movable rendering unit 3501 Rear right movable decorative unit 3510 Rear left rotating decorative body (decorative body)
3510A First back-left rotated decorative body 3510B Second back-left rotated decorative body 3510C Third back-left rotated decorative body 3510D Fourth back-left rotated decorative body 3511 Decorative body 3512 Shaft 3520 Back-left base (shutter )
3521 Back left back decorative board (decorative board)
3526 First bearing cover (decorative cover)
3527 Second bearing cover (decorative cover)
3529 4th bearing cover (decorative cover)
3531 Back rear left drive motor (rotation drive means)
3534 Rear back left drive rack (transmission mechanism, rotary drive mechanism)
3534b Under operating rack gear (operating rack gear)
3534c On operating rack gear (operating rack gear)
3535 Under transmission gear member (rotation drive mechanism)
3535a driven gear (transmission mechanism, rotation drive mechanism)
3535c Transmission gear unit (rotation drive mechanism)
3536 on transmission gear member (rotation drive mechanism)
3536a driven gear unit (transmission mechanism, rotation drive mechanism)
3536c Transmission gear section (rotation drive mechanism)
3537 Rotating gear (rotation drive mechanism)
3560 Back right slide unit 3566 Back right slide drive motor (opening / closing drive unit)

Claims (2)

A game board on which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed ,
A body frame on which the gaming board is mounted,
A door frame provided to be openable and closable on the main body frame,
A swelling portion that swells forward below the game area in a front view and has a predetermined space formed therein,
An upper plate main body in which a game medium for performing a game in the game area is stored,
A lower plate main body which is disposed below the upper plate main body and through which a game medium can flow from a predetermined supply port to a storage area formed by a bottom wall having a predetermined shape and a vertical wall having a predetermined height,
With
The door frame is configured to include the bulging portion, the upper plate main body, and the lower plate main body,
The lower plate main body has a first lower plate portion formed with a region facing the front of the gaming machine, and a second lower plate portion provided integrally with the first lower plate portion and formed with a region not facing the front of the gaming machine. And 2 lower plates,
The predetermined space is formed on the side of the second lower plate so that the game medium in the storage area does not enter regardless of the open / closed state of the door frame,
The second lower plate portion functions as a part of a member that forms the predetermined space,
The width in the left-right direction of the second lower plate portion is larger on the back side than the near side of the second lower plate portion,
A gaming machine , wherein a lower plate cover for covering the second lower plate portion is provided integrally with the lower plate main body regardless of the open / closed state of the door frame .   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the upright wall portion in the second lower plate portion is formed by the lower plate cover.

Images